JP7713629B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

Regarding gaming machines.

In a slot machine, a game starts when a start command device (start lever) is operated after a predetermined number of game medals are inserted, and multiple rows of reels with multiple symbols arranged on the outer periphery rotate. When the reels are stopped by using a reel stop device (stop button) to stop the rotation, if a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, a winning combination such as "777") is lined up on an active line, the machine generally transitions to a special game state (a game state in which the probability of winning a small prize or the like is higher than usual) that is more profitable for the player than the normal game state. In addition to these basic games, slot machines also perform various effects to improve the overall entertainment value. In addition, the payout sound is output, the number of medals won is displayed, and a backlight effect is displayed in conjunction with the payout of the game medals, allowing the player to recognize that the game medals have been properly paid out.

JP 2019-217068 A

Improvements to the performance of this type of gaming machine are desirable.

A predetermined counter is provided,
The main process can be executed.
The timer interrupt process is executable when a predetermined counter times out.
The ROM area has a first control area in which a program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a second control area in which a program related to a gaming machine test is stored,
A vector address of the timer interrupt process is stored in the first control area,
A process for determining an RWM abnormality is executed after the power is turned on and updating of a value of a predetermined counter is started, and an instruction for permitting an interrupt is executable after the process for determining an RWM abnormality is executed;
The main process has a predetermined interrupt disabled section which is a section from an instruction that disables interrupts to an instruction that enables interrupts,
When a specified counter times out at timing A during a specified interrupt prohibited section, timer interrupt processing is not executed at timing A, but the value of the specified counter is updated even after timing A , and timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing B after the interrupt prohibited section ends, and thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing C;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when a period in which a predetermined counter times out is T and timing B is a specific timing before T has elapsed since timing A, timing C is the timing when T has elapsed since timing A.

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the cabinet of the slot machine PS1. A diagram showing the back surface of the front panel PS2. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the inner surface of the cabinet PS3. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing functional blocks. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process. 11 is a flowchart showing a power-off process. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process. 11 is a flowchart showing a power interruption recovery process. 13 is a flowchart showing the main game progress. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process. A flowchart showing the favorable zone clear counter management process. 1 is a diagram illustrating a reel arrangement in the present embodiment. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11 is a diagram illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. 11 is a diagram illustrating the symbol combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 11A to 11C are diagrams illustrating the pattern combinations in this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating a condition device in the present embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. A diagram explaining the internal lottery placement number in this embodiment. This is an example of a push button effect. 13 is an example of a display mode of a display device when a push button effect is executed. This is an example of a step-up preview in normal presentation mode. This is an example of a dialogue preview in normal presentation mode. This is an example of a line preview during a continuous performance. This is an example of a switch image for effect when the front panel PS2 is open. 13 is an example of a switch image for effect in a demo screen. 13 is an example of a switch image for effect in a demo screen. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where the MAX bet switch is not operated to insert a coin after the payout process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where an insert operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed. 13 is a diagram illustrating the case where a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the dispensing process is completed. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where no gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating the case where a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a case where a payout is performed normally. 13 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a case where dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a payout has been normally performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when dispensing is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a program showing the prohibition and permission of interrupts. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a time chart of an 8-bit counter and a timer interrupt process. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the execution timing of a timer interrupt process. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a stage change effect. A figure showing an example of the first continuous performance. A figure showing an example of a second continuous performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a caption is displayed in a continuous performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of the flow until the NEXT image is displayed in a continuous performance. A figure showing an example of a push order navigation image. A figure showing an example of a push order navigation image displayed on a liquid crystal display. A figure showing an example in which a specified error occurs while a push order navigation image is being displayed. This is a time chart for when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when the MAX bet switch is used to insert a bet after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart for when the MAX BET switch is not operated after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart when a MAX BET switch is operated after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry combination is completed. This is a time chart for when no gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning push order role is completed. This is a time chart when a settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed. This is a time chart when a normal payout is not made after a cherry win (when a hopper empty error occurs). This is a time chart when a payout is not made normally after a cherry win (when a hopper retention error occurs). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a reel arrangement used to explain the correct operation challenge presentation. A figure showing a list of condition devices used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations used to explain the correct operation challenge performance. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a list of symbol combinations used to explain the correct operation challenge performance. A diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and pattern combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. A diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and pattern combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. A diagram showing the correspondence between condition devices and pattern combinations used when explaining the correct operation challenge performance. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing examples of game screens when a normal mode is set and when a distribution mode is set. 2 is a diagram showing each area stored in a main control ROM; FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an interrupt initial setting area and automatic allocation according to the priority order of the interrupt initial setting area. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between power-on processing and interrupt vector addresses of timer interrupt processing; 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt vector addresses of the power-on process and the timer interrupt process and other programs. FIG.

<Terminology> "Medals (number of medals)", "game media (number of game media)", and "game value" are synonymous. "Bet", "BET", and "insertion" regarding game media are synonymous, and all refer to the act of betting game media. When expressing a hexadecimal number, it is written as "0x00" or "00h", and if there is no other notation before or after the number, it is expressed in decimal. "Reel" may be called "drum", all of which are synonymous. "Storage means" may be called "RWM", "RAM", or "storage area", all of which are synonymous. "Grant" used in "granting game media" or "granting points", etc. may be called "payout", all of which are synonymous. "Setting/reset switch" may be called "setting change switch" or "reset switch" depending on the function, but in both cases it refers to the same switch. Note that the "setting change switch" and the "reset switch" may each be provided as different switches. When a small symbol combination with a high or low payout stops depending on the operation mode, the small symbol combination with a high payout is called a high symbol (high symbol bell, high symbol small symbol are also synonymous), and the small symbol combination with a low payout is called a low symbol (low symbol bell, low symbol small symbol are also synonymous). In addition, when a symbol combination with no payout stops, it may be called a drop symbol (drop symbol is also synonymous).

Below, an embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as the present embodiment) will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Description of Slot Machine PS1> The components of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 1 to 3.

The slot machine PS1 is roughly divided into a front panel PS2 side and a cabinet PS3 side, with the necessary parts and boards attached to each side. The sides of the front panel PS2 and cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1 are joined by a hinge device and a locking device, and the locking device side can be opened by inserting a lock key into the locking device provided on the front panel PS2 and rotating it in a specific direction. In other words, the front panel PS2 functions as a door to the cabinet PS3.

<Front Panel PS2> The front panel PS2 (also called the front door PS2, front door PS2, or front door PS2) is a plate-like member with a design. On the front side (player side), there are provided a middle panel (including a display window 4, operation instruction lamps 24, etc.), an operation panel 11 (including a bet number display lamp 25, a credit number display 26, an acquired number display 27, etc.), a lower panel 5 (also called the lower panel 5), upper or both side performance lamps, etc., and on the back side, there is a medal selector 34 (
A setting display LED (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as a "selector"), a display device 32, a sub-control board 1000, various boards, etc., and a setting display LED (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a setting value display LED, setting display device, setting value display device, or setting value display device) are provided.

<Display window 4> The display window 4 is an area provided on the front panel PS2, and when the front panel PS2 is closed, the symbols drawn on the reels are visible. The symbols printed on the outer periphery of each reel tape fixed to the reel rim of each of the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c are configured to be visible from the front (player side) through the display window 4. When the reels are stopped, three consecutive symbols out of 21 symbols (20 or 16 symbols may be freely designed depending on the specifications) are visible. In other words, a total of nine symbols (3 symbols x 3 reels) are visible from the display window 4. Here, of the stop positions at which the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c stop three symbols, the uppermost stop position is called the upper row, the center stop position is called the middle row, and the lowest stop position is called the lower row.

<Eligible Line> The eligible line is a symbol combination line that is the target of the winning judgment process (described later) when the left reel 8a, the center reel 8b, and the right reel 8c stop. In this embodiment, the eligible line is visible through the display window 4 and is composed of a symbol combination line (middle horizontal line) that passes through the middle of each reel. When the winning judgment process determines that a symbol combination that has stopped on the eligible line corresponds to any role, processing is performed according to the symbol combination that has stopped. As an example, when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a minor role such as a bell has stopped, a payout process for game medals (hereinafter sometimes referred to as medals, game media, or game value) and a credit addition process are performed, and when it is determined that a symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped, an automatic bet process is performed.

Depending on the slot machine PS1, the number of active lines may be set to five, including an upper horizontal line, a middle horizontal line, a lower horizontal line, a line rising to the right, and a line falling to the right, or six or more lines may be set, including non-straight, roughly mountain-shaped (lower left reel 8a, upper middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), roughly valley-shaped (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, upper right reel 8c), roughly L-shaped (upper left reel 8a, lower middle reel 8b, lower right reel 8c), or the active lines may be set to change depending on the number of coins bet, and may be freely designed according to the specifications of the slot machine PS1. In addition, straight lines other than active lines may be called inactive lines.

<Operation indicator lamps 24> The operation indicator lamps 24 are provided around the display window 4, and indicate the operation sequence of the stop switches 13 (described later) to the player when the left reel 8a, center reel 8b, and right reel 8c are spinning. That is, when the left operation indicator lamp 24a is lit (the center operation indicator lamp 24b and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the left stop switch 13a should be operated, when the center operation indicator lamp 24b is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the right operation indicator lamp 24c are off), it indicates that the center stop switch 13b should be operated, and when the right operation indicator lamp 24c is lit (the left operation indicator lamp 24a and the center operation indicator lamp 24b are off), it indicates that the right stop switch 13c should be operated.

<Bet number display lamp 25> The bet number display lamp 25 (also called the bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25, bet number display lamp 25) is provided on the operation panel 11 and has the function of displaying the number of coins bet by the player's operation. It is also composed of a 1 bet lamp 25a (not shown), a 2 bet lamp 25b (not shown), and a 3 bet lamp 25c (not shown). When one medal is bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a lights up, when a total of two medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a and the 2 bet lamp 25b light up, and when a total of three medals are bet, the 1 bet lamp 25a, the 2 bet lamp 25b, and the 3 bet lamp 25c light up. In addition, although not shown, after the symbol combination related to the replay is displayed, when the automatic bet process is executed, the bet number display lamp 25 corresponding to the number of bets used in the game in which the replay was won is turned on, and the replay lamp is turned on. The timing of lighting the bet number display lamp 25 and the timing of lighting the replay lamp may be simultaneous, or one may be configured to light up first.

<Credit number display 26> The credit number display 26 is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 26a (not shown) which is made up of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the upper digits of the credit number, and a segment display 26b (not shown) which is made up of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the lower digits of the credit number. The credit number refers to the number of medals credited (electrically stored) in the slot machine PS1, and up to 50 can be stored. In addition, when normal play cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a display related to the error may be displayed.

<Acquired coin count display 27> The acquired coin count display 27 is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a segment display 27a (not shown) which is made up of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the upper digits of the acquired coin count, and a segment display 27b (not shown) which is made up of 7 segments and dot points (DP) and mainly displays the lower digits of the acquired coin count. The acquired coin count refers to the number of medals paid out to the player (including those stored in the credit count display 26) depending on the results of the game on the slot machine PS1. In addition, when normal gameplay cannot proceed, such as when an error is detected, a display related to the error may be displayed.

The credit number display 26 and the acquired number display 27 may display information other than the credit number information or the acquired number information depending on whether the DP is lit or not. For example, information indicating that the player is in a favorable zone (described later) or that a specific external signal is being output may be notified by lighting the DP of one of the segment displays. The acquired number display 27 may also have the ability to notify the player of the push order using the display section for the upper digits and the display section for the lower digits. When the acquired number display 27 is used to notify the player of the push order, the acquired number display 27 may be referred to as an instruction monitor.

<Operation Panel 11> The operation panel 11 is provided approximately in the center of the front panel PS2. The operation panel 11 is provided in a stepped shape with a horizontal section that is approximately horizontal and a vertical section that extends approximately vertically downward from the tip of the horizontal section. The vertical section is provided with a start switch 12 and a stop switch 13, which will be described later, and the horizontal section is provided with a medal insertion slot 17, which will be described later, multiple bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), a sub switch 20, a sub cross key switch 21, an eject switch 22, a settlement switch (not shown), and a performance switch (not shown).

<Start switch 12> The start switch (also called start lever) 12 is provided on the vertical part of the operation panel 11. It is a lever-shaped operation part, and the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and when the start switch sensor is OFF when operated, the mechanism determines that the start switch has been operated. The operation of the start switch 12 becomes effective when the number of bets reaches a specified number, and when the operation of the start switch 12 is accepted, it executes an internal lottery process, a process related to the instruction function, a reel rotation process, etc. In addition, in this embodiment, since the input signal is low active, the start switch input signal is OFF when the start switch sensor is ON when not operated, and is ON when the start switch sensor changes from ON to OFF when operated. Not limited to this, the start switch input signal may be ON when the start switch sensor is ON. In other words, the specified number refers to the number of bets required to start playing.

Hereinafter, when it is simply stated that "the start switch is ON" or "the start switch is operated," it means that the start switch sensor has changed from ON to OFF, and the start switch input signal has changed from OFF to ON.

<Stop switch 13> The stop switch 13 is provided on the operation panel 11. In this embodiment, the left stop switch 13a corresponds to the left reel 8a, the middle stop switch 13b corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the right stop switch 13c corresponds to the right reel 8c. In addition, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the color of the lamp provided on the main body of the stop switch 13 or the lamps around it changes to indicate that the stop switch 13 is active. For example, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the light turns blue, and when it cannot be operated, the light turns red. In addition, when the stop switch 13 can be operated, the light turns on, and when it cannot be operated, the light turns off.

<Medal insertion port 17> The medal insertion port 17 is provided on the operation panel 11. It has an opening for inserting medals into the medal insertion port, and restricts the insertion of medals larger than the standard size. Several types of medal insertion ports 17 are manufactured according to the standard sizes of several types of medals, but the installation standards for the various medal insertion ports 17 are the same so that they can be installed on the operation panel 11 in a common manner.

Regarding the insertion of gaming media, the gaming media is not limited to the medals mentioned above, but may be, for example, gaming balls (so-called Parrots) used in pachinko gaming machines, or gaming medium information stored in an electrical storage medium such as a magnetic card or flash memory, which is input into the gaming machine, and the number of bets is set and added when a prize is won based on the input gaming medium information.

<Bet Switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19)> The bet switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When the bet switch is operated when there are medals stored in the credit, the bet process is executed and the bet number is set in the same way as when medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 17. However, even if the bet switch is operated when there are no medals stored in the credit, the bet process is invalid (the operation of the bet switch is not accepted). The MAX bet switch 18 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player, a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part, and a light-emitting part (also called a MAX bet lamp) that lights up the push-down part, and the 1 bet switch 19 is composed of a push-down part operated by the player and a detection part that detects the operation of the push-down part (the 1 bet switch 19 does not have a light-emitting part).

The MAX BET lamp informs the player that betting processing can be performed when the MAX BET switch is operated, and various notification modes are possible, such as lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specified color or blinking the MAX BET lamp at a specified interval. Conversely, when the MAX BET switch is operated but betting processing cannot be performed, possible modes include lighting the MAX BET lamp in a specific color or not lighting the MAX BET lamp.

Also, the slot machine PS1 is provided with a MAX bet switch 18 that allows the user to bet the maximum number of coins (three coins in this embodiment) set for each slot machine PS1, and a 1 bet switch 19 that allows the user to bet one coin. The MAX bet process is executed when the user operates the MAX bet switch 18, and the 1 bet process is executed when the user operates the 1 bet switch 19. The MAX bet process is executable when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently betted is three or more, and the number of bets currently betted is less than three. The MAX bet process cannot be executed when the sum of the number of credits and the number of bets currently betted is less than three (in other words, when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the number of bets is less than three) or when three bets have already been made. The 1 bet process is executable when the number of credits is one or more, and the number of bets currently betted is less than three, and cannot be executed when three bets have already been made.

In addition, the 1 bet switch 19 executes 1 bet processing each time it is operated, and when no bets have been placed, the 1 bet switch 19 is operated three times, resulting in 3 bets. Three operations of the 1 bet switch 19 are equivalent to one operation of the MAX bet switch 18.

In addition, although an embodiment has been described in which the 1 bet switch 19 is disabled when 3 bets have been made, the system may be configured so that when 3 bets have been made and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated once, the 1 bet state is established and 2 cards are returned to the credits.

In addition, while an embodiment has been described in which the MAX bet process executed by operating the MAX bet switch 18 is not executed when the number of bets is less than 3, a process in which the maximum number that can currently be bet is bet can also be considered. In other words, a process in which 2 credits are bet when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated when no bet has been made and the number of credits is 2 can also be considered.

The maximum number of coins that can be betted may be configured to differ depending on the game state, and may be configured such that the maximum number of coins that can be betted during non-bonus play is 3 coins, and the maximum number of coins that can be betted during bonus play is 2 coins.

<Sub-switch 20> The sub-switch 20 is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a push-down part made of a translucent material for direct operation by the player, a detection part for detecting that the push-down part has been operated, and a sub-switch lamp for illuminating the push-down part of the sub-switch. This sub-switch 20 is a switch for mainly displaying a menu screen on the display device 32 described later. In addition to the sub-switch 20 as an input means managed by the sub-control board 1000, a sub-cross key switch 21 (up switch, down switch, left switch, right switch) and a performance switch (a switch operated by an instruction during play) are provided. The sub-switch 20 can also function as a trigger for starting a linkage system with a mobile terminal (hereinafter also referred to as a mobile linkage system) described later. Note that the sub-switch 20 is divided into a menu display function and the performance switch is for operation during play, but they may be a common switch.

The menu screen displays role configuration items, reel arrangement items, volume adjustment items, light intensity adjustment items, and items related to the mobile linkage system, and the cursor selecting an item is controlled to move up and down by operating the up switch or down switch of the sub cross key switch 21. In addition, when the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on any of the items, details of that item are displayed. For example, when the sub switch 20 is operated while the cursor is on the volume adjustment item, a volume adjustment screen is displayed, and the volume can be adjusted by the left switch or right switch of the sub cross key switch 21.

The menu screen can also be displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 when no bets have been placed after the end of a game. The menu screen is displayed by operating the sub-switch 20 regardless of whether the presentation state at this time is normal presentation, continuous presentation, AT presentation, or demo screen (a screen that appears 60 seconds after the end of a game, and which displays the manufacturer's name and a presentation introduction in the form of a moving image). However, this is not limited to the embodiment, and there may also be a configuration in which the menu screen cannot be displayed even if the sub-switch 20 is operated during continuous presentation or AT presentation.

<Switch for Effects> The switch for effects is provided on the operation panel 11 and is composed of a push-down part made of a translucent material to allow the player to directly operate it, a detection part that detects that the push-down part has been operated, and a switch lamp for effects that illuminate the push-down part of the switch for effects. When the switch for effects is operated in a situation where operation of the switch for effects is valid, an effect based on the operation is executed. For example, when a continuous effect is being executed on the display device (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "liquid crystal") 32, a "success" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "successful effect") meaning that a bonus has been awarded in the final game of the continuous effect, or a "failure" display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "failed effect") meaning that a bonus has not been awarded, the switch for effects may be operated to display "success" or "failure".

In addition, when the operation of the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp lights up, making it possible to inform the player that the operation of the effect switch is valid. The lighting mode of the effect switch can be such that it is unlit when the operation of the effect switch is invalid, and is lit when the operation of the effect switch is valid. Another lighting mode when the operation of the effect switch is valid may be such that it is repeatedly lit and turned off at a fixed cycle.

In addition, in a situation where the operation of the performance switch is valid, a display simulating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD to notify the user that the operation of the performance switch is valid. When a display simulating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD, it is displayed based on a command received from the main control means 100. For example, a display simulating the performance switch may be displayed based on a start switch reception command, or a display simulating the performance switch may be displayed based on a command to stop all reels.

<Settlement switch> The settlement switch is provided on the operation panel 11. When operated after the game is finished, the settlement switch executes a process (settlement process) of paying out to the player the number of gaming media bet and the number of gaming media stored in the credit. Note that in this embodiment, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been made and gaming media are stored in the credit, the bet gaming media are paid out first, and then the gaming media stored in the credit are paid out. However, this is not limited to this, and a process of paying out the gaming media stored in the credit only when the number of gaming media bet is 0 may be executed. In other words, when the settlement switch is operated in a situation where a bet has been made, only the bet gaming media are paid out, and then when the settlement switch is operated again, the gaming media stored in the credit are paid out.

<Lower Panel 5> The lower panel 5 is provided below the front panel PS2. It is made of two sheets of transparent resin joined together, with a design sheet sandwiched between the two sheets of resin, and the design sheet is printed with a design that represents the distinctive color of each slot machine PS1.

<Medal payout outlet 45> The medal payout outlet 45 is provided below the lower panel 5. It is an outlet for discharging medals paid out from a hopper 44 (also called a hopper) described later to the outside of the slot machine PS1 (to the tray 28). It also serves as a return port for discharging medals rejected from a medal selector 34 (described later) to the outside of the slot machine PS1.

<Tray 28> The tray 28 is provided below the lower panel 5. It has a generally concave structure so that it can receive and store medals released from the medal payout opening 45, and is provided so that it protrudes toward the player so that the player can check the stored medals.

Other functions of the tray 28 include a cigarette ashtray 29 and a seal storage section 30 with an opening that can store a resin sheet with a union license seal, patent seal, and model seal attached, and display them to the player.

<Speaker S> The speaker S is provided at the top and bottom of the front panel PS2. It is connected to the sub-control board 1000 with a harness (not shown), and outputs sound effects that match the performance, as well as error sounds and warning sounds that notify the user that an error has occurred.

<Display device 32> The display device 32 is provided above the front panel PS2. It is a device capable of displaying images, and various devices such as a liquid crystal display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, and a projector can be used. It is electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and displays various performance images, as well as game instruction images that indicate the order in which to press the stop switch 13 and the key positions during play (when only the press order is displayed, it is called a press order navigation image (also called a press order image, operation sequence image, or operation order image), when only the key positions are displayed, it may be called a key press navigation image (also called a key press image or operation position image), or when both the press order and the press positions are displayed and it may be called an operation mode navigation image (also called an operation mode image) as a higher concept than the press order and the press positions), error images when an error occurs, etc. Also, some slot machines PS1 are not equipped with a display device 32 depending on the model.

<Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable accessories> Other performance devices such as dot displays and movable accessories are provided at any position on the front panel PS2, such as around the display window 4, on the middle panel, or on the lower panel 5. The other performance devices are electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000, and perform various performance images and performance operations, as well as game instruction images and operations that indicate the order in which to press the stop switch 13 and the position to press during play, and error images and operations when an error occurs. The other performance devices are installed arbitrarily according to the type of slot machine PS1. In addition, various devices such as liquid crystal displays, plasma displays, organic EL displays, and projectors can also be used as other performance devices. In particular, in gaming machines that are equipped with a liquid crystal as an auxiliary other performance device, the display device 32 may be called the main display device, and the liquid crystal as the other performance device may be called the sub-display device. In this case, the main display device is configured to have a larger display area than the sub-display device.

<Medal selector 34> The medal selector 34 is located inside the gaming machine on the rear side of the front panel PS2, and is provided in the flow passage below the medal insertion port 17. The medal selector 34 has a medal counting function that counts the number of medals inserted by the player using a sensor provided on the flow passage, a medal removal function that guides inserted medals that do not meet the specifications to the receiving tray 28, an ejection function that removes medals that have become stuck in the medal selector 34 when an eject switch provided on the front side of the front panel PS2 is operated, and a blocker function that removes medals inserted at times other than when medals are accepted from the flow passage using an electrically driven blocking member (also called a blocker). Furthermore, if the medal inserted when medals are accepted is a regular medal, the medal selector 34 discharges the medal into a hopper 44 located downstream.

The various sensors in the medal selector are composed of a passage sensor, insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, and a chute sensor. The passage sensor is the first sensor to detect medals inserted through the medal insertion port, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. Insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 are located downstream of the passage sensor and the blocker, and are provided to determine the passage time of medals passing insertion sensor 1 and insertion sensor 2 to determine whether they pass normally or abnormally. Insertion sensor 2 is located downstream of insertion sensor 1. The chute sensor is located downstream of insertion sensor 2, and is provided to count the number of inserted medals and ejected medals. Since the passage sensor and the chute sensor have overlapping functions, only one of them may be provided.

When the blocker in the medal selector is ON, it allows the game medals to pass through, and when it is OFF, it does not allow the game medals to pass through. Allowing the game medals to pass through means that the game medals inserted through the medal insertion port are guided to the hopper 44, and not allowing the game medals to pass through means that the game medals inserted through the medal insertion port are not guided to the hopper 44.

The following describes the components of the cabinet PS3 in the slot machine PS1.

<Cabinet PS3> Cabinet PS3 is configured in a rectangular box shape with an opening on one side, and inside are provided a reel unit 6, a hopper 44, an auxiliary tank 46, a setting key switch 37, a reset/setting switch 38 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as the "reset switch" or "setting switch"), a power supply 39, a main control board 100, an external output terminal board 47, etc.

<Main control board 100> The main control board 100 is stored in the internal space created when the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are joined together, and the main control board case body and the main control board case cover are crimped together so that they cannot be easily opened or closed (sealed). The main control board 100 is fixed to the main control board case bracket inside the cabinet PS3.

<Reel unit 6> The reel unit 6 is mainly composed of a reel frame, a left reel 8a, a center reel 8b, and a right reel 8c. The reel unit 6 is attached to a reel base 7 inside the center of the cabinet PS3, and is fixed with locking members (screws or rivets).

The reels (left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, right reel 8c) are composed of a reel base, a reel tape with multiple types of patterns attached to the outer circumference of the reel base, a stepping motor axially supported by the reel base, and a motor fixing base to which the stepping motor is fixed, which is generally considered to be the reel unit. A different pattern arrangement is drawn on the reel tape for each reel.

When the start switch 12 is operated by the player, the reels are accelerated, and after reaching a constant speed (approximately 80 rotations per minute), the stepping motor moves one step each time a timer interrupt process (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as interrupt process) is executed, maintaining a constant speed rotation state (constant speed rotation), and then, depending on the player's operation of the stop switch 13, the corresponding reel is moved at a constant speed rotation to a stop position determined for each stop operation reception position, and after the reel has been moved to the stop position, the brakes are applied (a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the rotation of the reel and terminating the excitation output.

In addition, an index is provided on the spoke part provided at the reel base of each reel, and an index sensor provided on the motor fixing base of each reel detects the index to determine the position of the reference pattern (also called the initial pattern) during each rotation. In this embodiment, the stepping motor, which is the driving source of the reel, has 336 steps, and during constant speed rotation, one rotation is completed with 336 timer interrupt processes. During constant speed rotation, a rotation failure detection counter is incremented every time the timer interrupt process is executed twice, and if the counter value of the rotation failure detection counter reaches 180, it is determined that there is a rotation failure. In other words, if the reel does not rotate once even after executing the timer interrupt process 360 times, it is determined that there is a rotation failure. The rotation failure detection counter is set to 0 when the index is detected, so that if the constant speed rotation process is normal, the rotation failure detection counter will reach 0 before it reaches 180.

In this embodiment, a determination is made as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing, and a determination is not made as to whether an index has been detected during acceleration processing, but this is not limiting, and a determination as to whether an index has been detected during constant speed processing and acceleration processing may also be made. With this configuration, it is possible to make it possible to more quickly bring the player into a state where stop acceptance is possible.

In addition, a back lamp unit is provided on the motor fixing base of each reel, which is turned on to highlight the stopped symbols after the reel has stopped, and to improve the visibility of the symbols while the reel is spinning.

<Hopper 44> The hopper 44 is a device that mainly stores medals inserted by players. The hopper 44 is placed by engaging with a rail provided on the bottom plate of the cabinet PS3, and can slide back and forth along the rail. The hopper 44 is composed of a storage tank section that receives and stores medals guided from the medal selector 34 into the gaming machine, a hopper motor that is driven by a drive signal input from the hopper drive means, a turntable that is supported by the hopper motor and aligns the medals in the storage tank section, a medal payout section that has a discharge mechanism for discharging medals one by one into the tray 28 by rotating the turntable, a medal discharge port that discharges medals by the medal payout section, and a payout sensor that detects medals discharged from the medal discharge port.

<Auxiliary tank 46> The auxiliary tank 46 is configured to be able to store medals, and medals stored in excess of the capacity of the storage tank section of the hopper 44 are stored in the auxiliary tank 46 through a downwardly sloping rail section provided in the storage tank section. The auxiliary tank 46 has a rectangular box structure, and when installed in the cabinet PS3, two full detection electrodes attached to the cabinet PS3 are exposed in the auxiliary tank 46 from through holes provided on at least one side. When a certain amount or more of medals inserted from the medal insertion port are stored, the two full detection electrodes become conductive through the medals, and it is determined that the hopper 44 and the auxiliary tank 46 are full. The number of full detection electrodes is not limited to two, and the number of full detection electrodes may be changed, such as three. The method of full detection is not limited to using full detection electrodes, and full detection may be possible by a sensor provided at a predetermined position detecting medals.

<Setting key switch 37> The setting key switch 37 is provided on a setting key switch unit with an opening/closing door on the front side provided inside the slot machine PS1. After opening the front panel PS2, access is possible by opening the opening/closing door of the setting key switch unit. To turn on the setting key switch 37, insert the setting key and rotate it 90 degrees to the right. When the setting key switch 37 is on and medals can be accepted, the current setting value can be confirmed, and if it is determined that the setting key switch 37 is on during the power-off recovery process (also called the power-on process) when the power is turned on, a setting change process (described later) is executed.

<Power supply unit 39> The power supply unit 39 is located at the lower left when viewed from the front of the cabinet PS3. The power supply unit 39 has a rectangular box structure, with a power switch 40 provided on the outside and a power supply board that generates voltage provided inside. The power supply unit 39 is individually connected to the reel device board and the sub-control board 1000 via harnesses (not shown), and is further connected from the reel device board to the main control board 100 via a harness, supplying power to the main control board 100.

When the power switch 40 is turned on, the power supply device 39 is configured to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1, generate a predetermined voltage, and cause the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000 to take in the predetermined voltage, and when the power switch 40 is turned off, it is configured not to take in power from outside the slot machine PS1.

<External output terminal board 47> The external output terminal board 47 (also called the external centralized terminal board 47) is generally attached inside the cabinet PS3 of the slot machine PS1, and converts the signal related to the game result output from the main control board 100 into a signal of a predetermined format and transmits it to the outside of the slot machine PS1. The game result includes the number of coins inserted, the number of coins paid out, the number of bonuses (number of big bonuses, number of regular bonuses), a door opening signal, etc. Other conditions for transmitting a signal to the outside can be set based on predetermined information controlled by the main control board 100, such as when the AT state is reached, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, or when the value of a counter related to the game reaches a predetermined value.

<Functional block diagram> The functional block diagram of the slot machine PS1 according to this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 4.

<Main control board 100> The slot machine PS1 of this embodiment is electrically connected from the main control board 100 (also referred to as the main control means 100, main control board 100, or main control means 100) which controls the general flow of the game to the sub-control board 1000 (also referred to as the sub-control means 1000, sub-control board 1000, or sub-control means 1000), door relay board (also referred to as the central display board), reel device board, reset/setting switch 38, setting key switch, etc., enabling data communication. However, two-way communication is not possible between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 1000, and data communication is possible via one-way communication from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 1000.

The main control board 100 is equipped with a main control chip. The main control chip allows data communication between the main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM, etc. via a bus. The main control chip also has a main control built-in register, and the main control built-in register and the main control CPU can communicate data with each other via a bus. The main control chip also has general-purpose registers (e.g., A register, B register, C register, D register, E register, H register, L register) that the main control CPU can use for calculations, etc., a PC register that stores the program (return address) after a return command (e.g., RET command) after executing a program by a call command (e.g., CALL command), and an interrupt register (e.g., IFF1 register, IFF2 register) that manages the enable and disable states of maskable interrupts.

By controlling the main control chip, the role selection (also called internal selection), reel drive control (also called reel control), payout control, etc. are appropriately transmitted to various boards. In addition, when a selected role (also called AT role, AT target role, push order role, eye push role, or operation procedure role including both push order role and eye push role) is won as a result of the internal selection, the sub-control board 1000 transmits selected role information (selected role group information, information regarding the display of selected roles) to enable the sub-control board to notify information regarding the display of selected roles (push order, operation timing) when the main control means 100 notifies the sub-control board. In addition, all processing related to the AT, such as transition to the AT, extension of the number of AT plays, and push order notification, is sometimes referred to as processing related to the instruction function. The push order role is a condition device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the order in which the reels are stopped (push order), and the eye-pressing role is a condition device in which the stopping symbol combination and the game medals awarded to the player differ depending on the timing at which the stop button is operated.

The main control ROM mounted on the main control board 100 has a storage capacity of "16 KB or less", and has a use area (also referred to as a first program area) of "7.5 KB or less" and the rest outside the use area (also referred to as a second program area). The use area has a control area (also referred to as a first control area) of "4.5 KB or less" in which the program executed by the main control board 100 is stored, and a data area (also referred to as a first data area) of "3.0 KB or less" in which only information other than the program (for example, internal lottery table information) is stored or will be stored. Outside the use area, there is a control area (also referred to as a second control area) and a data area (also referred to as a second data area) similar to the use area. The use area stores programs related to the progress of the game, and outside the use area stores programs related to fraud prevention and programs used for gaming machine testing.

The main control RAM mounted on the main control board 100 has a memory capacity of "1024B or less," with a usable area of "512B or less" (also referred to as the first working area) and a non-usable area (also referred to as the second working area). The first working area is a memory area that can be rewritten as the game progresses, and the second working area is a memory area that can be rewritten when programs for anti-fraud measures and gaming machine testing are executed.

The main control RAM's memory areas built into the main control chip include a memory area for switch state flags indicating the on/off state of the play stop switch and the on/off state of the automatic settlement switch, a memory area for setting value information indicating one of the values 1 to 6 that is set, a memory area for RT state information indicating which of multiple RT states the RT state is in, a memory area for specific condition devices indicating the winning state of specific condition devices such as bonuses, a memory area for game information that stores other information necessary to progress the game, an unused memory area, a memory area for a stack area in which data evacuated from registers is stored, and a memory area for a temporary stack area that is set when the power is turned on.

The main control RAM is initialized when the setting change means changes the settings, when the power is turned off and back on, and at the start of each game. The range of the main control RAM memory area that is initialized differs depending on the case.

If power recovery is not performed normally or recovery is not possible during the setting change process, data 0 is set (initialized) to the RAM area excluding the storage area for the switch status flag. In other words, only the switch status flag carries over the status before the setting change; for example, the RT status and condition device flags are cleared and not carried over.

In addition, during the setting change process, if the power supply can be restored normally or if the state is not one in which restoration is impossible, i.e., if the setting change process is performed normally, data 0 is set in the RAM area excluding the areas storing the switch state flag, the setting value information storage area, the RT state information storage area, and the specific condition device storage area. In other words, the RT state, setting value data, and condition device flag are inherited so that the game can be played with the setting value after the setting change while maintaining the game state before the setting change. The setting value data inherits the information before the setting change, and a new setting value is set in the subsequent setting change process, so it is used in the sub-control board 1000 to determine whether a setting change has been made.

In addition, when the power is restored, data 0 is set to unused memory areas in the RAM area at the start of each game, and data 0 is set to memory areas in the stack area excluding the maximum used area when the RAM is initialized when the power is restored.

The main control internal registers built into the main control chip are used to control the operation settings and functions of each peripheral circuit (e.g., timer circuits, etc.) built into the main control chip.

For example, by writing (also called setting or storing) data to a specified memory area of the main control built-in register using a program stored in the main control ROM, it is possible to make settings (timer circuit settings) related to maskable interrupt processing (e.g. timer interrupt processing), which is one of the programs stored in the main control ROM.

<Sub-control board 1000> The sub-control board 1000 is equipped with a sub-control chip. The sub-control chip allows the sub-control CPU, sub-control ROM, sub-control RAM, etc. to communicate data with each other via a bus. The sub-control board 1000 is capable of two-way communication with the performance control board, and transmits data specifying the performance to be output to the speaker S, LED lamps, sub-switches 20, performance switches, etc. Data for the display device 32 is transmitted to the image control board. The sub-control board 1000 is also supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Reel device board> The reel device board is a relay board that communicates data between the reel motor, reel sensor, door switch, payout sensor, external output terminal board 47 (also called external centralized terminal board 47), etc. and the main control board 100. The reel motor controls the drive of the reel. The reel sensor is a sensor that determines whether the reel is operating normally, and transmits data to the reel device board when a protruding piece (also called an index) passes the sensor. The door switch is a sensor that determines whether the front door PS2 is open or not. The payout sensor is a sensor that determines whether medals pass properly when being paid out from the hopper 44. The external centralized terminal board is a relay board for transmitting data to a hall computer outside the gaming machine. In addition, the reel device board is supplied with power directly from the power supply board.

<Door relay board> The door relay board receives information from various sensors in the selector (insertion sensor 1, insertion sensor 2, passage sensor, shoot sensor), bet switch information, stop switch information, and settlement switch information, and outputs information from the board such as blocker information, credit number information, bet number information, replay symbol combination display information, and payout number information. The door relay board is electrically connected to the selector, bet switch, stop switch, settlement switch, credit number display 26, payout number display, replay lamp, 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, 3 bet lamp, start lamp, medal insertion possible lamp, and advantageous zone lamp.

<Performance control board> The performance control board (also called performance control means) is electrically connected to the sub-switch 20, the sub-cross key switch 21, the performance switch, the movable props, the speaker S, the back lamp, the LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and the image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32.

The performance control means is configured to be capable of two-way communication with the sub-control means 1000, and controls the output of performance to the performance device based on performance commands received from the sub-control means 1000.

The performance control means selects the performance content based on the result of the lottery of the role by the internal lottery means. In this embodiment, multiple types of performance content are prepared in advance, and the performance control means selects the performance content by lottery using software random numbers after the lottery of the role is performed by the internal lottery means at the start of the game, etc.

In addition, there are multiple types of presentation content depending on not only the results of the role selection but also the results of the freeze selection and the game state (RT state, freeze state), etc. Specifically, there are multiple types of presentation content corresponding to when a bonus is won, when a small role is won, when a replay is won, when a non-win is won, etc.

The presentation content determines what kind of presentation will be output (how the lamp will be turned on, blinking, or turned off, what kind of sound will be output from the speaker S, what kind of image will be displayed on the display device 32, etc.) and at what timing (when the start switch 12 or each stop switch 13 is operated, etc.) as the game progresses.

It is also possible to generate effects output by the effect control means in response to operations by the player. For example, it is possible to generate effects by the effect control means of the sub-control board 1000 based on sub-control commands transmitted from the main control board 100 in response to operation signals from the start switch 12, stop switch 13, medal slot 17, bet switches (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19), settlement switches, etc., whose operation signals are input to the main control board 100, or to generate effects directly from the sub-control board 1000 in response to sub-input switch operation means, such as the sub-switch 20, sub cross key switch 21, and effect switches, whose operation signals are input to the sub-control board 1000. Also, although the sub-control board 1000 and the effect control board are separate boards, they may be configured as a single board. In that case, the sub-control board 1000 has the functions and processing of the performance control board, and the sub-switch 20, sub-cross key switch 21, performance switch, movable props, speaker S, back lamp, LED lamps provided on the front panel PS2, and an image control board that controls the display content of the display device 32 may be electrically connected to the sub-control board 1000.

<Image control board> The image control board (also called image control means) is equipped with an image control ROM, sound ROM, cooling fan, etc. for specifically displaying the performance content on the display device 32.

<Additional information on board configuration> The sub-control board and the performance control board may be configured on one board, or the sub-control board, the performance control board, and the image control board may be configured on one board.

<Power supply board> In this embodiment, the slot machine PS1 supplies power from the power supply board to the reel device board and the sub-control board based on the operation of the power switch 40. The power supplied to the reel device board is then supplied to the main control board 100 and the door relay board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, which then becomes electrically connected. The power supplied to the sub-control board 1000 is then supplied to the performance control board, which then becomes the image control board. The supplied power is then supplied to each component, which then becomes electrically connected.

Next, we will explain the control of the main control board 100, which controls the game on the gaming machine.

<Types of errors> Errors can be broadly divided into recoverable errors and unrecoverable errors.

<Recoverable errors> A recoverable error is an error that indicates an error related to the selector (medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error), an error related to the hopper 44 (hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error), a door open error, a harness coming loose, etc. When a recoverable error is set, if the cause of the various recoverable errors is removed and the reset switch is operated, it is possible to return to play without having to turn the power back on. During a recoverable error, information about the error that has occurred is displayed on the display device 32, payout number indicator, and various lamps to inform the player of what error has occurred.

If a recoverable error is detected during play, the game progress may be stopped at the time of detection, or after the game in which the recoverable error was detected has ended. By stopping game progress during a recoverable error, damage to the amusement center manager can be reduced even if the recoverable error occurred due to fraud. The condition for recovering from a recoverable error state may be configured to automatically recover by removing the cause of the error, and an error that can be recovered from without turning the power back on is called a recoverable error.

<Unrecoverable Error> In the slot machine PS1 of this embodiment, when an unrecoverable error occurs, interrupts are prohibited, the output of the output port is cleared, and other measures are taken to restrict game progress, and the credit number display 26 displays a message according to the type of error, thereby informing the player that an unrecoverable state has occurred.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error is set, the recoverable error is released when a reset switch (not shown) is operated, but once an irrecoverable error is set, the irrecoverable error is not released by simply accepting a reset switch operation or by turning the power back on. In this case, the system is configured to release the irrecoverable error by performing a setting change process. When the power is turned back on in the event of an irrecoverable error, after part of the power failure recovery process is executed, the irrecoverable error display is repeatedly executed, and control is exercised so that subsequent game processing is not executed.

Irrecoverable errors include when the number of coins bet during the draw is outside the specified range, when the set value error check indicates that the value is not within the normal range, when it is determined that the power outage process was not performed correctly when the power is restored, when a random number anomaly is detected such as an abnormality in the crystal oscillator frequency, or when a symbol combination corresponding to a non-winning role is stopped on a winning line during the winning determination process.

In addition, if an unrecoverable error occurs, game progress will be halted regardless of whether the game is in progress or on standby (from the end of a game to the start of the next game).

<Game method and game flow> To play with the slot machine PS1, first insert medals into the medal insertion slot 17, or operate the MAX BET switch 18, 1 BET switch 19 to bet medals stored in advance, thereby setting a pre-defined number of medals to be bet (also called the stipulated number). In this embodiment, the stipulated number is set to three medals. By setting the number of medals to be bet, the active line is set to active, and the machine becomes available for play.

When a new medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot when the number of medals bet is set to the upper limit, the number of game medals stored in the credits increases. The maximum number of medals that can be stored in the credits is limited to 50. When medals that exceed the upper limit of the number of medals bet (3 medals) and the upper limit of the number of medals stored (50 medals) are inserted through the medal insertion slot (the 54th medal), the blocker of the medal selector is turned off (a state that prevents medals from being inserted into the gaming machine) and the medals are returned to the tray. In other words, when the number of medals bet is at the upper limit and the number of stored credits is at the upper limit, the blocker is turned off (a path to the hopper 44 in the selector is no longer formed).

When medals are inserted, the bet number is added when the bet number is less than three (less than the maximum bet number in the game state when the medals are inserted). When medals are inserted, the credits can be saved when the bet number is three (the maximum bet number in the game state when the medals are inserted) and the credits are less than 50 (less than the upper limit that can be saved in the credits). In other words, when the sum of the bet number and the saved credits is less than 53, the medals will enter the gaming machine when inserted from the medal insertion slot. In addition, another condition for the medals to enter the gaming machine when inserted is that the game is in standby (the period from the end of a game to the start of the next game). For example, the medal insertion requirement is met even during game standby after a symbol combination related to a replay is displayed and the automatic bet process is executed. In this case, three medals have been bet in the automatic bet, so if the saved credits are less than 50, the medal insertion requirement is met.

Next, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal lottery process is executed, and after the result of the internal lottery process (also called the role lottery result or condition device number) is determined, it is determined whether the minimum play time (also called the wait time (period) or 4.1 second timer) has elapsed, and if the wait time has elapsed, the reels begin to spin, and if the wait time has not elapsed, the reels wait without spinning until the wait time has elapsed.

Next, when an operation (stop operation) of any of the stop switches 13 (left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, right stop switch 13c) is accepted, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops according to the result of the role selection and the timing when the stop operation was accepted. When all reels stop (also called a full stop), it is determined whether or not each of the stopped symbols determined at the time of acceptance of the stop of each reel is abnormal, and if they are not abnormal, a search is performed to determine which symbol combination has stopped, and depending on the symbol combination that corresponds to the search result, processing such as the payout of medals (including addition to credits), setting of a replay (automatic bet processing), setting of a bonus state, ending of the bonus state, setting of a RT state, and ending of the RT state is performed, and one game is completed.

<Freeze Processing> Freeze processing (also called freeze effect), which temporarily stops and delays game progress for a predetermined period of time, can include temporarily stopping functions related to game progress, such as accepting game media, accepting the operation of a bet switch to determine the number of game media to be bet on credited in advance, accepting the operation of the start switch 12 to start game play, or accepting the operation to stop the reels. The freeze processing (freeze effect) is a process controlled by the main control board 100.

The freeze effect may be to temporarily halt all of the functions related to the game progress described above, or to temporarily halt only some of the functions.

Examples of ways to temporarily halt the progress of a game include not performing control processes based on the player's operation (processing to form a path through which medals are guided to the hopper 44 by blocker control, processing to set the number of coins to bet based on the operation of the bet switch, processing to spin the reels or internal lottery processing based on the operation of the start switch 12, and processing to stop the reels based on the operation of the stop switch 13).

When an input signal based on a player's operation is issued during a period in which game progress is paused by a freeze effect, the system performs processing such as not performing control processing based on the input signal, not accepting the input signal, or delaying the transmission of the input signal until a specified period has passed, thereby delaying the timing of the end of one game compared to when the freeze effect is not performed.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the start switch 12, there are cases where when the start switch 12 is operated, the reels are not rotated for a predetermined period of time, but are rotated after the predetermined period has elapsed, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing and reel rotation are not performed for a predetermined period of time, but are performed after the predetermined period of time, when the start switch 12 is operated, an internal drawing is performed for a predetermined period of time, but the reels are not rotated, but are rotated after the predetermined period of time, when the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed, a predetermined period is set after which the reels are rotated and stopped during the predetermined period, and when the start switch 12 is operated and an internal drawing is performed and the reels are rotated, a predetermined period is set after which the stop switch 13 stop acceptance is disabled for the predetermined period.

Regarding the freeze effect that is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13, the control process for the freeze effect is different between the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13 and the freeze effect that is performed based on the stop display of a specific symbol on the reel as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13.

As an example of the control process for the freeze effect that is performed based on the acceptance of the operation of the stop switch 13, when the left stop switch 13a is operated to freeze while all reels are rotating, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c can be disabled after the left reel corresponding to the left stop switch 13a stops. This means that for a specified period of time, the player cannot stop the spinning middle and right reels, but after the specified period has elapsed, the stop acceptance of the middle stop switch 13b and the right stop switch 13c is enabled, so the timing until the end of one game can be delayed.

Control processing for freeze effects that is performed based on a specific symbol being displayed frozen on a reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 may include disabling the acceptance of the stop of the last stop switch 13 when a specific symbol is displayed frozen on each reel as a result of accepting the operation of a stop switch 13 other than the last stop switch 13 to be stopped, or not performing control processing such as setting the number of bets based on the operation of a bet switch to start the next game, detecting the insertion of gaming media using a passing sensor, or automatic betting processing that is performed when a replay stops on an active line, based on a specific symbol being displayed frozen on each reel as a result of accepting the operation of the last stop switch 13 to be stopped.

During the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, the game progress control based on the player's operation is temporarily suspended, but game machine operations that are not related to the progress of the game can be executed. For example, even if the stop control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 is not performed, the reel rotation pattern can be set arbitrarily, such as rotating in the normal rotation pattern, or rotating slower or faster than normal.

The reel rotation patterns during a specified period of time may include rotating the reels in the opposite direction to normal rotation (so-called reverse rotation), rotating the reels a specified number of times to display a specific symbol combination, stopping a specific reel among multiple reels while the other reels are rotating, changing the reel rotation speed, or changing the reel operation due to the player's operation.

The specified period during which the freeze effect is performed can be changed according to specified conditions. Here, the specified conditions include the detection of a signal based on the operation acceptance status of various switches by the player (operation status of the start switch 12, bet switch, stop switch 13, settlement switch, etc.) and the result of a freeze lottery. In addition, examples of changing include shortening or lengthening the specified period during which the freeze effect is performed, during which the game progress is temporarily stopped, and switching the rotation mode of the reels.

Examples of control processes that shorten the pause period include forcibly terminating the pause period or rewriting it to a period shorter than the pause period. Examples of control processes that lengthen the pause period include adding another period after the pause period or rewriting the pause period to a longer period. In addition, the pause period based on the freeze effect does not need to have an upper limit, and may continue until a certain result is reached based on the result of the operation reception.

The pause period during which the freeze effect is performed may be set after the wait period has elapsed, or may be set to include the wait period. If the wait period is included, the wait period is compared with the freeze effect period, and if the freeze effect ends during the wait period, the freeze effect is executed during the wait period. If the freeze effect does not end during the wait period, the freeze effect period is set after the wait period, or the remaining wait period is resumed after the freeze effect ends. Also, if the freeze effect period is longer than the wait period, it is possible to omit the process of comparing the wait period with the freeze effect period and start the freeze effect after the start switch 12 is operated (after the internal lottery process).

As a freeze effect, it is also possible to perform a freeze effect (also called a pseudo game) during the acceleration process as if a normal game were in progress. In the pseudo game, the start switch 12 is operated, and a pseudo game period is determined during the acceleration process of the reels after the internal lottery is performed. During the pseudo game period, the reel rotation control is performed as in a normal game (the reel rotation control is performed based on the operation of the start switch based on the start of the pseudo game), and the reel stop control is performed based on the operation of the stop switch 13. In addition, the reels may be configured to rotate again by the operation of the start switch 12 during the pseudo game period. However, the internal lottery process based on the operation of the start switch 12 and the winning determination process or payout control process based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not performed.

In addition, in pseudo-games, when the reels stop as a result of the operation of the stop switch 13, or when the reels stop automatically as a reel effect, the stopped reels are made to sway up and down (so-called sway fluctuation). This allows the player to determine whether they are playing a normal game or a pseudo-game when they operate the stop switch 13.

<Symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention> Symbol combinations that do not require technical intervention refer to symbol combinations that can always stop and display the winning symbol combination on an active line, regardless of when the stop switch 13 is operated while the reels are spinning. For example, when bell symbols are arranged every three symbols on all reels, bell-bell-bell always stops (100% attraction rate), so this can be said to be a symbol combination that does not require technical intervention. Hereinafter, an attraction rate of 100% will be referred to as PB=1, and a winning symbol combination with an attraction rate of 100% on all reels may be referred to as PB=1 role.

On the other hand, PB≠1 means that the winning symbol combination will not stop depending on the timing of when the stop switch 13 stops while the reels are spinning. For example, if there is a location within the pull-in range where there are no symbols related to the winning symbol (e.g., 5 symbols apart), then PB≠1, and the winning symbol may be referred to as a PB≠1 symbol.

<Small win priority control, bonus priority control> Small win priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win is won within a bonus, if both a small win symbol and a bonus symbol can be drawn in, the symbol related to the small win will be drawn in.

Bonus priority control means that when a small win and a bonus are both won, or when a small win within a bonus is won, if both a symbol related to a small win and a symbol related to a bonus can be drawn, the symbol related to the bonus is drawn.

Also, since replays have the highest priority and cannot be missed, when the condition device flags for replay and small win, or replay and bonus are on at the same time, the replay-related symbols are always drawn.

<Normal section> The normal section is a section in which processing related to the instruction function cannot be performed. When a push order role is won in a normal section, a process is executed to send masked information (performance group number) indicating which push order was won to the sub-control means 1000. In addition, when a push order role is won in a normal section, a notification of the push order (both correct and incorrect push orders) is not displayed on the instruction monitor. As a result, in a normal section, even if a push order role is won, both the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 1000 do not notify the push order, so that even if a push order role is won in a normal section, it is not always clear whether it is correct or incorrect.

<Advantageous Zone> The advantageous zone is a zone in which processing related to the instruction function can be executed, and is provided to suppress excessive medal acquisition by the AT. If you win the advantageous zone transition lottery executed in the normal zone, you can transition to the advantageous zone. In the advantageous zone, a transition lottery to the AT can be held, but in order to suppress the excessive medal acquisition mentioned above, the advantageous zone is designed to end and transition to the normal zone based on certain conditions. Specifically, these conditions include: 1) when 1500 games have been played since the next game after transitioning to one advantageous zone; 2) when more than 2400 medals have been acquired from the next game after transitioning to one advantageous zone; and 3) when any condition is met. These conditions make it possible to suppress excessive medal acquisition. Note that the arbitrary condition in 3) can be, for example, when one AT ends or when a specific pattern combination is displayed.

If it is an advantageous zone, information indicating that it is an advantageous zone (also called advantageous zone type) is stored in a specified RAM area. If the value stored in the RAM area is 0 (if the advantageous zone type is 0), it indicates that it is a normal zone, and if the value stored in the RAM area is 1 (if the advantageous zone type is 1), it indicates that it is an advantageous zone.

<Advantageous Zone Lamp> The advantageous zone lamp is provided as information on the main side indicating that the player is in the advantageous zone. This allows the player to easily determine whether or not the player is in the advantageous zone by checking whether the advantageous zone lamp is on or off. Specifically, when the DP of the credit number display 26 is on, it indicates that the player is in the advantageous zone, and when the DP of the credit number display 26 is not on, it indicates that the player is not in the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone lamp is lit when all reels stop, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted by the player is detected, when the second medal inserted by the player is detected, when the third medal inserted by the player is detected, after the start switch is accepted, or after the selection role is won by the internal lottery. In addition, the condition for always lighting the lamp is when the player is in the advantageous zone, when the operation procedure information of the selection role is announced, and when the ball payout rate (maximum ball payout rate) of the announced game exceeds 1 (when it increases).

In addition, the machine is configured to light up the advantageous zone lamp even when it is notifying the player of the push order sequence to transition to an RT where the payout rate does not exceed 1 but the replay probability is high, since the machine does not have a push order minor feature due to its specifications. This is to inform the player that the advantageous zone lamp is in an advantageous state, and to prevent players from suffering losses due to not understanding the specifications of the gaming machine.

Note that if the conditions for turning on the favorable zone lamp as described above are not met, the timing for turning on the favorable zone lamp after moving to a new favorable zone can be arbitrary.

In addition, once the advantageous zone lamp is lit, it will remain lit until the advantageous zone ends, and will be turned off before the start switch operation for the next game after the game in which the advantageous zone ends is accepted (after all reels have stopped, after the bet switch operation is accepted, when the first medal inserted during maintenance is detected, when the second medal inserted during maintenance is detected, or when the third medal inserted during maintenance is detected).

By configuring it in this way, even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, it may be an advantageous zone, and the player can be given a sense of expectation that the processing related to the instruction function will be executed even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit. As a result, while in the past, if it was a normal zone, the game was simply waiting for the transition to the advantageous zone, with the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible that an AT transition lottery or the like is being held even if the advantageous zone lamp is not lit, making it possible to maintain motivation to play.

In addition, when the advantageous zone type is 1, it does not necessarily mean that the zone is advantageous. This is because in a game in which the advantageous zone type is 0 and the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, causing the advantageous zone type to become 1, the advantageous zone type is 1 but the game state is still in the normal zone because it has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone. When executing the process to send a test signal indicating whether the zone is advantageous or normal, referring to the advantageous zone type will result in sending a signal for the advantageous zone even though it is a normal zone, and a signal different from the intended state will be sent.

To prevent this situation, when transmitting a test signal indicating whether the zone is favorable or normal, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is referred to. When the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0, a process is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is normal, and when the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 (the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 1 to 1500), a process is executed to output a test signal indicating that the zone is favorable. By configuring in this way, the process for outputting the test signal can accurately identify the state by simply determining whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0 or not, thereby eliminating pressure on the program capacity and improving the program execution speed. As described above, when the favorable zone is terminated under any termination condition, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is set to 1, so that the process for outputting the test signal can accurately output that the zone is favorable even in a game where the favorable zone ends. <AT> AT is an abbreviation for assist time, also called a notification period, and is a period for facilitating the player to win a role that has been won by a role lottery (hereinafter referred to as notification). Generally, the means of notification in an AT include the operation timing of the stop switch, the operation sequence of the stop switch, and the operation timing and sequence of the stop switch, which are also referred to as the operation procedure or operation mode.

<Grouping of Selected Roles> When a selected role is won during a non-AT, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 a performance group number indicating that the selected role has been won, and when a selected role is won during an AT, the main control means 100 transmits to the sub-control means 1000 a performance group number and operation procedure information. In other words, since operation procedure information is not transmitted to the sub-control means 1000 during a non-AT, the sub-control means 1000 is not able to notify the operation procedure. As a result, it is unclear on the sub-control means 1000 side which operation procedure can be used to display a symbol combination advantageous to the player during a non-AT, and since operation procedure information that can display a symbol combination advantageous to the player is transmitted during an AT, the operation procedure can be notified by the liquid crystal display device or operation indicator lamp on the sub-control means 1000 side. This allows the player to easily recognize the operation procedure, and further prevents the operation procedure information from being illegally obtained during a non-AT.

<Processing related to instruction function> The processing related to the instruction function is a concept that includes not only AT-related lotteries such as AT transition lottery, AT additional lottery, and update of AT termination conditions (addition/subtraction of AT play count, addition/subtraction of AT execution notification count), but also processing related to AT state management. The processing related to this instruction function can be executed for a predetermined number of bets for each game state, and is configured to execute processing only when any one of the bet numbers is set when multiple bet numbers are set as a specified number in a certain game state. For example, when two-coin bets and three-coin bets are possible in the bonus internal state, the processing related to the instruction function can be executed only when playing with three-coin bets, and the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed when playing with two-coin bets. In other words, when playing with two-coin bets, even if a role subject to AT lottery is won, the AT lottery is not executed, and the AT play count is not updated according to the progress of the game. In addition, if the SB (single bonus) or CB that ends after one game is only for two-coin bet games, and the game after the SB or CB ends with two or three bets, if a replay is won in the SB or CB and the number of coins automatically bet is two, the processing related to the instruction function cannot be executed in the game after the SB or CB ends (processing related to the instruction function can be executed with a three-coin bet), so the number of bets automatically inserted when a replay is won in the SB or CB is set to three. In this way, processing related to the instruction function can be executed even in the game after the replay is won in the SB or CB, so that a game that is disadvantageous to the player can be eliminated. As mentioned above, the processing related to the advantageous zone is configured to be executed regardless of the number of bets.

<Instruction Monitor> During the AT, when reporting information regarding the operation procedure of the push order role, the winning number display may be used to report the operation procedure information. Specifically, for push order role A (left, center, right correct), "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor, for push order role B (left, right, center correct), "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor, for push order role C (center, left, right correct), "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor, for push order role D (center, right, left correct), "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor, for push order role E (right, left, center correct), "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and for push order role F (right, center, left correct), "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor.

With this configuration, the player can know the correct button press sequence by checking the instruction monitor. Also, because the instruction monitor is controlled by the main control board, it can accurately notify the player of the correct button press sequence even if the sub-control board is tampered with.

In addition, if the indication monitor is also used as the winning coin count display, the lower digits may display the numbers (1 to 6) mentioned above, and the upper digits may display "=" as an identifier. In this case, the identifier allows the player to determine whether the winning coin count display is displaying the winning coin count or the push order, so that the player's recognition is not hindered.

Also, when the instruction monitor is configured as a dedicated display, a three-digit seven-segment display may be used. The reason for using three digits is that it corresponds to the number of reels. In the case of push order A (left, center, right correct), "123" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order B (left, right, center correct), "132" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order C (center, left, right correct), "213" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order D (center, right, left correct), "312" is displayed on the instruction monitor, in the case of push order E (right, left, center correct), "231" is displayed on the instruction monitor, and in the case of push order F (right, center, left correct), "321" is displayed on the instruction monitor. With such a configuration, the push order on the instruction monitor becomes easier to intuitively grasp, and the player can easily grasp the correspondence between the push order and the display on the instruction monitor.

The timing for displaying the push order on the instruction monitor is preferably within the advantageous zone, and any time from after the push order role is selected by the internal lottery executed based on the operation of the start switch until the stop switch can be operated. With this configuration, the push order can be notified to the player before he or she operates the stop switch, preventing the player from performing the stop operation with the incorrect push order.

<Status display monitor (role ratio monitor)> The role ratio monitor is a display device that switches and displays the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio (selectable depending on the specifications of the gaming machine; also called instruction-included role ratio), consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. status ratio every 4800 ms, and is capable of displaying a four-digit number by using four seven-segment LEDs (with DP). The top two digits of the four-digit number displayed by the four seven-segment LEDs are called the identification segment, and the bottom two digits are called the ratio segment.

The "functionality" in the functionality ratio refers to the first type special functionality (so-called RB), the second type special functionality (so-called CB), and the normal functionality (so-called SB), and the "functionality ratio" is the ratio calculated by the payout during functionality operation ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during the operation of the first type special functionality continuous operation device (so-called BB) and the second type special functionality continuous operation device (so-called MB) are also included in the "payout during functionality operation", but payouts during general play during BB and general play during MB are not included in the "payout during functionality operation". Note that "payout" is a term that does not subtract the number of coins inserted, and when it is the number of coins paid out minus the number of coins inserted, it is called the difference in number of coins.

The "continuous feature" in the continuous feature ratio refers to the first type special feature (so-called RB), and the "continuous feature ratio" is a ratio calculated by: payout during operation of the first type special feature ÷ total payout × 100. Note that payouts during operation of the first type special feature continuous operation device (so-called BB) are also included in "payouts during feature operation", but payouts during general play during BB are not included in "payouts during feature operation".

The "instruction-included role" in the instruction-included role ratio includes the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated (so-called AT) in addition to the "role" described above, and the "instruction-included role ratio" is a ratio calculated by (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) ÷ total payout × 100. Here, (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation) does not refer to the payout in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the role is activated, but refers to the sum of the payout number in the game in which the instruction function is activated and the payout number in the game in which the role is activated. If the game in which the instruction function is activated is a game in which the role is activated, the two payout numbers are not added together, but the payout number for that game is (payout during instruction function activation, or payout during role activation). Note that if a player operates the stop switch incorrectly in a game in which the AT is activated, the maximum payout may not be obtained, but in this case the calculation is based on the actual payout.

The information displayed in the identification segment among the information displayed on the ratio monitor is information for identifying which ratio is being displayed among the cumulative favorable zone ratio, cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games, role ratio for the latest 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. state ratio, and is displayed as "7U.", "7P.", "6Y.", "7Y.", "6A.", "7A.", and "5H.", respectively. For example, when "7U." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the cumulative favorable zone ratio, and when "6Y." is displayed in the identification segment, it indicates the consecutive role ratio for the latest 6000 games. Note that the "." displayed on the ratio monitor refers to decimal points.

Of the information displayed on the winning ratio monitor, the information displayed in the ratio segment allows the calculation results of various ratios to be visually confirmed, and is displayed as a two-digit number using two seven-segment LEDs. For example, if the calculation result is 70, "70" is displayed in the ratio segment. The calculated result is rounded down to the nearest whole number. If the calculation result is 100, "99" is displayed. If the cumulative number of games played is less than 400, the ratio segment displays "00."

If the cumulative number of games does not reach the reference number of games, the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner. The reference number of games is determined according to various ratios, and is 175,000 games for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 175,000 games for the cumulative indicated role ratio, 6,000 games for the consecutive role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 6,000 games for the role ratio among the latest 6,000 games, 17,500 games for the cumulative consecutive role ratio, 17,500 games for the cumulative role ratio, and 175,000 games for the cumulative role etc. state ratio.

The ratio segment blinks when the displayed value is equal to or greater than the threshold. The threshold is determined according to various ratios, and is 70 for the cumulative advantageous zone ratio, 70 for the cumulative indicated feature ratio, 60 for the consecutive feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 70 for the feature ratio over the most recent 6000 games, 60 for the cumulative consecutive feature ratio, 70 for the cumulative feature ratio, and 50 for the cumulative feature etc. state ratio. Note that if the cumulative number of games is less than 400 and the calculation result is equal to or greater than the threshold but the ratio segment displays "00", the ratio segment is displayed in a lit state.

To check whether the role ratio monitor is operating normally, a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment for 4800 ms after the power is turned on and the timer interrupt process is started. The test pattern is displayed in a blinking manner by all segments (including DP) of the four 7-segment LEDs that make up the role ratio monitor. For example, "8.8.8.8." may be displayed in a blinking manner. In addition to being displayed immediately after power is turned on, the test pattern may also be displayed when settings are being changed, settings are being confirmed, or an RWM (RAM) abnormal error occurs.

The segments are displayed in a blinking mode in the following cases: when the cumulative number of games played in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games played; when the displayed value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold; and when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and ratio segment. Specifically, the blinking mode is displayed by switching between on and off every 300 ms, such as on 300 ms → off 300 ms → on 300 ms → off 300 ms → .... Also, when various ratio information is switched, it starts with the light on, so that the display period of various ratio information does not become longer or shorter depending on the timing of the light on and blinking.

As described above, the cumulative advantageous zone ratio or cumulative instructed role ratio, consecutive role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, role ratio for the most recent 6000 games, cumulative consecutive role ratio, cumulative role ratio, and cumulative role etc. state ratio displayed on the role ratio monitor are configured to switch display contents every 4800 ms, but by setting this 4800 ms to a multiple of 600 ms, which is one set of lighting and blinking, it is possible to configure it so that one of the 7-segment LEDs is always lit, even if the various ratios displayed on the role ratio monitor are displayed in a blinking mode when they are switched.

By configuring it this way, the light starts to turn on even when various ratio information changes, so it is possible to display the display continuously without any sense of incongruity caused by a shift in the blinking cycle.

In addition, the display period of the test pattern after the power is turned on as described above is also set to 4800 ms, so when the test pattern has finished being displayed for 4800 ms, the 7-segment LED goes out, and the next timer interrupt process turns on and makes it possible to display information regarding the cumulative favorable zone ratio or cumulative instruction-included role ratio.

Next, we will explain how to control the blinking display on the role ratio monitor.

In order to blink the display mode of the role ratio monitor, it has a memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is a 2-byte memory area, and executes a process of adding 1 for each timer interrupt process. The memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time for switching the light on and off is initialized (0 is stored) when the power is turned on, and thereafter cycles through the values 0 to 299 each time a timer interrupt process is executed. In other words, the value following 299 is 0.

Example 1) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "0", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "1". At this time, the carry flag becomes 1 (the carry flag becomes 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "0-299").

Example 2) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "298", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off will become "299". At this time, the carry flag will be 1 (the carry flag will be 1 because a carry occurs as a result of calculating "298-299").

Example 3) When the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is "299", if an update process is performed, the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off becomes "0". In this case, the carry flag becomes 0 (the result of calculating "299-299" is that no carry occurs, so the carry flag becomes 0).

As described above, if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is any value between 0 and 298, the carry flag will be 1, and if the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch the light on and off is 299, the carry flag will be 0. In other words, the carry flag will be 0 every 300 ms.

When the carry flag becomes 0, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is updated. The blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is initialized (stores 0) when the power is turned on, and when 0 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned on, and when 1 is stored in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS), the role ratio monitor is turned off. In other words, since the carry flag becomes 0 every 300 ms, by repeatedly storing 0 and 1 in the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) every 300 ms, it is possible to display (blink) the display mode of the role ratio monitor between the on mode and the off mode every 300 ms.

The display of the ratio monitor is displayed in a blinking mode when the cumulative number of games in the identification segment does not reach the reference number of games, when the display value in the ratio segment is equal to or greater than the threshold value, or when a test pattern is displayed in the identification segment and the ratio segment. In other cases, the monitor is displayed in a lit mode without referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS). However, since the memory area (_TM_CHG_FLS) for managing the time to switch between on and off regardless of whether the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is referenced or not is updated for each timer interrupt process, the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) is also updated from time to time, and it is possible to display the monitor without any discrepancy between the timing of turning on and off and the timing of switching the various ratio displays, even when the state is switched from not referring to the blinking switch flag (_FL_CHG_FLS) to referring to it.

<Program start processing flow> The program start processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 5.

When the power is turned on, the main control board 100 performs initial settings related to the operation of the gaming machine. Specifically, it sets the interrupt mode, sets the functions of the main CPU, and performs a RAM check process to create power-off recovery data. The RAM check process determines whether the checksums of all RAM are normal, and if the conditions are met, it determines that the power-off recovery data is normal, and if the conditions are not met, it determines that the power-off recovery data is abnormal.

Then, the state of the setting key switch signal and the door open detection switch signal is checked to determine whether the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are on, it is determined whether the power interruption recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state. If the power interruption recovery data is normal or in a recoverable state, a first initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. If the power interruption recovery data is not normal or in a recoverable state, a second initialization range is set to be initialized in the initialization process in the setting change process, and the process proceeds to the setting change process of Figure 10. After the setting change process, the process proceeds to the main game progress of Figure 9.

If the setting key switch 37 and the door open detection switch are not on, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data created in the RAM check process is normal. If the power failure recovery data is abnormal or in an irrecoverable state, an irrecoverable error is notified and the game progress of the slot machine PS1 is stopped, and the process moves to an irrecoverable error process. On the other hand, if the power failure recovery data is not abnormal or in an irrecoverable state, the process moves to the power failure recovery process of Figure 8. After the power failure recovery process, the process moves to the main game progress of Figure 9. Note that after the power failure recovery process, the state that was saved when the power failure was detected is restored, so the process does not necessarily start from the beginning of the main game progress.

In addition, when processing an unrecoverable error, interrupts are prohibited and the output of the output port (output of sub-control commands, output of excitation signals to the stepping motor, etc.) is cleared. Then, the error is repeatedly displayed (announced) on the number of acquired coins display 27.

<Power-off process> The power-off process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 6.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned off or an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off, such as a power outage (also referred to as a power outage), the operating voltage for operating the slot machine PS1 drops, and when the operating voltage falls below a threshold, the voltage monitoring circuit detects the power outage and generates a power outage detection signal, which is input to the input port of the main control chip. Then, in the determination process for determining whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt process, the power outage process is executed when it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input. When determining whether or not the power outage detection signal has been input in the timer interrupt process, the determination may be made in one timer interrupt process, or in two or more timer interrupt processes. In other words, when determining whether or not the power has been cut off in multiple timer interrupt processes, if it is determined that the power outage detection signal has been input in the first process but not in the second process, the power outage process is not executed. This is to prevent the power outage process from being executed when noise or a momentary outage (a state in which the voltage falls below the threshold for just a moment, but then immediately rises above the threshold) occurs.

During power-off processing, output ports are cleared, interrupts that are executed periodically are prohibited from occurring, and the interrupt prohibited/enabled state at the time of power-off is saved. Next, the registers in use are saved, and the stack pointer is saved. Once saved, the power-off processing completed flag, which indicates that power-off processing has been performed, is turned on, and checksum data for all RAM areas is calculated and saved. Then RAM writing is prohibited, and the system waits for a reset. The address range of the saved stack pointer, the presence or absence of the power-off processing completed flag, and whether the checksums of all RAM areas are normal are determined during power-off recovery processing.

<Timer interrupt processing> The timer interrupt processing executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 7.

In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is configured to occur periodically every 2.235 ms (milliseconds).

When the timer interrupt process starts, the necessary data stored in the register is compared, and when a power-off detection signal is received, power-off processing is executed, input ports are read to determine input from various sensors and operation switches, various timers (timers for measuring freeze periods, timers for measuring wait periods, etc.) are measured, and as reel drive control, control and update of the drive state according to whether each reel is accelerating, rotating at a constant speed, starting to decelerate, decelerating, or stopped is performed. Next, port output processing is performed to create and output data to be output for each output port (excitation signals to the stepping motor, drive signals for the hopper 44, etc.), and to check whether various abnormalities have occurred. Various abnormalities include whether the current setting values are normal values, and whether the operation patterns of the input and payout sensors are normal. Next, external signals such as bonus signals, ART signals, and security signals to be output to external systems such as hall computers, and external signals are set (on/off control) for medal input signals and medal payout signals.

Next, in the control command transmission process, if a sub-control command has been set, the sub-control command is output to the sub-control board 1000, control is performed regarding the lighting of various LEDs, notification data to be sent to the sub-control board such as the sound of the stop switch being operated and the sound of a medal being inserted is output, signals related to performance tests are output, the registers are restored, and the timer interrupt process is terminated by saving the interrupt permission flag on.

The types of sub-control commands include a start command issued when the start switch is operated, a winning information command indicating the result of the internal lottery, a reel spin start command issued when the reels start accelerating, a left reel stop command, a middle reel stop command, a right reel stop command, and a all reel stop command issued when the stop switches for stopping the reels while they are spinning are operated, etc.

Also, timer measurement processing may be performed within the timer interrupt processing. In the timer measurement, a control process is performed to update information about the timer (time) stored in the RWM (RAM). For example, a process of updating (e.g., subtracting 1) the value stored in the RWM memory area (hereinafter also referred to as timer area A) that monitors (manages) the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) is performed. Note that in addition to the RWM memory area that monitors the minimum play time, the RWM may have memory areas related to multiple timers, such as a memory area of the RWM that monitors (manages) the insertion of game medals using the insertion button (hereinafter also referred to as timer area B) and a memory area of the RWM that monitors (manages) the output time of an external signal (hereinafter also referred to as timer area C). In this case, the timer measurement executes a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in the RWM memory area (hereinafter also referred to as the timer area) that stores information about the timer, such as a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area A, a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area B, and a process of subtracting 1 from the value stored in timer area C. Also, if a timer measurement is performed when the value stored in a certain timer area is "0", the value stored in the certain timer area is configured to become "0".

Note that, as an example of the control process for updating the information related to the timer stored in the RWM, a process for subtracting 1 from the value stored in the timer area has been given, but a process for adding 1 to the value stored in the timer area may also be used.

Here, we will explain how to monitor (manage) the insertion of gaming medals using the insertion button. Monitoring (management) of the insertion of gaming medals using the insertion button is done by a timer that starts counting from the time the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19, and is a timer that does not execute the process of determining whether the next 1 bet switch 19 has been operated until the timer value reaches "0".

For example, in a predetermined situation where the number of credits is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, when the number of bets is 0, the number of credits is 3, and a bet can be made by operating the 1 bet switch 19), the value "20" is stored in the timer area B after the bet process is executed based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19. After that, the value stored in the timer area B is subtracted by "1" by the timer measurement of the timer interrupt process. Then, when the timer interrupt process is executed 20 times, the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0". Note that if the value stored in the timer area B is not "0" (if the value stored in the timer area B is any of "1" to "20"), the game progress main process does not determine whether the 1 bet switch 19 has been operated. In other words, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated when the value stored in the timer area B is not "0", the bet process is not executed. After that, after the value stored in the timer area B becomes "0", the bet process can be executed when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the bet process is executed multiple times due to a malfunction, even though the 1 bet switch 19 is operated once. It is also possible to prevent a malicious player from repeatedly tapping the 1 bet switch 19, which would cause the bet process based on the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 to be executed multiple times, and thus cause commands based on the execution of the bet process to be sent continuously to the sub-control means 1000.

<Power-off recovery process> The power-off recovery process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be described using the flowchart in FIG. 8.

In this embodiment, when the power switch 40 is turned on to turn on the power, the main control board 100 executes a power-off recovery process to restore various data to the state before the power was turned off.

In the power failure recovery process, the stack pointer is restored and the sub-control board 1000
The output data related to the sub-control command to be sent to is restored. Then, it is determined whether the set setting value data is within the normal range. If the determination result is abnormal (the value is outside the specified range), the process moves to unrecoverable error processing. On the other hand, if the data is normal (the value is within the specified range), the unused RAM area is initialized, an interrupt that is executed periodically is started, and the input port is read. Then, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared, the used registers are restored, and the interrupt disabled/enabled state at the time of the power-off is restored, and the power-off recovery processing is terminated. Note that when the power-off recovery processing is terminated, the state before the power-off occurs is restored, and if the state is not restored (when the settings are changed), the main control processing for game progress is performed from the beginning.

In this embodiment, the interrupt is started at a specific timing in the power failure recovery process, but the interrupt may be started after the power failure recovery process in the program start process.

<Description of main game progress> The main game progress control process executed by the main control board 100 in this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in Figure 9.

The main control board 100 refers to the value of the freeze effect number saved before the previous game, and if the saved freeze effect number corresponds to the number for which a freeze effect should be executed, it executes the freeze effect, and if the saved freeze effect number does not correspond to the number for which a freeze effect should be executed, it proceeds to the next process without executing the freeze effect. It may be configured not to save the freeze effect number when a freeze effect is not to be executed, in which case it may be configured to determine whether the freeze effect number has been saved, and if it has not been saved, to proceed to the next process.

Next, when a gaming medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot 17, the number of bets or the number of credits is updated (gaming value insertion process). Next, it is determined whether the number of bets that will enable a game to be played has been bet, and if it is determined that a bet has been placed, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has been operated, and if it is determined that no bet has been placed, it waits for the insertion of gaming medals, or, if the credits are stored, for the operation of the bet switch (if the credits are stored). If the number of bets that will enable a game to be played has been bet and the start switch 12 has been operated (the start switch signal is determined to be on), an internal lottery process is performed, and if the start switch 12 has not been operated (the start switch signal is not determined to be on), it waits for the operation of the start switch 12 to be received.

In the internal lottery process, a random number for internal lottery is generated, and a predetermined calculation process is performed using the obtained internal lottery random number value to determine the winning combination (condition device number). After the winning combination is determined, a stop control table corresponding to the stop timing of each stop switch is created in advance, and preparations are made so that stop control can be executed even if the stop switch operation is accepted immediately after the acceptance of the stop switch operation after the reels have rotated.

The types of winning combinations available on the PS1 slot machine can be broadly divided into bonuses, small combinations, and replays.

A bonus is a device that operates under predefined circumstances. Generally, it operates when the symbol combinations "7-7-7" or "7-7-bar" are displayed frozen on the winning line in the display window 4. The operation of bonus-related devices changes the number of symbol combinations related to winning per set number, and changes the probability of activating the condition device for the symbol combinations related to winning per set number. Bonuses are divided into RB, BB, CB, MB, and SB.

RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus, and is also called the first type of special role. RB is generally set as the end condition when 8 small roles are won or 12 game results are obtained, and during RB, roles are drawn using the RB role drawing table, which sets the probability of winning a small role higher than the normal role drawing table.

BB is an abbreviation for Big Bonus, and is also called the continuous operation device for the first type special role. The end condition for BB is set to the payout of more than a specified number of game medals (for example, 269 medals) related to winning a small role, and during BB, a role is drawn using a BB middle role drawing table in which the probability of winning a small role (described later) is set higher than in the normal role drawing table. Note that a BB middle role drawing table does not need to be set during BB. For example, a table that continuously operates the RB middle role drawing table described later until the BB end condition is met may be called a BB middle role drawing table.

CB is an abbreviation for Challenge Bonus, and is also called the second type special feature. In CB, it is possible to set a state in which at least all minor roles are winning, regardless of the results of the role selection. In addition, during CB, stopping control different from normal stopping control is performed for predetermined reels. For example, it is possible to control the left reel 8a to stop within 75 milliseconds of 190 milliseconds.

The CB may be configured such that, as described above, at least all minor winning combinations are in a winning state, and therefore the symbol combination that can be displayed according to the operation procedure cannot be displayed (also called a miss). For example, during the CB, the left reel 8a may be controlled to stop within 75 milliseconds from 190 milliseconds, so that if it stops within 190 milliseconds, a specific symbol can be displayed on the pay line with any operation timing, but if it stops within 75 milliseconds, a specific symbol cannot be displayed with a specific operation timing.

MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, and is also called a continuous operation device for the second type special role. MB is set to end when, for example, more than 153 medals are paid out for a small role win, when RB is won, or when SB, which will be described later, is won.

SB is an abbreviation for single bonus, and is also called a normal role. The end condition for SB is set to be the result of one game. During SB, the role is selected using the SB role selection table, which sets the probability of winning a small role higher than the normal role selection table.

In this embodiment, the BB is performed by using a BB medium role selection table to select roles, but this is not limited to this. During BB, the game may be played using a BB general role selection table in which the winning probability of a small role is set to the same probability as the normal role selection table and the winning probability of an RB is increased, and an RB medium role selection table in which the winning probability of a small role is set higher than that of the normal role selection table. Even in this case, the fact remains that the end condition for BB is set to a payout exceeding a predetermined number of medals related to winning a small role. Furthermore, the means that control these bonuses are collectively referred to as special game control means.

The minor prize is a prize in which a symbol combination based on a winning minor prize is displayed on a winning line and, when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning prize determination process (described later), medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed on the winning prize.

A replay (also called a replay role) is a role that grants a replay (a game in which the next game can be played by an automatic bet without inserting new medals) when a symbol combination based on a winning replay is displayed frozen on an active line and the winning determination process determines that a win has been won. A replay cannot be missed in a winning game, so the next game after a winning replay is always a replay.

If the result of the lottery is that the player does not win any of the bonus, small prize, or replay prizes, it will be a loss and the winning process described below will not be carried out. If it is a loss, a symbol combination that does not relate to any prize will be displayed on the active line.

Among the roles that are drawn by the role lottery, for BB, RB, and MB, if the symbol combination is not displayed stopped on the valid line in the winning game, the winning flag can be carried over to the next game or later (special role carry-over means). While the winning flag is carried over, the role may be drawn using the role lottery table before the winning flag is carried over, or the role may be drawn using the carry-over role lottery table (also called the internal-internal lottery table or the internal-internal role lottery table) corresponding to the winning flag. When using the carry-over role lottery table, if the symbol combination based on the winning BB, RB, or MB is displayed stopped on the valid line, it is determined that the transition condition of the role lottery table is met, and a transition is made from the carry-over role lottery table to the role lottery table corresponding to the winning flag.

The winning probability for multiple types of roles is set in the role selection table, and multiple types of role selection tables are provided depending on the game state. For example, there is a BB role selection table used during BB, and an MB role selection table used during MB.

In the role selection table, single winning roles in which one type of symbol combination can be displayed on a valid line and multiple winning roles in which multiple symbol combinations can be displayed on one or multiple valid lines are set according to the results of the role selection.

For multiple symbol combinations set as overlapping winning roles, all symbol combinations may be set to be capable of displaying one winning role in a stop state depending on the operation mode, or some symbol combinations may be set to be unable to be displayed in a stop state. Among these overlapping winning roles, roles that correspond to some of the symbol combinations that cannot be displayed in a stop state are sometimes referred to as control roles.

The role of the control function is to be able to control the effective line to be displayed so that it is different depending on the type of control function set as the overlapping winning role, even if the same symbol combination can be displayed on the effective line as a result of multiple role selections.

The winning flag control means turns on the flag corresponding to the winning role when any role is selected as a winning role in the role selection process. Then, when the player operates all the stop switches 13 and the prize-winning process for the winning role is completed, the flag corresponding to the winning role is turned off.

Furthermore, for the above-mentioned BB, RB, and MB, the flag is turned on in the winning game, but if the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is not displayed stopped on the winning line when all stop switches 13 are operated, the flag is carried over to the next game onwards in the on state, the above-mentioned carryover role lottery table is set, and the winning BB, RB, or MB symbol combination is displayed stopped and the winning process for the winning role is completed, and the flag corresponding to BB, RB, or MB is turned off.

The role selection table also includes an RT role selection table. RT is a game state in which the probability of winning a replay in the role selection is different from that of the normal role selection table, and is an abbreviation for replay time.

As a specific example of the use of RT, the losing area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a replay to increase the probability of winning a replay, or the replay area of the normal role lottery table may be replaced with a losing area to decrease the probability of winning a replay. Furthermore, the normal role lottery table and the replay area may be the same, but the type of replay that is won within the replay area may be different. The slot machine PS1 has multiple RT role lottery tables, each configured to transition to another RT state when a specific transition condition is met.

The transition conditions for the RT role lottery table are as follows: Transition condition 1 is when a specific symbol combination (symbol combination related to a bonus, RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop, transition condition 2 is when a bonus is won, transition condition 3 is when BB, RB, or MB of the bonus ends, transition condition 4 is when a specified number of plays have been played since a specific symbol combination (RT transition symbol combination) is displayed as a stop, and transition condition 5 is when a specified number of plays have been played since BB, RB, or MB ends. These transition conditions for the RT role lottery table can be set appropriately depending on the gameplay.

The number of entries is the number of winning entries for each lottery result defined in the internal lottery table by the internal lottery means, and for example, if the total number of entries is 65536, the winning probability is calculated by dividing each number by 65536. For example, the winning probability of a given lottery result with a number of entries of 4 is 1/16384.

In addition, the number of replays can be changed if any of transition conditions 1 to 5 in the RT role lottery table described above is met. For example, if the replay probability for RT1 is 1/7.3, when transitioning from RT1 to RT2, the replay probability for RT2 can be changed to 1/1.5. This makes it possible to transition to a state with a high replay probability, thereby suppressing the loss of medals and adding excitement to the game.

Next, it checks whether the minimum play time (equivalent to 4.1 seconds) set in the previous game has elapsed. If it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum play time timer is 0), a new minimum play time is set, and if it is not determined that the minimum play time has elapsed (if it is determined that the value of the minimum play time timer is not 0), it decrements the value of the minimum play time timer and then checks whether the minimum play time has elapsed. This minimum play time check process is executed until it is determined that the minimum play time has elapsed, and it is configured so that no other process is executed as the main game progress process between the process of determining the minimum play time and the process of setting the new minimum play time. This prevents the minimum play time from being extended by other processes, making it possible to start playing as soon as possible. In other words, it is possible to prevent play from being prolonged without making the player wait.

However, this is not limited to the above, and the system may be configured to execute other processes as the main game progress process between the process of determining the minimum play time and the process of setting a new minimum play time. In this case, the other processes may be a process of clearing the RWM address, a process of storing other data in the RWM, or other commands with short processing times. These processes have extremely short processing times, so the user does not feel an extension to the minimum play time. After the new minimum play time is set, a process of preparing to start reel spinning is executed.

The reel spin start preparation process initializes the data related to reel stops saved in the previous game, sets the stop table to be used in the current game, requests the output of the start of rotation of all reels, and sets a sub-control command (reel spin start command) that indicates the start of rotation of the reels.

The stop table is set up in accordance with the symbol control number determined by the result of the role drawing by the internal drawing means, and predetermines the reel stop positions corresponding to the operation timing of the stop switch 13.

After the reel spin preparation process is complete, processing related to the freeze effect (for example, the reel effect before the reels spin) is executed. In the freeze effect, the reels are moved slightly or rotated in reverse, primarily to indicate the likelihood of a winning combination.

When a freeze effect is not executed, or after a freeze effect is executed and the execution of the freeze effect has finished, a process to spin the reels (also called reel spin process, reel spin start process, or reel spin start process) is executed. There are four reel spin states: acceleration state, constant speed spin state, stop preparation state, and stopped state, and the acceleration state is set when spinning the reels. In the acceleration state, a process is executed to gradually rotate the stepping motor by timer interrupt processing.

The acceleration process executed in the accelerating state is a process executed from when the reel rotation is stopped to when the constant speed rotation process is executed. In the constant speed rotation process, the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process. However, if the constant speed rotation process is suddenly executed when the reel is stopped, the torque will be insufficient and there is a high possibility of stepping out. For this reason, the acceleration process is necessary to gradually rotate the reel. In the acceleration process in this embodiment, the stepping motor is first moved one step after 50 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 30 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 10 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 5 timer interrupt processes, then moved one step after 2 timer interrupt processes, and then moved one step after one timer interrupt process. This is followed by the constant speed rotation process in which the stepping motor is moved one step for each timer interrupt process.

When constant speed rotation processing is being performed, the value of the rotation failure detection counter described above is incremented for each timer interrupt processing to detect rotation failure. Note that the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 0, so it is incremented for each timer interrupt processing, but if the initial value of the rotation failure detection counter is set to 180, the value of the rotation failure detection counter can be decremented for each timer interrupt processing, and it can be determined that a rotation failure has been detected when it reaches 0.

In addition, in the constant speed rotation state, the stop switch is permitted to be operated and operation of the stop switch is awaited. When the stop switch is permitted to be operated, the stop switch lamp is lit blue to notify the player that the stop switch is active (when the stop switch is not permitted to be operated, the lamp is lit red). The control of the stop switch lamp illumination may be performed by the main control means 100 or the sub control means 1000. In addition, when executing the push order navigation, the stop switch lamp illumination may be controlled by flashing the stop switch lamp, for example, to make it easier for the player to recognize which stop switch to operate.

In addition, a command indicating that the reels have started to spin is sent to the sub-control means 1000, and when the sub-control means 1000 receives this command, it sets a reel spin time measurement timer that measures the reel spin time and starts counting. Then, when the value of the reel spin time measurement timer reaches a predetermined value (equivalent to 3 minutes), it displays "Please stop the reels" (reel stop warning image) on the LCD to prompt the player to spin the reels. The reel spin time measurement timer is initialized when the stop switch is operated (when the operation of the stop switch is accepted), and if there are any reels that are still spinning, it starts counting again. In this way, the reel spin time measurement timer continues to be updated until all the reels have stopped.

When the reel stop warning image is displayed at the same time as the push order navigation, it is displayed in front of the push order navigation. This ensures visibility of the reel stop warning image even when the display areas of the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation overlap, and clearly prompts the player to operate the stop switch. In addition, since there is a risk that the push order navigation may become difficult to see at this time, making it difficult to know which reel to stop, the reel stop warning image may be erased (or the reel stop warning image may be made smaller or moved) by operating a sub-switch or a switch for effects, etc., so that the push order navigation can be recognized.

After enabling the operation acceptance of the stop switch in the game progress main processing, the process of determining whether the stop switch operation is accepted (reel stop acceptance check process) is repeated until the stop switch is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches have been operated, stop control (also called slip control) of the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch is executed. At this time, the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch transitions from a constant speed rotation state to a stop preparation state. In the stop preparation state, the reel is rotated to the desired stop position while rotating at a constant speed. Then, when the desired stop position is reached, the state transitions to a stop state, and all four-phase excitation is turned ON to apply the brakes. The slip control is performed within 190 milliseconds of the operation of the stop switch 13. In this embodiment, when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, it is possible to pull in up to four symbols ahead.

The target stop position is determined by whether the currently passing pattern number matches the pattern number stored as the stop position, and if it is determined that they match, all four phase excitations are turned ON to indicate the target stop position. The currently passing pattern number is determined by the fact that the initial pattern number is set the moment the index sensor described above detects the index (when the index signal rises), and then when the timer interrupt process moves one pattern from there, the pattern number next to the initial pattern number is set.

After executing the reel stop acceptance check process, it is checked whether all reels are stopped. If all reels are stopped, a winning determination process is executed, followed by a winning process. If all reels are not stopped, a process is executed to wait for acceptance of the stop operation of the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel. After all reels have stopped, the display contents of the status display monitor are updated, and the process moves to the advantageous zone clear counter management process. Then, a game end check process is executed to update the RT status, etc., and the main sequence of game progress is completed. Note that a software random number update process may be executed during the period from when the reels start spinning until the stop operation is accepted.

The winning determination process is a process that determines whether or not the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line. Since it determines whether or not the stopped symbols determined when the stop switch operation is accepted are abnormal, it is not determined based on the symbol combination that actually stopped on the winning line. After it is determined by the winning determination process that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line, the winning process is performed, and if the winning determination process does not determine that the symbol combination that constitutes a winning combination has stopped on a winning line, processing based on a miss is performed.

The winning process is a process that awards a bonus to a player based on the symbol combination that stops on a winning line. The winning process when a symbol combination based on a minor win is stopped involves the payment of medals based on the stopped symbol combination and the process of changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. The winning process when a symbol combination based on a replay is stopped involves the granting of the right to replay and the process of changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. The winning process when a symbol combination based on a bonus is stopped involves the process of changing the game state based on the stopped symbol combination. Note that in the case of a miss, the winning process is not performed.

However, this is not the only option. When the result of the winning determination process is a miss, a winning process based on the miss may be performed, and a process may be performed in which no special benefit is given to the player as a result of the winning process. In addition, as a winning process based on a miss, the game state may be changed according to the operation mode at the time of the miss. For example, when all stop switches 13 are operated according to a predetermined operation sequence at the time of the miss, a game state with a different probability of winning a freeze may be changed. Even in the case of an apparent miss due to a missed minor combination, a winning process such as a change to an RT state or other game state change control may be performed without a payout. Furthermore, as a winning process based on a bonus, a payout of medals based on the symbol combination stopped and the right to replay may be given.

The process of transitioning game states involves setting a role selection table according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting reel control according to the game state to be transitioned to, setting the freeze winning probability according to the game state to be transitioned to, or a combination of these.

In the winning determination process, when a winning symbol combination is determined, winning symbol combination information (stopping number information) displayed on the active line and role selection result information are sent to the sub-control board 1000. On the other hand, when the sub-control board 1000 receives this information, it can output a performance according to the winning symbol combination information and role selection result information using the display device 32, lamp, or speaker S.

In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for all the active lines, and when a plurality of symbol combinations based on overlapping winning roles are stopped and displayed on a plurality of active lines as a result of the determination, a winning process is performed for each of the plurality of stopped and displayed symbol combinations.

For example, when a minor win with a payout of 2 coins and a minor win with a payout of 10 coins are displayed on multiple active lines, the payout amount based on the minor win set to 2 coins and the payout amount based on the minor win set to 10 coins are added together to pay out 12 coins.

Then, an upper limit is set for the number of coins that can be paid out at one time, and when a symbol combination based on multiple minor winning symbols is displayed on an active line, if the number of coins that can be paid out exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of coins will be paid out.

For example, if the upper limit of the payout number is set to 15 coins, and a minor win with a payout number of 12 coins and a minor win with a payout number of 10 coins are displayed stopped on multiple active lines, the winning process will be as follows: if the combined value of the minor win set to 12 coins and the minor win set to 10 coins exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit of 15 coins will be paid out.

In this embodiment, medals are set to be paid out only for minor winning combinations, but medals equal to the number of medals bet may be paid out as a winning process based on a replay, or a preset number of medals may be paid out as a winning process based on a bonus.

<Advantageous Zone Clear Counter Management Process> Among the processes executed by the game progress main in this embodiment, the advantageous zone clear counter management process related to the management of advantageous zones will be explained with reference to FIG. 11.

Set the advantageous zone clear counter RWM address.

Next, perform a 2-byte subtraction operation.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter before the subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter before the subtraction is 0, it proceeds to a process of determining whether the favorable zone type is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter before the subtraction is not 0, it is determined whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter after the subtraction is 0 or not. Note that favorable zone type = 0 means that the zone is not an advantageous zone, but a normal zone, and favorable zone type = 1 means that it is an advantageous zone.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is 0, it proceeds to the RWM initialization process, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter after subtraction is not 0, it proceeds to the process of obtaining the value of the MY counter.

Next, in the process of obtaining the MY counter value, the current MY counter value is obtained.

Next, after executing the process to obtain the value of the MY counter, it is determined whether or not the replay activation symbol has stopped. If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has stopped, it moves on to the process of determining whether or not the value of the MY counter has exceeded the upper limit value (2400). If it is determined that the replay activation symbol has not stopped, it moves on to the process of obtaining data from the payout number buffer. The data in the payout number buffer is data that indicates the number of coins paid out in the event of a win, or no payout (0 coins paid out) in the event of a loss or a missed minor win.

Next, in the process of obtaining data from the payout number buffer, the payout number for that game is obtained.

Next, the process executes the process of adding the data (OUT number) from the dispensed number buffer obtained to the MY counter.

Next, a process is executed to obtain data on the number of gaming medals. The data on the number of gaming medals corresponds to the number of medals inserted.

Next, the process executes a process to subtract the IN number (number of coins inserted) from the MY counter.

Next, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is less than 0 after subtracting the IN number from the MY counter, the initial value is set in the MY counter and saved in the MY counter. Furthermore, if it is determined that the value of the MY counter is not less than 0 after subtracting the IN number from the MY counter, the value obtained by subtracting the IN number from the MY counter is saved in the MY counter. Note that the initial value of the MY counter is 0, and if the value of the MY counter becomes less than 0, it is corrected to 0. Furthermore, whether the value of the MY counter is less than 0 is determined by whether the carry flag is 0. The carry flag is a flag that is set to 1 if the result of the subtraction process is a negative value, and is set to 0 if the result of the subtraction process is not a negative value.

Next, after saving the MY counter value, a process is executed to determine whether the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400). If the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400), an RWM initialization process is executed and the process proceeds to the favorable zone type determination process, and if the favorable zone type is 0 in the favorable zone type determination process, the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated, and if the favorable zone type is not 0, the favorable zone clear counter is set to an initial value (1500) and the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated. Also, if the MY counter value has not exceeded the upper limit (2400) in the process to determine whether the MY counter value has exceeded the upper limit (2400), the favorable zone clear counter management process is terminated.

The system determines whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter before subtraction is 0 or not, and if the value of the favorable zone clear counter before subtraction is 0 and the favorable zone type is not 0, this process is performed when the favorable zone starts, and is not performed at any other time than when the favorable zone starts. The 1500 stored in the favorable zone clear counter corresponds to the maximum number of plays that can be played in the favorable zone, and if a maximum of 1500 plays of the favorable zone are played, the normal zone will be set from the next play. This is to prevent addiction, and prevents the number of medals from continuing to increase all day, so as not to excessively stimulate gambling instincts.

The timing for setting the advantageous zone type to 1 is during the advantageous zone transition lottery process that occurs between when the start switch is received and when the reels start to spin. The advantageous zone transition lottery process is a process that is run when the condition device number that is the subject of the lottery is selected, and if the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone type is set to 1, and if the advantageous zone transition lottery is not won, the advantageous zone type is set to 0 (normal zone).

In the RWM initialization process executed after the MY counter value exceeds the upper limit, all parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function are updated to 0. Parameters that affect the performance related to the instruction function include the number of AT games and the game status related to the AT. Then, by updating the favorable zone type to 0, it becomes a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone, and when the MY counter value is 2400 or less, this process ends while maintaining the advantageous zone. Note that if a replay is won in an advantageous zone, the MY counter update process is not executed, but the process of determining whether the MY counter exceeds 2400 is passed. In the case of a replay, the same number of coins as the number inserted is automatically bet, so OUT-IN is always 0. However, because there is a possibility that the MY counter value may be updated at a different time from the original process due to noise or fraudulent activity, it is determined whether the MY counter's upper limit value has been reached even during a replay.

In addition, the favorable zone can be ended at any timing for each gaming machine other than the passage of 1500 games or exceeding MY2400. For example, this can be when the ending lottery is won when a predetermined role is won, or when an arbitrary number of games (less than 1500 games) is performed. In this way, when ending the favorable zone at any ending trigger, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is set to 1 before the favorable zone clear counter management process is executed (preferably the process related to the AT executed after all reels have stopped), so that when the favorable zone clear counter management process is executed, the favorable zone clear counter is 1 before the subtraction, and the subtraction result of the favorable zone clear counter becomes 0, and the favorable zone can be ended by the favorable zone clear counter management process. In other words, by setting the value of the favorable zone clear counter to 1 and then subtracting 1 from the counter value, the value of the favorable zone clear counter becomes 0 and the favorable zone can be ended. This makes it possible to process within the same module when an arbitrary ending condition is achieved without using a separate favorable zone ending module.

In addition, the advantageous zone clear counter subtraction process in the advantageous zone clear counter management process is configured to be executed for any bet number (if multiple prescribed numbers are set for the gaming machine) and any game state.

<Settings change process> The settings change process executed by the main control board 100 according to this embodiment will be explained using the flowchart in FIG. 10.

When the setting change mode is started (the setting change process is executed), it is determined whether the current setting value is within the normal range, and if it is within the normal range, the current setting value is obtained, and if it is outside the normal range, "1" is saved as the setting value and the setting value "1" is obtained.

After obtaining the set value, the set value display data is saved. After saving the set value display data, the lighting control is performed by referring to the set value display data every 5 interrupts using dynamic lighting control, which is a timer interrupt process.

Then, it is determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on. If it is determined that the start switch 12 has not changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting switch has changed from off to on.

If it is determined that the setting switch has not changed from off to on, it is again determined whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, and if it is determined that the setting switch has changed from off to on, it is determined whether the setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting 6).

If the set value is not greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is incremented; if the set value is greater than or equal to the maximum value, the current set value is set to the initial value (0) and then incremented further. After the set value has been incremented, the updated set value is displayed and the process returns to the step of determining whether the start switch 12 has changed from off to on.

After that, when the start switch sensor is detected and it is determined that the start switch 12 has changed from off to on, the setting value is finalized and the system waits until it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off. When it is determined that the setting key switch has changed from on to off, the system saves the determined setting value in the main control RAM, turns off the setting display LED, and turns on the blocker provided in the medal selector 34 (forming a passage for medals to flow down to the hopper 44), thereby ending the setting change mode.

Here, the setting change mode is a means for determining one of the setting values from 1 to 6 (displayed as setting values from 1 to 6). After a setting value has been determined, the internal lottery table (also called the role selection table) corresponding to the determined setting value continues to be set until the next time the setting value is changed by the setting change means. Note that role selection tables are provided for each setting value, with different probabilities of determining the results of the internal lottery (probability of winning a role).

When the setting key used for changing the settings is rotated by the gaming center manager while the slot machine PS1 is not powered on, and the slot machine PS1 is powered on with the setting key held in a rotation position where the setting key switch signal is turned on, the setting change means turns on the setting key switch signal when the slot machine PS1 is powered on. In this embodiment, the setting key switch signal is turned on when the setting key is turned on (OFF→ON), and if the setting key was on before the power was cut off, the setting key switch signal is not detected when the power is turned on, so the setting change mode is not entered. However, the setting key switch signal may be turned on as a level on, and the setting change mode may be entered when the setting key is on when the power is turned on again, even if the setting key was on before the power was cut off.

When the setting change means determines that the setting key switch signal is on, the door open signal is on, and the setting change possible flag is on, it activates a setting change mode in which the setting values of the slot machine PS1 can be changed.

The setting change possible flag is switched on and off depending on the game status. For example, a possible mode is that the setting change possible flag is turned off during the period from when the start switch 12 is operated until the game ends, and is turned on during other periods. However, this mode is not limited to this, and the setting change possible flag may be turned off only when a specific bonus game starts or when a specific bonus is in progress, or the setting change possible flag may not be set so that the setting can be changed in any state.

When the setting change mode is activated, the blocker installed in the medal selector 34 is turned off, preventing the start of play by inserting a medal. The setting value data that can be changed in the setting change mode has six levels: "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", and "6". The higher the setting value, the higher the role selection table with a higher ball payout rate is set.

After the setting change mode is started, the setting display LED on the back of the front panel PS2 is lit to notify that the setting change mode is active. Then, setting value display data for displaying the set setting value data is set, and the credit number display 26 arranged in front of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 and the setting display LED (not shown) arranged on the back of the front panel PS2 of the slot machine PS1 are lit to display the setting value. When the setting value data is "1", the setting value display displays "1", when the setting value data is "2", when the setting value data is "3", when the setting value data is "4", when the setting value data is "5", when the setting value data is "6", the setting value display displays "6".

When the setting value data stored in the setting value data storage area is stored in six levels from "0" to "5", if the setting value data is "0", the setting value display will show "1", if the setting value data is "1", if the setting value data is "2", if the setting value data is "2", if the setting value data is "3", if the setting value data is "3", if the setting value data is "4", if the setting value data is "4", if the setting value data is "5", and if the setting value data is "5", the setting value display will show "6".

After starting the setting change mode, it continues to determine whether the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on or not, and when it is determined that the start switch 12 has been operated and the sensor signal of the start switch 12 has turned on, it determines the setting value and displays the current setting value on the setting display LED. In other words, if it is determined that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 has turned on during the setting change mode, the setting value will not be changed even if the setting switch is operated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the setting switch signal is on without determining that the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is on, the setting switch rising data is cleared, and it is determined whether or not the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "6"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "1"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "1" to "5"), the current setting value is incremented. Note that, in the case where the setting value data has six stages from 0 to 5, the processing of the setting change mode is such that it is determined whether or not the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is equal to or greater than the maximum setting value (setting value data "5"), the setting value data is cleared (setting value data is set to "0"), and if it is determined that the current setting value is less than the maximum setting value (setting value "0" to "4"), the current setting value is incremented.

In addition, when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is determined to be on after the setting change mode is activated, the setting value display mode of the setting display LED may be different from the setting value display mode when the setting can be changed, such as displaying "0" on the setting display LED to indicate that the setting value cannot be changed, or displaying "_X" on the setting display LED (where "X" is the set value after confirmation).

<Gameability using advantageous zones applicable to this embodiment> In this embodiment, the specified number of coins required to start playing is only three. In other words, playing cannot start with anything other than three coins, and even when a bonus is activated, playing can only start with three coins.

In this embodiment, the active line is one line consisting of the bottom left reel, the middle of the middle reel, and the bottom right reel. Hereinafter, when a symbol combination stops on an active line, it will be simply referred to as a symbol combination stopping.

In this embodiment, there are 10 types of symbols. They are called Red Seven, Blue Seven, Bar, Gold Bar, Blank, Cherry, Watermelon, Bell A, Bell B, and Replay. Note that the names and types of symbols are merely examples, and there is no problem if they are changed.

The reel arrangement of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 12. As shown in FIG. 12, each reel has 20 symbols, and is equipped with a first reel (left reel), a second reel (middle reel), and a third reel (right reel).

The symbol combinations in this embodiment are shown in Figures 13 to 18. The "Winning symbol/Activation symbol/Pattern symbol name" item in the figure shows the name of the condition device corresponding to the symbol combination. Also, the "Specified number and game state" shows the bonus that is awarded when the symbol combination stops for each specified number. If "1 type BB" is written in the "Specified number and game state" item, it indicates that 1 type BB will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if it is written "Replay" it indicates that replay will be awarded when the symbol combination stops, if a number is written, it indicates the number of coins to be paid out when the symbol combination stops, and if it is written "-" it indicates that the symbol combination will not stop in the corresponding game state.

In this embodiment, the bonus is equipped with a Type 1 BB, and the end condition is the payout of more than 11 game medals. This Type 1 BB is a type in which the RB operates continuously, and the RB ends when either two wins or two games are met. When the end condition of the RB is met, the RB operates automatically until the end condition of the Type 1 BB (payout of more than 11 game medals) is met.

As shown in Figure 13, there are eight types of BB symbol combinations, and the rate at which symbols related to BB symbol combinations are drawn on each reel (probability that symbols related to the symbol combination will stop) is not 100%, so when displaying a BB symbol combination, it is necessary to press each reel with the right eye.

In this embodiment, the RT transition starts from non-RT (also referred to as not inside type 1 BB), and if type 1 BB is won during non-RT and the type 1 BB pattern combination does not stop, the next game (which may be the end of the game) transitions to RT1 (also referred to as inside type 1 BB), and if the type 1 BB pattern combination stops during RT1, RT1 ends and type 1 BB is activated (also referred to as during type 1 BB) from the next game, and when the operation of type 1 BB ends, the next game transitions to non-RT. In addition, since the setting change starts from non-RT, if the setting change device is activated during RT1 or type 1 BB operation, non-RT is set when the operation of the setting change device ends. Note that in the case of a power outage in which the setting change device does not operate (sometimes referred to as a normal power outage), the RT state and type 1 BB operation state are not cleared, so when the power is restored, it starts from the state before the power outage. Specifically, if a power outage occurs during type 1 BB and the power is subsequently restored, the type 1 BB operating state is type 1 BB, and if a power outage occurs in a situation where the state is RT1 and the power is subsequently restored, the RT state is configured to be RT1.

The condition device in this embodiment is explained in FIG. 19. In FIG. 19, the "Winning Replay" item lists the numbers corresponding to the winning numbers. In addition, the "Condition Device" item lists the condition devices that will be activated. In addition, the "Common Name" item lists the simple names of the condition devices that will be activated. For example, the common name corresponding to the Replay-H condition device is "Right Push: Strong-Battle Eye", which indicates that the Strong Battle Eye will stop when the right reel is stopped for the first time, and the common name corresponding to the Winning-A1 condition device is "Push Order Bell Group A 123", which indicates that the operation mode of the left reel stopping first, the middle reel stopping second, and the right reel stopping third is the correct operation mode (in this case, the operation mode that stops the symbol combination of Winning 52 (a winning with a larger payout number than Winning 01-02, 09, 29-31)). In addition, the "Component" item shows the symbol combination corresponding to the condition device. For example, if the Replay-A condition device is activated (a win), it is possible to display Replay 01 or Replay 02. Note that the "0" in the "Winning Replay" section corresponds to a loss.

The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-type BB in this embodiment are explained using Figures 20 to 22. The internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during a non-type BB are: Type BB, Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C (+1 type BB), Replay-D (+1 type BB), Replay-E (+1 type BB), Replay-F (+1 type BB), Replay-G (+1 type BB), Replay-H (+1 type BB), Replay-I (+1 type BB), Replay-J (+1 type BB), Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-A7, Winning-A8, Winning-A9, Winning-B10, Winning-B20, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-B7, Winning-B8, Winning-B9, Winning-B10, Winning-B11, Winning-B12, Winning-B13, Winning-B14, Winning-B15, Winning-B16, Winning-B17, Winning-B18, Winning-B19, Winning-B20, Winning-B21, Winning-B22, Winning-B23, Winning-B24, Winning-B25, Winning-B26, Winning-B27, Winning-B28, Winning-B29, Winning-B30, Winning-B31, Winning-B32, Winning-B33, Winning-B34, Winning-B35, Winning-B46, Winning-B47, Winning-B48, Winning-B59, Winning-B61, Winning-B62, Winning-B63, The possible prizes are -A6, Winning -B1, Winning -B2, Winning -B3, Winning -B4, Winning -B5, Winning -B6, Winning -C1, Winning -C2, Winning -C3, Winning -C4, Winning -C5, Winning -C6, Winning -D (+1 type BB), Winning -E (+1 type BB), Winning -F (+1 type BB), Winning -G (+1 type BB), Winning -H (+1 type BB), Winning -I (+1 type BB), Winning -J (+1 type BB), Winning -K (+1 type BB), and there are no losing prizes.

The above-mentioned description of "Replay -C (+1 type BB)" indicates that Replay -C and 1 type BB are simultaneously won, and corresponds to the fact that the names of both "Bonus Condition Device" and "Winning Replay" are written in Figures 20, 21, and 22. The "Internal Lottery" item in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not the internal lottery is subject for each game state, with "○" indicating that the internal lottery is subject and "×" indicating that the internal lottery is not subject. The "Advantageous Zone Transition" item in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicates whether or not an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed for each game state, with "○" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed and "×" indicating that the advantageous zone transition lottery is not executed. In this embodiment, when an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, 100% of the time, the game is configured to transition to the advantageous zone. In addition, the items "R1" to "R6" in Figures 20, 21, and 22 indicate the number of winning positions for the internal lottery corresponding to the set value, and 65,536 positions are allocated for each game state.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means within the Type 1 BB are any of the following: Replay-A, Replay-B, Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and there are no losing results.

In this embodiment, the internal lottery results that can be determined by the internal lottery means during Type 1 BB are Winning -K, Winning -L, or Losing.

In this embodiment, the conditions for moving from the normal zone to the advantageous zone are winning any of the following: Re-play-C, Re-play-D, Re-play-E, Re-play-F, Re-play-G, Re-play-H, Re-play-I, Re-play-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K; winning Re-play-A or Re-play-B does not result in a move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, if any of the following is won during the normal zone: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, or Winning-K, the player will always move to the advantageous zone. That is, if you win any of the following during the normal period: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Win-A1, Win-A2, Win-A3, Win-A4, Win-A5, Win-A6, Win-B1, Win-B2, Win-B3, Win-B4, Win-B5, Win-B6, Win-C1, Win-C2, Win-C3, Win-C4, Win-C5, Win-C6, Win-D, Win-E, Win-F, Win-G, Win-H, Win-I, Win-J, Win-K, you will be in the advantageous period from the next play.

In this embodiment, in RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB), there are no misses (either the replay role or the winning role is always a winning role), so once you move to RT1, it is possible to stop the BB symbol combination with some of the operation modes when the push order bell group C (winning role-C1 to C6) is won. The part when the push order bell group C is won is, for example, the middle reel or the first stop position of the right reel when the winning role-C1 is won. Also, when WINNING-C1 is hit in the advantageous zone, the correct button press sequence (in this case, "1, 2, 3" is displayed on the LCD) is notified, and WINNING 38 stops and the BB symbol combination does not stop. With this configuration, the user can maintain RT1 by notifying the operation mode in which the BB symbol combination does not stop. Also, the number of losing positions during RT1 can be set to 4 (because the minimum winning probability designed is 1/17500 or more), and the BB symbol combination can be configured not to stop for other replay roles or winning roles, so that the BB symbol combination stops only when there is a loss.

In this embodiment, the game states managed by the main control means in the advantageous zone include the general advantageous zone state, chance zone (also referred to as CZ), and AT, with transitions occurring from the general advantageous zone state to CZ, from CZ to AT, and from AT to the general advantageous zone state or CZ, respectively. Furthermore, the game state managed by the main control means in the normal zone is only the general normal zone state, and there is no transition of the game state until a transition to the advantageous zone occurs. Note that in the general advantageous zone state and the general normal zone state, the flags relating to the game states managed by the main control means may be the same or different.

The normal state is when the internal lottery result is any of WINNER-A1 through WINNER-C6, and the advantageous winning button sequence is not announced.

The CZ is the state you enter when you win any of the internal lottery results from WINNER-D to WINNER-H under normal circumstances, and during the CZ, the transition to the AT is determined by the results of the internal lottery during the CZ and the lottery at the start of the CZ.

The AT is the state you enter when you win the AT lottery during the CZ, and is the state that notifies you of the advantageous operation mode (winning button press sequence) when you win any of WIN-A1 to WIN-C6.

In this embodiment, the conditions for always transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone are when the number of plays in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 1500 times), when MY in the advantageous zone exceeds 2400, when initialization processing is performed based on a setting change, and when the RAM clear switch is activated, and the AT end conditions and the advantageous zone end conditions do not match. However, some of the AT end conditions (such as when the ending is reached or when the number of winning coins exceeds a predetermined number (e.g., 2300 coins)) may also be used as the advantageous zone end conditions. Also, a transition to the normal zone may be made when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone. In this case, whether or not to end the advantageous zone is determined depending on the situation of the advantageous zone when a CZ is won in the advantageous zone.

The CZ is determined by drawing lots when one of the winning combinations, Winning-D through Winning-H (hereafter also referred to as rare combinations), is won, and basically the less likely the internal drawing result is to win, the more likely it is that the CZ will be won. In this embodiment, the order of likelihood of winning the CZ is Winning-G > Winning-E > Winning-H > Winning-F > Winning-D.

In this embodiment, the CZ does not occur immediately after winning, but after winning the CZ, the CZ starts when the game moves from the advantageous zone to the normal zone and then back to the advantageous zone (the CZ always starts when the game moves to the advantageous zone in RT1). This solves the problem that when the game goes from the CZ to the AT, the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is small, and balls cannot be put out. This is particularly effective when the specification has a small net increase (the expected number of coins to be won per game, also called the gradient value). For example, in the case of a net increase of 2 coins, the maximum number of coins to be won in the advantageous zone is about 2400 coins, so 1200 games are required to win 2400 coins. However, the AT is not always performed in the advantageous zone, and since various game states such as the normal state and the CZ described above are transitioned, the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone is often small (for example, 500 games) at the start of the AT. In this case, even if 500 games are played, the net increase is 2 coins, so the game ends with about 1000 coins being won, making it difficult to meet the user's expectations for winning. Therefore, by ending the advantageous zone once when the CZ is won, and starting the CZ when moving to a new advantageous zone, even if the CZ has 100 plays, the advantageous zone can be played 1,400 times, creating the expectation that the user will win 2,400 coins.

The probability of winning the CZ from the second time onwards within the same favourable zone may also be varied depending on the number of coins won since the favourable zone began (cumulative number of coins paid out - cumulative number of coins inserted). For example, if a CZ is started when moving to a favourable zone and an AT is won, it is possible to vary the probability of winning the CZ in the remaining favourable zone after the AT ends depending on whether 50 coins are won in the AT or 1000 coins are won. In this case, it is possible to make the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins higher or lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made higher than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1,000 coins, it will be easier to award the next CZ to users who have not won much in the AT, allowing them to play while maintaining a sense of anticipation.

If the probability of winning the CZ after winning 50 coins is made lower than the probability of winning the CZ after winning 1000 coins, since there is little remaining advantageous period after winning 1000 coins (since it is close to the conditions for the advantageous period ending after 1500 plays or winning 2400 coins), even if the CZ probability is made high, the ball payout design will not significantly increase gambling spirit, and a new sense of expectation can be created for the user.

When a CZ is won, a congratulatory performance is performed in which text such as "success" or "victory" is displayed in the game in which the CZ was won, or after a certain number of games (which can be set arbitrarily depending on the specifications of the gaming machine). This allows the user to understand that some kind of privilege has been granted, and allows the user to intuitively understand the progress of the game. Then, from the next game onwards, the display "CZ preparation" is displayed by lighting the liquid crystal or lamp, and a sense of expectation for the CZ can be created in the user. When the CZ winning game is in an advantageous zone, the CZ preparation corresponds to the state from the end of the advantageous zone to the transition to the advantageous zone again in the subsequent normal zone. Since the "CZ preparation" is internally a normal zone, it is a disadvantageous state for users who do not perform any AT lottery or AT addition, but by lowering the ball output rate during the CZ preparation compared to the AT state, balls can be allocated to the AT, and a wave of balls can be created. In addition, since the CZ preparation creates a sense of expectation for the CZ, the user is less likely to feel that he or she has lost even if the ball output rate is lowered.

In addition, the advantageous zone ends with the next play after the CZ wins, but a predetermined number of plays may be played from the play after the CZ wins until the advantageous zone ends. In this case, the CZ win is not announced in the play after the CZ win, and a predetermined number of plays may be played to see whether the CZ wins or not through effects (so-called premonition effects or consecutive effects). Then, a congratulatory effect is executed at the timing when the predetermined number of plays are played, and the CZ is in preparation from the next play. This is because the advantageous zone lamp is lit during the advantageous zone, and the advantageous zone lamp is turned off when the advantageous zone ends, so that it is not possible to tell whether the CZ wins or not from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp between the CZ win play and the announcement that the CZ wins. Note that the advantageous zone may be switched to the normal zone during CZ preparation, and in this case, since it has already been announced that the CZ is in preparation, the result is not known in advance from the lighting state of the advantageous zone lamp during CZ preparation.

Also, CZ preparation does not necessarily have to be a normal zone, and may be set to a favorable zone. Even in this case, the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a normal zone is relatively higher than the rate at which CZ preparation is executed in a favorable zone, and the condition for executing CZ preparation in a favorable zone is that the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 times). By configuring in this way, CZ preparation is executed when there is a margin in the number of remaining plays in the favorable zone, so even if the CZ is executed after CZ preparation and the AT is executed as a result, a sufficient feeling of winning can be created. In addition, since the normal zone is not used during CZ preparation, it is also possible to create a surprise such as starting the AT immediately after CZ preparation (since information related to the AT is initialized at the end of the favorable zone, if the normal zone is used during CZ preparation, the CZ will be executed at the start of the favorable zone, and the AT cannot be started).

In addition, when executing the CZ preparation in the above-mentioned advantageous zone, it may be determined whether or not to grant the AT by drawing lots when any of WIN-D to WIN-H is won during CZ preparation. In this case, the order of rare roles that are likely to win the AT by AT drawing lots may be the same as the order that is likely to win the CZ, or may be slightly different, such as WIN-E>WIN-G>WIN-F>WIN-H>WIN-D. By configuring in this way, the user can expect to win a rare role even during CZ preparation.

Furthermore, to prevent users who have won a rare role but not the AT from losing their desire to play, a bonus different from the AT may be awarded. Such a bonus may, for example, be displayed as a two-dimensional code that can be read by the user's terminal, or a setting suggestion effect that allows the setting value to be determined. Such a bonus may be made easier to award the closer the number of plays in the advantageous zone is to the aforementioned predetermined number (e.g., 1500 plays), or when the number of CZ plays is a specific number (e.g., a multiple of 5).

The process for changing settings in this embodiment is explained below.

When the setting change device is started, the aforementioned RAM initialization process is performed at the timing when the setting change device is started or when the setting value is confirmed. If the game state immediately before this RAM initialization process is performed is RT1, the RT1 information is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT. Also, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is in Type 1 BB, the information in Type 1 BB is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes non-RT.

In addition, if the game state immediately before the RAM initialization process is performed is a favorable zone, the information of the favorable zone is initialized when the RAM initialization process is performed, and the game state after the RAM initialization process becomes a normal zone. In other words, the game state during the favorable zone can be a normal state, CZ, or AT, but in any state, when the RAM initialization process is performed, it transitions to the normal zone.

When the RAM initialization process is performed, play will start in a non-RT and normal zone, but in this embodiment, the CZ is started when moving from the normal zone to the favorable zone, so after the setting change, the game is in a favorable state (a state in which the CZ can be started by moving to the favorable zone without playing to win the CZ).

By configuring it this way, you can increase customer numbers by motivating them to visit the store in the morning, as the settings are changed to a favorable state.

In addition, if it is possible to set an overly favorable state after changing the settings (a state in which the machine transitions to the CZ after just a few plays), this could significantly stimulate gambling instincts (the so-called morning mode). For this reason, it is possible to change the contents of the CZ depending on the situation when the machine transitions to the favorable zone.

In this case, if the RT state of the next play that has been determined to transition to the favorable zone is RT1, a CZ will be started since this is the basic game flow, and if the RT state of the next play that has been determined to transition to the favorable zone is non-RT, a CZ will not be started as this is after a setting change. The games that have been determined to move into the favorable zone are those that have won any of the following: Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-A1, Winning-A2, Winning-A3, Winning-A4, Winning-A5, Winning-A6, Winning-B1, Winning-B2, Winning-B3, Winning-B4, Winning-B5, Winning-B6, Winning-C1, Winning-C2, Winning-C3, Winning-C4, Winning-C5, Winning-C6, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, Winning-K.

In addition, since Replay-C, Replay-D, Replay-E, Replay-F, Replay-G, Replay-H, Replay-I, Replay-J, Winning-D, Winning-E, Winning-F, Winning-G, Winning-H, Winning-I, Winning-J, and Winning-K overlap with Type 1 BB, the RT state of the next play after the winning will be RT1 and CZ will start, but Winning-A1, Winner-A2, Winner-A3, Winner-A4, Winner-A5, Winner-A6, Winner-B1, Winner-B2, Winner-B3, Winner-B4, Winner-B5, Winner-B6, Winner-C1, Winner-C2, Winner-C3, Winner-C4, Winner-C5, Winner-C6 do not overlap with Type 1 BB, so the next play after the win is non-RT and CZ will not start.

This configuration allows for a transition to a favorable zone during non-RT, which can suppress morning-related specifications such as transitioning to a CZ after just a few plays after changing the settings, thereby reducing the risk of gambling.

It is also possible to reduce gambling by using a specification that changes the game state managed by the main control means in the favorable zone by referring to the RT state of the next game in which a transition to the favorable zone has been decided. In this case, the favorable zone that has transitioned to a non-RT (not inside the Type 1 BB) may not perform an AT, and the favorable zone that has transitioned to an RT1 (inside the Type 1 BB) may have the possibility of performing an AT. With this configuration, if a transition to the favorable zone occurs in a non-RT after the setting is changed, the AT will not be performed and no balls can be earned, thereby reducing gambling. The condition for ending the favorable zone in this case may be until the above-mentioned CZ is won, or may be when a predetermined number of games have been played (for example, 1,500 games).

In addition, the transition of the CZ is controlled by referring to the RT state of the next game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery, but this is not limited to the above, and the transition of the CZ may be controlled by referring to the condition device in operation for the game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery. In this case, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition devices for the type 1 BB and the prize-winning-A1 are in operation. In addition, when the prize-winning-A1 is won while not inside a type 1 BB in the normal zone, the CZ is controlled not to start at the start of the advantageous zone based on the fact that the condition device for the prize-winning-A1 is in operation.

In this embodiment, only Type 1 BB was the subject of the lottery, but instead, RB or MB may be the subject of the lottery, or two or all of Type 1 BB, RB, and MB may be the subject of the lottery.

<Control corresponding to power cut while various switches are pressed according to this embodiment> In a situation where the front panel PS2 is closed, a game has ended, three bets have not been made (including a situation where an automatic bet has not been made), and a number equal to or greater than the number that allows three bets is stored as the number of credits (for example, the number of credits when no bets have been made is three or more, or the number of credits when one bet has been made is two or more) (hereinafter referred to as a MAX bet possible state), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), a MAX bet process is executed, which stores the number of bets as three, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are lit (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are off).

In addition, not only when the front panel PS2 is closed, but also when the front panel PS2 is open, if the game has ended, no 3 bets have been made (including when no automatic bets have been made), and the number of credits stored is equal to or greater than the number that allows 3 bets (for example, the number of credits when no bets have been made is 3 or more, or the number of credits when 1 bet has been made is 2 or more), when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed), the MAX bet process is executed, 3 is stored as the number of bets, and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned on (before the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are turned off). In the following, unless otherwise specified, when the power is turned on, the front panel PS2 is closed, but the same behavior may be performed even when the front panel PS2 is open.

The MAX bet possible state includes a situation where no bet has been made, a situation where one bet has been made, and a situation where two bets have been made, but when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated and the 1 bet lamp, 2 bet lamp, and 3 bet lamp are newly lit, this is the MAX bet possible state, where no bet has been made. In the MAX bet possible state, where one bet has been made, the 2 bet lamp and 3 bet lamp are newly lit when the 1 bet lamp is already lit, and in the MAX bet possible state, where two bets have been made, the 1 bet lamp and 2 bet lamp are already lit and the 3 bet lamp is newly lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible, the MAX bet lamp is lit, informing the player that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. When the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the MAX bet lamp is lit in the MAX bet possible state (when the sensor that detects the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON), the MAX bet lamp goes out. In other words, the MAX bet lamp goes out even when the MAX bet switch 18 is being pressed (when the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed and not released, and the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 remains ON).

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, a new MAX bet process cannot be performed by pressing the MAX bet switch 18. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid by lighting it. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid can place a MAX bet (perform MAX bet processing) by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 that he had pressed (after the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON).

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again (the sensor that detects the 1 bet switch 19 turns from OFF to ON), the 1 bet process can be executed.

As a result, even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp indicates that betting is possible and suggests that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable. Even in such a case, the operation of the 1 bet switch 19 is valid, so the game can continue.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, making the gaming machine unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, and when the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp may be on or off after the power is turned on. If the MAX bet lamp is on after the power is turned on, it indicates that the 1 bet switch 19 is operable, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, the state changes from 3 bets to 1 bet, and the difference "2" is returned to the credits (if the difference cannot be returned to credits in a 3 bet state and the number of credits is 50, the state does not change to 1 bet even if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated, and the 3 bet state is maintained, so the MAX bet lamp does not light up (it is off) after the power is turned on). If the MAX bet lamp is off after the power is turned on, it is possible to indicate that the MAX bet process has been executed. In addition, even if the MAX BET lamp is on or off after power is turned on, it is possible to notify that the MAX BET process has been executed by outputting 3 BET sounds (1 BET sound three times) when the power is turned on.

Next, when the MAX bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) in the MAX bet enabled state (when no bet has been placed), the bet number is stored as 1 and the 1 bet lamp is lit. Also, since the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is still valid, the MAX bet lamp is also lit.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (when no bets have been placed), if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, if the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed. Also, because the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new 1 bet process by pressing the 1 bet switch 19.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp can indicate that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the 1 bet switch 19 can be operated. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 or 1 bet switch 19 is valid can perform a 1 bet process or a MAX bet process by releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that was pressed (after the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 goes from ON to OFF) and then pressing the MAX bet switch 18 again (the sensor of the MAX bet switch 18 goes from OFF to ON) without releasing the 1 bet switch 19 that was pressed (while the sensor of the 1 bet switch 19 remains ON).

In addition, when the gaming machine is in a MAX bet enabled state (when no bets have been placed) and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making it unable to operate, if the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the 1 bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by operating (pressing) the MAX bet switch 18 again.

As a result, even if the 1 bet switch 19 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the 1 bet switch 19) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp will notify the user that bet processing is possible, suggesting that the MAX bet switch 18 can be operated. Even in such a case, the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, so the game can continue.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed, and the power is turned on while the 1 bet switch 19 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the 1 bet process may be executed. In this case, the MAX bet lamp is lit after the power is turned on, indicating that the MAX bet switch 18 is operable, and when the MAX bet switch 18 is operated, the 1 bet state changes to the 3 bet state. Also, it is possible to notify that the 1 bet process has been executed by outputting a 1 bet sound when the power is turned on.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible (no bet has been placed), if a power outage occurs causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and the gaming machine is unable to operate, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case whether the front panel PS2 is not open or is already open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but if the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be pressed, the 1 bet process can be executed. In addition, when a power outage occurs in a state where a MAX bet is possible (when no bet has been placed), causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and making it impossible for the gaming machine to operate, if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be the case when the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process will not be executed, but the MAX bet process can be executed by releasing the MAX bet switch 18 and operating (pressing) it again. In this case, even if the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, the 1 bet sound or the 3 bet sound may not be output. Alternatively, when the 1 bet switch 19 or the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed again and the 1 bet process or the MAX bet process is executed, 3 bets are placed and the front panel PS2 is open, when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins, but the start sound may not be output.

This makes it possible to prevent a bet from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can be lit to accurately indicate that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid.

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

Also, by enabling 1 bet processing using the 1 bet switch 19 even when the front panel PS2 is open, it becomes possible to check whether 1 bet processing is possible normally in addition to the work performed by the administrator when the front panel PS2 is open (for example, checking settings and setting the administrator menu, etc.). Note that when playing at an amusement arcade, playing with the front panel PS2 open is not normal, so by deliberately not outputting the 1 bet sound, it is possible to make the player aware that it is not normal.

In addition, in a state where a MAX bet is possible (when no bets have been placed), when a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (this may be a state in which the front panel PS2 is not open or may already be open), and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the front panel PS2 is open (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will not light up, the MAX bet process will not be executed, and even if the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process will not be executed, and thereafter, when the front panel PS2 is closed (the closure is detected) while the operation (pressing) of the MAX bet switch 18 is continuing, the MAX bet lamp will light up, and when the 1 bet switch 19 is newly operated (pressed), the 1 bet process will become possible.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the MAX bet switch 18) when the power is turned on after a power outage, and by not lighting the MAX bet lamp, it is possible to make the player aware that he or she cannot continue playing. Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is closed, even if the MAX bet switch 18 continues to be operated (pressed), the bet operation with the 1 bet switch 19 is enabled, making it possible to minimize the disruption of game progress.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs in the MAX bet enabled state, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed and the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. Also, in this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the 1 bet switch 19 is still being pressed and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed. Similarly, in a state where a MAX bet is possible, if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, and the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and 1 bet process will not be executed. However, if the 1 bet switch 19 is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still pressed, and the 1 bet switch 19 is operated (pressed) again, the 1 bet process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed even if the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the MAX bet lamp can be turned on to accurately notify the user that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid. Also, even in such a case, the game can be continued because the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 and 1 bet switch 19 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and normal effects are being displayed (effects other than continuous effects or AT effects) or a demo screen is being displayed (hereinafter referred to as a menu screen displayable state), if the sub switch 20 is operated (pressed) (the sensor that detects the sub switch 20 goes from OFF to ON), the display process for the menu screen is executed and the menu screen is displayed on the display device 32.

In addition, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the sub switch 20 remains ON), the sub switch lamp will light up and the menu screen will not be displayed.

As a result, even if the sub switch 20 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the sub switch 20) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional menu screen is not displayed, and the lighting state of the sub switch lamp indicates that the menu screen can be displayed, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated. Therefore, a player who recognizes that the operation of the sub switch 20 is valid can release the sub switch 20 that he has pressed (after the sensor of the sub switch 20 changes from ON to OFF), and then press the sub switch 20 again (the sensor of the sub switch 20 changes from OFF to ON), thereby allowing the menu screen to be displayed.

In addition, in a state where the menu screen can be displayed, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, and the sub switch 20 is pressed and the power is turned on while the sub switch 20 is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the sub switch lamp may light up and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen can be displayed immediately after power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it is possible to indicate that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen was valid.

In addition, when the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed in a situation where a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable while the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed, if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up, the MAX bet process will not be executed, the sub switch lamp will light up, and the menu screen will not be displayed. Also, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed, it is not possible to perform a new MAX bet process by pressing the MAX bet switch 18. In other words, because the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed (the sensor signal of the MAX bet switch is on), the MAX bet switch 18 cannot be pressed and the MAX bet process cannot be performed.

This makes it possible to prevent unintentional bets and the display of the menu screen even in a situation where the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20 are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX bet switch 18 and sub switch 20) when power is turned on after a power outage, and even in such a case, the lighting state of the MAX bet lamp can accurately notify that the operation of the MAX bet switch 18 is valid, and the lighting state of the sub switch lamp can notify that the display process of the menu screen is possible, suggesting that the sub switch 20 can be operated.

In addition, for example, if a malfunction occurs in the return spring or sensor of the MAX BET switch 18 before or after a power outage, causing the MAX BET switch 18 to remain in the pressed state, the MAX BET lamp can be turned on to notify the administrator that even if the MAX BET process cannot be performed, it is not a software malfunction.

Also, in a situation where a MAX BET is possible and the menu screen can be displayed, a power outage occurs, the operating voltage falls below the threshold, and the gaming machine is unable to operate. In that situation, if the MAX BET switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are pressed, and the power is turned on while the MAX BET switch 18 and the sub switch 20 are pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may be lit, the MAX BET process is not executed, the sub switch lamp may be lit, and the menu screen may be displayed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed immediately after the power is turned on, reflecting the intention to press the sub switch 20, and further, by lighting the sub switch lamp, it may be possible to indicate that the confirmation operation for each item on the menu screen is valid. In this case, the MAX BET lamp may continue to be lit even after the menu screen is displayed, to notify that the MAX BET process can be executed.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, no bets have been made (replay has not been activated), and the number of credits is 1 or more (hereinafter referred to as the settlement-enabled state), the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch is operated (pressed), and the medals stored in the credits are paid out to the tray 28.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the settlement switch is pressed (the sensor that detects the settlement switch turns from OFF to ON), if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the settlement switch sensor is ON and the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp will light up and settlement processing will not be executed. Also, even if the MAX BET switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX BET process will not be executed.

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp will notify the player that there are medals remaining in the credits, preventing the player from leaving the seat with credits remaining.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and the gaming machine to become inoperable, the settlement switch is pressed, and if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and settlement processing will not be executed, but if the MAX bet switch 18 is pressed while the settlement switch is pressed, the MAX bet processing will be executed.

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the unintentional settlement process will not be executed, and because the operation of the MAX BET switch is valid, the progress of the game is not hindered as much as possible, so as not to reduce interest in the game.

In addition, in a state where settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and the gaming machine to become inoperable, the settlement switch may be pressed, and if the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX BET lamp may be lit and settlement processing may be executed.

As a result, for example, if the power is turned on before the arcade opens, and the settlement switch is operated (e.g., hand is placed on the settlement switch), the settlement process can be performed immediately after the power is turned on, simplifying the power-on process before opening and the settlement process for remaining medals on the credit.

In addition, when the settlement is possible and a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the settlement switch is pressed and the power is turned on while the settlement switch is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the lamp of the sub-switch 20 will light up and operation of the sub-switch 20 will be valid, regardless of whether the settlement process is executed or not (the menu screen can be displayed by accepting the operation of the sub-switch 20).

As a result, even if the settlement switch is unintentionally operated when powering on after a power outage, for example, the menu screen can be displayed by operating sub switch 20, and information useful for playing, such as checking game history and adjusting the volume, can be viewed or changed on the menu screen. Also, by enabling all operations related to the progress of the game at this time, all games other than settlement can be performed. The settlement process is only used at the end of play, and since the player is not put at a disadvantage by adjusting the number of medals inserted even if the settlement process is not performed, it is possible to carry out the process without interfering with the progress of the game as much as possible.

In addition, when a MAX bet is possible and settlement is possible, if a power outage occurs and the operating voltage falls below the threshold value, causing the gaming machine to become inoperable, the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed, and if the power is turned on while the MAX bet switch 18 and the settlement switch are pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the MAX bet lamp will light up and the MAX bet process and settlement process will not be executed. In this case, if the MAX bet switch 18 is released while the settlement switch is still being pressed, and the MAX bet switch 18 is operated (pressed) again, the MAX bet process can be executed, and if the settlement switch is released while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, and the settlement switch is operated (pressed) again while the MAX bet switch 18 is still being pressed, the settlement process can be executed.

This makes it possible to prevent bets from being placed and settlement processing even if the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch are unintentionally operated (such as by placing hands on the MAX BET switch 18 and settlement switch) when the power is turned on after a power outage. In addition, the lighting state of the MAX BET lamp can accurately notify the user that medals remain in the credits and that the operation of the MAX BET switch 18 is valid.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, the game has ended, and three bets have been made (including when replay is activated) (hereinafter referred to as the reel rotation enabled state), the reel rotation process is executed and each reel spins when the start switch 12 is operated (pressed). Note that the reel rotation process is executed after the minimum play time has elapsed.

In addition, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and making the gaming machine unable to operate, and the start switch 12 is pressed and then power is turned on while the start switch 12 is still pressed (the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp will light up but none of the reels will spin.

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, and it is possible to prevent the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that have been bet on. Also, even in such cases, the lighting of the start lamp can accurately notify the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

Also, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are rotatable, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and rendering the gaming machine inoperable, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), the start lamp may not be lit and none of the reels may spin. In such a case, it is preferable that the start lamp be lit when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated (when the sensor signal of the start switch 12 is turned off).

As a result, even if the start switch 12 is unintentionally operated (such as by placing a hand on the start switch 12) when the power is turned on after a power outage, the reels will not spin unintentionally, preventing the player from unintentionally using the gaming media that has been bet on. Also, by not lighting the start lamp in such a case, the player can be made aware that the reels will not spin until the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated, and the start lamp lights up when the operation of the start switch 12 is terminated, accurately informing the player that the operation of the start switch 12 was valid.

In addition, in a situation where a power outage occurs while the reels are in a rotatable state, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, if the start switch 12 is pressed and the power is turned on while the start switch 12 is being pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed), all of the reels may rotate.

As a result, if a power outage occurs while the reels are spinning, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the start switch 12 is operated before the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the start switch 12 is operated (when the power outage recovery process is executed), all the reels will spin after the power is turned on, so it is possible for the game to progress (all the reels will spin) regardless of when the player operates the start switch 12, reducing the player's workload and improving the tempo of the game.

When the front panel PS2 is closed, all reels are spinning, and the operation of the stop switch 13 is valid (hereinafter referred to as the reel stoppable state), when the stop switch 13 is operated (pressed) (when any of the sensors detecting the left stop switch 13a, middle stop switch 13b, and right stop switch 13c turns from OFF to ON), a stop control process is executed for the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13, and the reel corresponding to the operated stop switch 13 stops. Note that the reel stoppable state is not limited to a state in which all reels are spinning, and a state in which any one reel is spinning can also be referred to as the reel stoppable state.

When the reels can be stopped, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is enabled, and when the reels cannot be stopped even when the stop switch 13 is operated, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 is lit to indicate that it is disabled.

Here, the state where the reels cannot be stopped may be a state where the reels are rotating but the operation of the stop switch 13 is not accepted (such as when a rotation failure is being detected or when another switch managed by the main control means 100 is being operated), or a state where the reels are not rotating (such as when all reels are stopped or when the left stop switch 13a is operated when the left reel is stopped).

In addition, the lighting state indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is active is when it is lit in white or red, and the lighting state indicating that the LED constituting the stop switch 13 is inactive is when it is unlit (off) or when it is lit in a color (e.g. blue) different from the lighting color indicating that it is active.

In addition, in a state where the reels can be stopped, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below the threshold and rendering the gaming machine unable to operate, the left stop switch 13a is pressed and the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if the power outage recovery process is executed while the sensor of the left stop switch 13a remains ON), the stop control process is not executed for the left reel. Also, if the power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 is lit up to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, the left stop switch 13a is the stop switch that corresponds to the final stop operation, and even if a power outage occurs while the left reel is in a stoppable state and the left stop switch 13a is unintentionally operated when the power is turned on, the left stop switch 13a will not stop the rotation of the left reel, making it possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged, such as missing out on a minor role that requires careful pressing. It is also possible to prevent the stop switch 13 from accepting an operation in a different order from the correct order when an internal lottery result (the so-called "order of pressing role") is won, in which a symbol combination that is advantageous to the player stops depending on the order of pressing.

In addition, in a state where the reels can be stopped, if a power outage occurs, causing the operating voltage to fall below a threshold value and making the gaming machine unable to operate, the left stop switch 13a may be pressed, and if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (if a power outage recovery process is executed), a stop control process may be executed for the left reel. Even in this case, if power is turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed, the LED that constitutes the stop switch 13 will be lit to indicate that it is disabled.

As a result, for example, if a power outage occurs during play, causing the operating voltage to momentarily fall below the threshold, and then the left stop switch 13a is pressed before the operating voltage exceeds the threshold and the power is automatically turned on, and the power is automatically turned on while the left stop switch 13a is pressed (when the power outage recovery process is executed), the left reel stops after the power is turned on, so the game can proceed (the corresponding reel stops) regardless of when the player presses the stop switch 13, reducing the player's efforts and improving the game tempo. Note that when stopping the reel corresponding to the stop switch 13 that is pressed after power is turned on, the reel can be stopped even if the reel is accelerating, making it possible to approach the timing that the player originally wanted to stop it. However, if multiple stop switches 13 are pressed after power is turned on, none of the reels are stopped.

<Control to deal with power interruption during slip control according to this embodiment> When the start switch 12 is operated and the reel is rotating, and the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted, the reel is rotated from the acceptance position of the stop switch 13 to the stop position (so-called slip control), and the reel stops when it has rotated to the stop position. If a power interruption process is executed during this slip control, slip control cannot be executed, and therefore the reel cannot be stopped at the stop position.

In addition, the stop position is determined when the stop switch 13 is received, and the winning determination process is executed based on the determined stop position, so when it is determined that a small win has been won based on the stop position, regardless of whether the reels are actually stopped or not, the payout of medals based on the small win is executed.

For this reason, in a game in which a small prize is won by the internal lottery process, a power-off process is executed during slip control when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small prize can be stopped, and even if the symbol corresponding to the small prize is not stopped on a winning line after the power is restored, the winning determination process after all reels have stopped determines that the symbol combination corresponding to the small prize has been stopped, and medals are paid out according to the stopped symbol combination.

This is for the following reasons. That is, while it has the effect of preventing a situation in which a player is unable to receive a medal payout even though he or she performed a stop operation at the timing when the medal payout should be received, it also has the problem of not being able to recognize which symbol combination the medal payout is based on. To solve this problem, in a game in which a small prize has been won through internal lottery processing, a power cut process is executed during slip control (from the time the stop acceptance is accepted until the end of slip control) when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted at a timing when the symbol corresponding to the small prize can be stopped, and after the power is restored, the reel is rotated to detect the index, and based on the detected index information, the reel is controlled to rotate to the stop position and then stop at the stop position, and the medals are then paid out.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is cut off during slip control, the reels will rotate to the intended stop position after the power is restored, allowing the player to visually confirm which symbol combination has been stopped, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, if a power cut process is performed during slippage control, and an index is detected during re-spin processing after power is restored, the reel will move to the planned stop position even if the same symbol is present during the movement to the planned stop position. If the reel stops on the same symbol just before the planned stop position, it may result in a stop prohibition display that will not stop during play, so a process is required to determine whether or not stopping is prohibited, but the reel is moved to the planned position to reduce the processing burden during re-spin processing.

In addition, power-off processing is executed during slip control, and in the re-spin processing after power is restored, acceleration processing and constant speed processing are executed in the same way as the normal reel spin start processing. However, this is not limited to this, and acceleration processing and constant speed processing different from the normal processing may be executed. For example, it is possible to think of a state in which the acceleration time is shorter, the acceleration time is longer, the constant speed spin speed is slower, or the constant speed spin speed is faster. In this way, by changing the acceleration mode or constant speed mode from the normal state, it is possible to make the player aware that the spin is different from the normal state.

In addition, if the reel rotates to the same position as the stop acceptance position while rotating at a constant speed during re-spinning, the reel enters slip control as if a stop operation had been accepted, as in normal rotation processing, and when the reel rotates to the planned stop position, a full-phase excitation signal is output to the stepping motor driving the reel (in the case of a four-phase stepping motor, a four-phase excitation signal is output), stopping the re-spinning reel.

In addition, if power is cut off during slippage control, and the re-spin process is in progress after power is restored, it is possible to have the LCD display show "Re-spinning", output a voice message saying "Re-spinning", or have the error display show an error message to let the player know that the re-spin is occurring. This allows the player to know that the re-spin is not normal.

In addition, when power-off processing is executed during slip control, a flag indicating that slip control has not been completed is stored in a specified memory area, and when power is turned on, the specified memory area is checked, and if the flag is set, re-spin processing is executed. The flag is initialized when the re-spin processing is stopped as a result of being executed, so that the re-spin processing is not executed when power is turned on normally. The flag indicating that slip control has not been completed may be an error flag or a game status flag.

In addition, when a power cut process is performed during slip control, the re-rotation process may be performed automatically after the power is restored, or an error may occur after the power is restored and the re-rotation process is performed after the error is released using a reset switch. Either aspect is applicable to the re-rotation process in the following embodiments.

In addition, a power-off process may be performed during slip control, and during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, the rotation failure detection counter may be updated during acceleration and at a constant speed, or during at a constant speed. Then, when the rotation failure detection counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the above-mentioned 180), the acceleration process is performed again. Possible causes of rotation failure in this case include the reel being held by hand, loss of synchronism due to a motor malfunction, or deterioration of components over time.

In this case, the rotation failure detection counter is initialized in the initialization process when the power is turned on, and the rotation failure detection counter starts updating (counting) as the re-spin process is executed. Then, after the index is detected for the first time after the power is turned on, the value of the rotation failure detection counter is updated to 0 and updating of the rotation failure detection counter starts again, and the reel control means rotates the reel to the stop position and stops it. By clearing the rotation failure detection counter after the first index is detected in this way, even if the position of the reel stopped due to the power-off process is the position immediately after the index has passed, and the stop position is the position immediately before the index has passed, it is possible to stop the reel to the stop position without detecting a rotation failure. In other words, the reel rotates approximately two revolutions from when the power is turned on until it stops, but it is not determined that there is a rotation failure.

Note that the timing for initializing the rotation failure detection counter is when the power is turned on, but this is not limited to the above. The rotation failure detection counter may be initialized when the stop switch 13 is received, or when the reel state becomes a constant speed state.

In this way, power cut processing is performed during slip control, and rotation failure is detected during re-rotation processing after power is restored, making it possible to prevent the stop position from shifting due to step-out, etc., even during re-rotation, and to stop the motor at the planned stop position. Furthermore, since rotation failure is not detected during normal slip control, re-acceleration processing is not performed if step-out, etc., occurs during normal slip control.

Next, if a power cut process is executed during slip control and an error (recoverable error) is detected during the re-spin process after the power is restored, an error is notified after the re-spin process is completed. The errors detected at this time are any of the following errors: medal retention error, medal backflow error, medal passing time error, hopper retention error, hopper empty error, abnormality detection error, door open error, harness disconnection error, etc. In addition to the error code displayed on the number of acquired coins display 27, the error can be notified by an LCD, a speaker, or by lighting the upper or both side performance lamps or performance switch lamps in a specified color (for example, a highly visible and noticeable color such as red or blue). Note that the error can be notified by only one error notification or by a combination of multiple error notifications.

In this way, by issuing an error notification after the re-spin process has finished, it is possible to make it easier for players and game center personnel to recognize whether the notification is for a re-spin or an error. If a re-spin notification is issued during a re-spin, the notification is configured to end after the re-spin has finished and switch to an error notification. Note that no error notifications are issued during a re-spin, and notifications related to re-spin that are not error notifications are not executed either.

The error modes during the re-spinning process described above are not limited to these, and only some errors may be detected (for example, a hopper accumulation error may be detected but a medal accumulation error may not be detected), and the error notification mode may be such that after an error is detected, the error is notified by the acquired coin count display 27, and when the re-spinning process is completed and the reels stop, the error is notified by the LCD or speaker, or the error is notified by the acquired coin count display 27, LCD, or speaker after an error is detected.

Then, power is cut off during slip control, and during the re-spin process after power is restored, the light on the stop switch 13 is disabled, so that the corresponding reel will not stop even if the stop switch 13 is operated.

In addition to power recovery after a power outage during slip control, situations in which the reel rotates when the power is turned on also include power recovery after a power outage during normal reel rotation. When power is restored after a power outage during normal reel rotation, the reel can be stopped, and the illumination state of the lamp on the stop switch 13 is in an effective state. Therefore, by checking the illumination state of the lamp on the stop switch 13 when the reel rotates when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reel is undergoing a re-spin process or normal reel rotation is occurring.

Another situation in which the reels spin when the power is turned on is when the power is restored after being turned off while the reels are frozen. Types of freezes in which the reels spin include pseudo-games in which temporary stop control is performed by operating the stop switch 13, and reel effects in which the reels do not stop spinning even when the stop switch 13 is operated.

During simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 lamp is in an active state, and when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play, the light on the stop switch 13 lamp is in an active state, so when the reels spin when the power is turned on, it is possible to determine whether the reels are in the reel re-spinning process or are spinning normally by checking the light on the stop switch 13 lamp.

During reel performance, the light of the stop switch 13 is in an invalid state, and when power is restored after a power outage during reel performance, the light of the stop switch 13 is in an invalid state, so when the reel spins when the power is turned on, it is not possible to determine whether the reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress from the light of the stop switch 13. In this case, however, it is possible to determine this by checking a display device such as an LCD or an error display. Note that even if the light of the stop switch is in an invalid state during reel performance, when the operation of other main system switches (switches managed by the main control means 100) is enabled, the light of the other main system switches is in an valid state, so it is possible to determine whether the reel performance is in progress or the re-spin process is in progress by checking the light of the other main system switches.

In addition, when power is restored after a power outage during simulated play or reel presentation, the reels may not be rotated. In this case, since the reels do not rotate when power is restored, it is easy to determine whether or not a re-spin process is in progress based on the way the reels spin.

Next, if power-off processing is executed during slip control and then executed again during re-rotation processing after power is restored, the motor will rotate until the index is detected after power is restored, and then move to the planned stop position again and stop. Note that if power-off processing is executed just before the index is detected, and the index is not detected during acceleration after power is restored, the motor will rotate again until the index is detected, which can also be said to be the case.

In this way, the re-spin process can be executed even if the power is restored after a power outage during the re-spin process, making it possible to display the stopped symbols to the player even in an unstable situation where multiple power outages may occur.

Here, the timing when the power-off process is executed during slip control and then executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored can be either before the index is detected during the re-rotation process or after the index is detected during the re-rotation process.

<Pattern 1> If the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, before the index is detected during the re-rotation process, the motor may rotate until the index is detected during the second re-rotation process after the power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, the index is not detected in the first re-rotation process and the reference pattern position is not stored, so the second re-rotation process determines that the reference pattern position has not been stored and executes another rotation to detect the index, allowing the reel to stop at the planned stopping position.

<Pattern 2-1> Furthermore, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, this can be after the index is detected during the re-rotation process (as long as the sensor detects the index, this also includes the timing of the moment the sensor detects the index; the same applies below), then after the power is restored, the reel can be rotated to the planned stop position based on the reference pattern position according to the index detected before the power was removed, and then stopped.

In this case, since the index is detected during the first re-spin process, the reel can stop at the planned stopping position based on the stored reference symbol position, making it possible to shorten the time until gameplay can be resumed by the time it takes to detect the index.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-1, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (output of four-phase excitation), even if the timing when the power-off process is executed is that the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position, or even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, the re-rotation process or stop control will be executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, so the process is not complicated and the program can be speeded up.

<Pattern 2-2> Also, if the power-off process is executed during slip control, and the power-off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored, and the timing is after the index is detected during the re-rotation process, it is possible to detect the index again after the power is restored, and then rotate to the planned stop position and stop.

In this case, taking into consideration the possibility that the reel may have moved between the second power outage and when power is restored, the reel will rotate again until the index is detected again, allowing the reel to rotate more accurately to the intended stopping position.

In the above-mentioned pattern 2-2, if a power-off process is executed between the detection of the index during the first re-rotation process and the rotation to the planned stop position and the application of the brake (output of four-phase excitation), even if the timing when the power-off process is executed is that the rotation has not yet reached the stop acceptance position, or even if the rotation has reached the stop acceptance position, a re-rotation process is executed to detect the index again after the power is restored, and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped there.

In this way, regardless of the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process, the same re-rotation process or stop control can be executed after the second power recovery, so the process is not complicated and the program can be speeded up.

<Pattern 2-3> In addition, if the power off process is executed during slip control, and the power off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored as the timing when the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has not rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process or stop control is executed based on the stored reference pattern position without detecting the index again after the power is restored, and if the power off process is executed during slip control, and the power off process is executed again during the re-rotation process after the power is restored as the timing when the index has been detected during the re-rotation process but the pattern has rotated to the stop acceptance position, then the re-rotation process to detect the index again after the power is restored is executed and the pattern is moved to the planned stop position and stopped.

In this way, the stop acceptance position accepted immediately before the first power-off process can be precisely controlled after the reference power source is restored, making it possible to execute appropriate processing according to the situation in which the power-off process was executed.

<Control of the performance mode using the performance switch according to this embodiment> A performance using a performance switch (sometimes called a push button performance) will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 shows the process in which a performance switch is operated, starting with the operation of the start switch 12, followed by the operation of the left stop switch 13a, the operation of the middle stop switch 13b, and the operation of the right stop switch 13c, to perform a performance in which the performance switch is operated. Also, the area marked "PUSH" in FIG. 23 represents the performance switch (however, the "PUSH" display at the top of the middle and bottom diagrams in FIG. 23 is a display on the LCD).

In the upper left diagram of FIG. 23, the LCD displays the effect "Win at rock-paper-scissors!!" which is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 to start the game (more specifically, the reception of a start switch reception command or a reel spin start command from the main control means 100). At this point, the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the top center diagram of Figure 23, the "Ta-da!" effect is displayed on the LCD screen, which is executed based on the operation of the left stop switch 13a to stop the left reel (more specifically, the receipt of a left stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the upper right diagram of FIG. 23, the LCD displays the "Keen!" effect, which is executed based on the operation of the middle stop switch 13b to stop the middle reel (more specifically, the receipt of a middle stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the lower left diagram of Figure 23, the LCD displays the "Pop!" effect that is executed based on the operation of the right stop switch 13c to stop the right reel (more specifically, the receipt of a right stop switch reception command from the main control means 100). At this point, the operation of the effect switch is still invalid, so the effect switch is off.

Next, in the middle and bottom diagrams of FIG. 23, an image of a switch (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a switch image for effects, an operation prompt image, or an operation prompt effect) that imitates an effect switch that is executed based on all reels being stopped (more specifically, receiving a command to stop all reels from the main control means 100) is displayed on the LCD. Also, the "Pop!" effect that is displayed when the right stop switch 13c, which is the third stop, is operated is displayed dimly (with reduced brightness). At this time, the operation of the effect switch is valid, so the effect switch is lit. When the image is displayed dimly, in addition to reducing the brightness, it may also be possible to reduce the brightness or to overlay a gray semi-transparent display on the image. In any case, when the image is displayed dimly, it is also possible to express that visibility is reduced.

Next, in the diagram at the bottom right of Figure 23, an image that says "Victory!" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as an operation response image or operation response effect) is displayed on the LCD screen, which is executed based on the operation of the effect switch (more specifically, the input signal related to the effect switch being input to the input port). At this time, the operation of the effect switch is invalid, so the effect switch is turned off.

As shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23, when a special effect switch image is displayed on the LCD as an effect to encourage the player to operate the special effect switch, the special effect switch image is made larger than the actual size of the special effect switch. By displaying it in this way, the special effect switch can be effectively displayed on the LCD display where the player is focusing, making it possible to intuitively encourage the player to operate the special effect switch.

The performance switch image also displays an image (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a lighting mode image) that shows the lighting mode of the performance switch. When the performance switch is active, the performance switch lamp is lit (does not blink), and the lighting mode image is displayed as a blinking mode in which the lamp turns on and off repeatedly at a predetermined cycle. With this configuration, the performance switch image repeatedly becomes brighter and darker, making the performance switch image stand out and thus effectively encouraging the operation of the performance switch.

In addition, when the effect switch is valid, the effect switch lamp is lit in a flashing manner in which it turns on and off repeatedly at a specific cycle, and the expression of the lighting mode image may be a flashing manner in which it turns on and off repeatedly at a predetermined cycle. In this case, it is possible to make the lighting mode image stand out by making the predetermined cycle of the lighting mode image shorter than the specific cycle of the effect switch lamp. Note that in this case, the operation (pressing) of the effect switch is valid even when the effect switch lamp is off, and based on the operation of the effect switch at this timing, the effect is switched from a state in which a dim "Pop!" is displayed (the state in the lower center diagram of FIG. 23) to a state in which "Victory!" is displayed (the state in the lower right diagram of FIG. 23).

In addition, even if the machine is equipped with an eco mode (when eco mode is selected, the brightness of the upper and side performance lamps is lowered or turned off, the brightness of the lower panel is lowered or turned off, and the brightness of the LCD display is lowered or turned off more than when eco mode is not selected), the brightness of the performance switch when it is turned on to execute a push button performance during eco mode is set to be the same as the brightness of the performance switch when it is turned on to execute a push button performance when not in eco mode. This makes it possible to effectively encourage the player to operate (press) the performance switch.

Even if the error notification is performed by lighting or blinking the performance lamps on the top or both sides or the performance switch lamps in a specified color (highly visible and conspicuous colors such as red or blue), it is advisable to make the brightness of the performance lamps on the top or both sides and the performance switch lamps the same when in eco mode and when not in eco mode.

In addition, when an image showing the light-on state is displayed as the light-on state image, the brightness of the effect switch image is lowered, but the brightness is not lowered until it becomes black, making it appear slightly lit. On the other hand, when the effect switch lamp is turned off, it is not lit. By making the expression of the off state of the effect switch lamp and the light-on state image different in this way, it is possible to make the light-on state image stand out. Also, because the area around the effect switch image is brighter than the area around the effect switch, the difference in brightness with the surroundings is reduced by not lowering the brightness of the light-on state image of the effect switch image until it becomes black. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to reduce fatigue during play while making the effect switch image stand out.

In addition, when a special effect switch image is displayed before the previous image as in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23, the brightness of the previous image is lowered, but the brightness of the previous image is set to be lower than the lowest brightness of the lighting state image of the special effect switch image. By configuring it in this way, even when the brightness of the special effect switch image is at its lowest, it is brighter than the surrounding images, making it possible to make the special effect switch image stand out.

The diagrams in the middle and bottom of Figure 23 will be further explained with reference to Figure 24. The effect switch image changes over time until the effect switch is operated. As a change mode, the effect showing the movement of the effect switch between its initial position and the pressed position is expressed using the effect switch image.

The leftmost image in Figure 24 shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, the second image from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the pressed position, the third image from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the initial position, and the fourth image from the left shows that the effect switch image is in the pressed position. In this way, by repeatedly showing the effect switch image in the initial position and the pressed position, it is possible to effectively encourage the player to press the effect switch.

The initial position and pressed position of the effect switch image change at a constant cycle, and the cycle representing the initial position and pressed position of the effect switch image is configured to be longer than the predetermined cycle representing the lighting and extinguishing of the lighting mode image. This configuration makes it possible to make the effect switch image stand out and to avoid evoking the idea of repeatedly hitting the effect switch. Many gaming machines currently on the market change the effects continuously by repeatedly hitting the effect switch, and if the change in the effect switch image changes too quickly, it may be mistaken for a repeated hitting effect, which may reduce the interest of the game. For this reason, by making the cycle of the change between the initial position and the pressed position longer than the lighting mode cycle, it is possible to intuitively express that the effect is not being hit repeatedly while making the player aware of the fact that the effect switch is being pressed.

In addition, in a situation where an effect is displayed in which the effect switch is to be repeatedly pressed, the cycle in which the effect switch changes between the initial position and the pressed position can be made shorter than the cycle in which the effect switch is lit, thereby making it possible to intuitively convey to the player that the effect switch is to be repeatedly pressed. Note that this is not limited to this, and an effect that indicates repeated pressing may be achieved by making the cycle in which the effect switch image changes from the initial position to the pressed position shorter than the cycle in which the effect switch ends when the effect switch is operated once, without changing the position of the effect switch image.

Also, the effect switch image may not be changed between the initial position and the pressed position at a fixed interval. In this case, the display area of the liquid crystal display can be made smaller, so it is possible to display text such as "Press the PUSH button" instead, which instructs the player to press the effect switch.

When a switch image for operating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD and the switch image for operating the performance switch is operated, the switch image for performance is erased without any effects. In other words, when the switch image for performance is displayed and the switch image for performance is operated, the switch image for performance is immediately erased and the performance based on the pressing of the switch for performance is immediately executed. In this case, the switch image for performance may be erased in a drawing process immediately after the switch image for performance is accepted, or the switch image for performance may be erased in a drawing process executed a predetermined period of time after the switch image for performance is accepted.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in what result occurs when the effect switch is pressed, and it is possible to make the information about whether or not the effect switch has been pressed less noticeable.

In addition, even if the front panel PS2 is opened while a switch image for operating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD, the display of the switch image for performance continues, and when the switch for performance is operated, the switch image for performance is erased without any effects, and the performance based on the pressing of the switch for performance is immediately executed. In this case, as described above, the switch image for performance may be erased in the drawing process immediately after the operation of the switch for performance is accepted, or the switch image for performance may be erased in the drawing process executed a predetermined period after the operation of the switch for performance is accepted.

In this way, by executing effects based on pressing the effect switch regardless of whether the front panel PS2 is open or closed, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game from being impeded even if the front panel PS2 is unintentionally opened.

In addition, the lighting state of the performance switch when the liquid crystal displays a performance switch image for operating the performance switch when the front panel PS2 is open is configured to be different from the lighting state of the performance switch when the liquid crystal displays a performance switch image for operating the performance switch when the front panel PS2 is closed. For example, the front panel PS2 may be lit when the front panel PS2 is closed and flashing or turned off when the front panel PS2 is open, or the flashing period may be faster in the closed state than in the open state, or the lighting color may be different between the open state and the closed state. In addition, when the front panel PS2 is open, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in a position overlapping at least a part of the performance switch image as shown in FIG. 28 (in order to improve the visibility of the performance switch image and the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in a position where these images do not overlap each other). Furthermore, when the front panel PS2 is open, a sound (for example, "The door is open") may be output indicating that the front panel PS2 is open. In this case, the sound effect accompanying the display of the effect switch image or the sound effect accompanying the effect based on the pressing of the effect switch may not be output. This allows accurate notification that the front panel PS2 is open. On the other hand, even when a sound is output indicating that the front panel PS2 is open, the sound effect accompanying the display of the effect switch image or the sound effect accompanying the effect based on the pressing of the effect switch may be output. This allows accurate notification that the front panel PS2 is open without impeding the progress of the game.

In addition, when a performance switch image for operating the performance switch is displayed on the LCD, if the front panel PS2 is opened, an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be displayed in place of the performance switch image, and pressing the performance switch may be disabled. When the front panel PS2 is then closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be erased and the performance switch image may be displayed again. Note that the performance switch image may be made invisible by displaying an image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open over the performance switch image, and when the front panel PS2 is then closed, the image indicating that the front panel PS2 is open may be erased and the performance switch image may be made visible again. In this case as well, by changing the lighting state of the performance switch before and after the opening of the front panel PS2 as described above, it is possible to accurately notify that the front panel PS2 is open.

In addition, when an effect is executed that means that a bonus will be given to the player when the effect switch is operated (success effect), the effect switch image is erased without any effects, but when an effect is executed that means that a bonus will not be given to the player when the effect switch is operated (failure effect), the effect switch image may be erased with effects. Note that examples of effects that result in a failure effect include an explosion of the effect switch image or a state in which the brightness of the effect switch image is maintained at its darkest state (a state in which the brightness does not change periodically).

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate to the player that a failure effect was displayed as a result of operating the effect switch, which fosters a sense of satisfaction in the player and prevents a decline in interest in subsequent games.

In addition, if a special effect switch image is displayed when all reels have stopped, when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated, an image based on the operation of the start switch 12 is displayed instead of the image that is displayed when the special effect switch is operated. Furthermore, when an image based on the operation of the start switch 12 is displayed, the special effect switch image is erased. In this case, the special effect switch image is erased without any effects.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute appropriate effects in response to the player's operation without interfering with the effects executed based on the operation of the start switch 12. A player who skips the effect switch image by operating the start switch 12 is likely to be aware of a low level of expectation in advance, or to have no interest in the effects that use the effect switch itself, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game by erasing the effect without any effects.

In addition, when comparing the time from when the operation of the effect switch is accepted to when the effect switch image is erased when a success effect is displayed by operating the effect switch in a situation where the effect switch image is displayed, to when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the push order navigation image is erased when a success effect is displayed by operating the stop switch 13 corresponding to the correct push order in a situation where the push order navigation image is displayed, the time from when the operation of the effect switch is accepted to when the push order navigation image is erased is longer.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to change the time until a reaction effect is executed when various switches are operated, and different types of excitement can be provided by varying the time difference between the various switches and the execution of the reaction effect. For example, in a push order navigation image in which a player loses profits directly if they press the buttons in the wrong order, it is more interesting for the player if the next information is displayed immediately, and by allowing a short delay between the operation of the effect switch and the effect, players can anticipate whether a successful or unsuccessful effect will be displayed.

When the performance switch also serves as a switch for displaying a menu screen, the performance switch lamp is configured to light up after a certain period of time (e.g., T1) has elapsed after all reels have stopped. The lighting state of the performance switch lamp at this time is different from the lighting state of the performance switch lamp when a performance is executed by operating the performance switch after all reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to indicate whether a menu screen will be displayed or whether a success or failure effect will be displayed when the effect switch is operated, depending on the lighting state of the effect switch lamp.

In addition, when the effect switch image is displayed as shown in the middle and bottom diagrams of Figure 23 after all the reels have stopped, even if T1 has elapsed, at which point the menu screen can be displayed after all the reels have stopped, the lighting state of the effect switch lamp is not the lighting state when the menu screen is displayed, but is the lighting state corresponding to the effect switch image. Then, when the effect switch is operated after T1 has elapsed after all the reels have stopped, the effect switch image is erased, a success or failure effect is executed, and the effect switch lamp remains off. And even when T1 has elapsed after the effect switch operation is accepted, the effect switch lamp remains off, and the menu screen is not displayed even if the effect switch is operated. Furthermore, even if T2 has elapsed after all the reels have stopped, at which point the demo screen is displayed, the demo screen is not displayed, the volume is reduced, and the effect switch lamp remains off. In this case, depending on whether the settlement process is executed by accepting the operation of the settlement switch, or whether the game is played until the end of the next game (the end of a game in which the performance switch image is not displayed), the menu screen can be displayed T1 after all reels have stopped, and the demo screen can be displayed T2 after all reels have stopped.

By configuring it in this way, in a game in which a presentation switch image is displayed, the player does not need to worry about whether the menu screen will be displayed or whether a success or failure presentation will be displayed by operating the presentation switch, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game. Note that the configuration may be such that the menu screen cannot be displayed even when the settlement process is executed, in which case it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation until a so-called revival presentation is executed, in which a failure presentation is displayed in the game but a success presentation is displayed in the next game.

In addition, when the performance switch lamp is lit in a manner that allows the menu screen to be displayed, the performance switch image is not displayed on the LCD. In other words, whether or not the menu screen is displayed can only be confirmed by the lighting state of the performance switch lamp.

By configuring it in this way, the notification of the menu screen display status, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, can be executed only by the lighting state of the effect switch lamp, so it is possible to reduce the possibility of creating anticipation for the operation of the effect switch compared to if the effect switch image were displayed on the LCD. It is also possible to prevent a decrease in the fun of the game due to the menu screen being displayed even though the player has operated the effect switch with anticipation.

In addition, on the demo screen, where the player can easily recognize that no game is progressing, the effect switch image may be displayed in a different position and in a smaller size than the effect switch image displayed in the push button effect. In this case, the player is less likely to confuse it with the push button effect, and it is possible to effectively display the menu screen to the player. This is based on the fact that the most common timing for displaying the menu screen is when starting play, and since no game is being played at that time, there is a high possibility that the demo screen is being displayed.

The display position of the effect switch image is such that during the push button effect, the effect switch image is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal, and during the demo screen, the effect switch image is displayed at the edge of the liquid crystal (for example, as shown in FIG. 29, in a less noticeable position such as the bottom of the liquid crystal or the bottom left of the liquid crystal). As described above, the effect switch image during the demo screen is displayed in a smaller size than the effect switch image during the push button effect. In other words, it can be said that at least one of the display area and size of the effect switch image during the demo screen and the effect switch image during the push button effect are different. Furthermore, it is preferable to make the display mode of the effect switch image during the push button effect and the effect switch image during the demo screen different (for example, the effect switch image during the push effect is displayed in a flashing mode that repeatedly turns on and off at a predetermined cycle, and the effect switch image during the demo screen is displayed in a lit mode, etc.). This makes it possible for the player to intuitively distinguish between a situation in which the effect switch is desired to be pressed as part of the effect and a situation in which the effect switch may be pressed.

The switch image for effects in the demo screen may be in a form that displays a caption such as "Press PUSH to display menu" as shown in FIG. 30.

The timing for executing the push button effect is after all the reels have stopped, but it may also be after the start switch 12 is accepted. If the effect switch image is displayed after the start switch 12 is accepted, the effect switch image may be erased by the first stop operation (operation of any of the stop switches 13), or the display of the effect switch image may be maintained even after all the reels have stopped. If the display of the effect switch image is maintained after all the reels have stopped, the effective period of the operation of the effect switch is also maintained, and when the effect switch is operated, a success or failure effect is executed. Note that the effect switch image is erased even if the effect switch is not operated because the time required to move to the demo screen has elapsed, the settlement process has been executed, the bet process has been executed, or the next game has started.

In addition, whether or not an operation-responsive performance is executed as a result of the operation of the performance switch is determined by setting a predetermined timer value in a counter based on receipt of a predetermined command from the main control means 100, decrementing the counter value at predetermined intervals by timer interrupt processing, etc., and enabling operation of the performance switch when the counter value becomes 0 (an operation-responsive performance is executed as a result of the operation of the performance switch). At this time, the drawing process of the performance switch image is also executed after a period equivalent to a predetermined timer value has elapsed since receipt of the predetermined command, but due to delays in communication between the image control board that executes the drawing process and the performance control board, the performance switch may become enabled before the performance switch image is displayed. In this way, the system is configured so that a response performance can be executed even if the performance switch is operated before the performance switch image is displayed.

<Explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment> Next, the relationship between the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects applicable to this embodiment will be explained.

In the effects that can be applied to this embodiment described below, it is possible to simultaneously output both winning effects associated with the payout process of gaming medals based on the winning of minor roles such as push order roles, settlement effects associated with the settlement process, and deposit effects associated with betting operations, with the aim of preventing the player from mistakenly thinking that the settlement was not performed properly or that the deposit was not performed properly, and allowing the player to recognize that the gaming machine is functioning normally.

The configuration related to the winning effects, settlement effects and deposit effects that can be applied to this embodiment will be explained below.

<Main control means> The main processes of the main control means are as described in this embodiment, but details of the processes omitted in the description of this embodiment are explained below.

<Processing when gaming medals are inserted> If gaming medals are in a state where they can be inserted, when the gaming medals are inserted, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit, a bet (also called a bet) is set for the number of medals inserted, and if it is set to the upper limit, the number of medals inserted is added to the credit. Also, if the bet number is not set to the upper limit and the number of medals that can be bet is stored in the credit, a bet is set in response to the operation of the bet switch (MAX bet switch 18, 1 bet switch 19). Here, inserting a gaming medal is equivalent to the gaming medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 17 passing normally through the medal selector 34. Note that if the gaming medals have been bet set or are stored in the credit and before the game starts (after the required bet number has been set and before the start lever is operated), settlement processing can be performed by operating the settlement switch. Furthermore, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000, also referred to as the presentation control means) when a gaming medal is inserted, and transmits a reserve insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of medals set for the bet when the bet switch is operated. When credits are accumulated (added), the main control means transmits a reserve number command indicating the current number of accumulated medals to the sub-control means. Based on these commands, the sub-control means can execute insertion presentations such as outputting the sound of a gaming medal being inserted.

<Winning Process (Payout Process)> The winning process (hereinafter also referred to as the payout process) is a process for paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor role (the stopped and displayed symbol combination) when it is determined by the winning determination process that a minor role has won. Paying out game medals here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a winning (whether it is an addition of credits or a payout from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a winning. Based on the payout start command and the payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as outputting the payout sound of the game medals and executing a back lamp effect (also referred to as a BL effect). The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a win in a replay). When there is a loss or a win in a replay, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Settlement process> When the settlement switch is operated while no game is being played, a process (settlement) is executed in which game medals in a number corresponding to the set bet amount or the accumulated credit amount are paid out to the player from the hopper 44. When the settlement process is started, the main control means sends a settlement start command to the sub-control means, and when the settlement process is completed, the main control means sends a settlement end command to the sub-control means. Based on the settlement start command and settlement end command, the sub-control means can execute settlement effects such as outputting a settlement sound.

<Secondary control means> Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the lottery (internal lottery results), push order navigation effects can be executed during the AT, and insertion effects, winning effects, settlement effects, etc. can be executed.

<Insert effect> This effect is executed when a gaming medal is inserted or a bet switch is operated, and an insertion sound is output based on the medal insertion command or reserve insertion command sent from the main control means. The main control means sets the reserve insertion command as either a reserve insertion command (1 medal), a reserve insertion command (2 medals), or a reserve insertion command (3 medals) depending on the number of medals set for the bet, and the set reserve insertion command is sent to the sub-control means. When the reserve insertion command (1 medal) is received, insertion sound A indicating that one medal has been bet is output once (for example, a "da" sound is output), informing the player that one medal has been bet. When the reserve insertion command (3 medals) is received, insertion sound A is output three times, informing the player that three medals have been bet. When a medal insertion command is received, if the inserted gaming medals are set as a bet, insertion sound A is output once, and if they are stored, insertion sound B indicating that one medal has been stored is output once (for example, a "di" sound is output), to notify the player that a bet has been made or that medals have been stored. Note that when a stored insertion command (3 medals) is received, insertion sound C indicating that three medals have been bet may be output instead of outputting insertion sound A three times, or the same sound may be output when a bet has been made and when medals have been stored (for example, insertion sound A is output in all states). Also, a different sound (insertion sound D) may be output during normal times (non-AT) and during AT.

<Winning effect> This effect is executed when the game medals are paid out. It is executed based on the payout start command and the payout end command, and a payout sound is output to indicate that the game medals are being paid out, and a backlight effect is executed.

<Output of payout sound> There are two different payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the payout process of game medals: payout sound A and payout sound B. Payout sound A is a payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during normal times (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout is made. Payout sound B is a payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout is made. If the correct push order is not used, an incorrect pattern combination may stop and an unfavorable payout may be made, but in that case, no payout sound is output. Payout sound A is a payout sound that starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second) after receiving the payout end command. By outputting the payout sound A for a first payout sound period (the period during which the actual payout is being made plus the first specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made (the period during which the payout process is being performed), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. In addition, by outputting the payout sound for a first payout sound period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed, which will make it easier for a performance based on the result of an internal lottery to be performed without being canceled midway, for example, when the performance is being performed over a certain period of time.

The payout sound B starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of the second sound (e.g., a "de" sound) until a payout end command is received, and ends after repeating the output of the second sound for a second specific time (e.g., 2 seconds) after the payout end command is received. That is, the payout sound B outputs a sound for a second payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned second specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and this second payout sound period is longer than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A. In this way, the payout sound B can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded by outputting the payout sound for a longer period than the payout sound A. In addition, by outputting the payout sound B, which is different from the payout sound A, during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in a favorable state that is different from the normal state. In addition, the payout sound is output until the first or second specific time has elapsed after the end payout command is received, but when the start payout command is received, the payout sound may be output for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) plus the first or second specific time, without being triggered by the end payout command. Also, although the payout sound A during normal times and the payout sound B during AT are different, the same payout sound may be output.

<Back lamp performance> There are two different types of back lamp performance: back lamp performance A and back lamp performance B. Back lamp performance A is a back lamp performance that is output when the push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the correct pattern combination stops as a result of operation in the correct push order, resulting in an advantageous payout. Back lamp performance B is a back lamp performance that is executed when the push order role is won during AT, and the correct pattern combination stops as a result of operation in the correct push order, resulting in an advantageous payout. If the operation is not performed in the correct push order, an incorrect pattern combination may stop, in which case the back lamp performance is not executed. Back lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern until a payout end command is received, and after the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. By executing the back lamp performance A for a first back lamp performance period (the period during which the actual payout is being made plus the first specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being made, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being made. Also, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance A for a first back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is being made, it is possible to make the player recognize that a payout is being made during the period during which the back lamp performance A is being executed, which is expected to delay the start of the next game, and furthermore, when a performance based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is more likely to be executed without being canceled midway.

The back lamp performance B starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is turned on and off repeatedly in the second pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is turned on and off repeatedly in the second pattern for a second specific time (for example, 2 seconds) and ends. That is, the back lamp performance B turns on and off repeatedly for a second back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the second specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed, and this second back lamp performance period is longer than the first back lamp performance period. In this way, the back lamp performance B can be recognized as if more game medals have been awarded by executing the back lamp performance for a longer period than the back lamp performance A. In addition, by executing the back lamp performance B, which is different from the back lamp performance A, during the AT, it is possible to easily recognize that the player is in an advantageous state that is different from the normal state.

Note that the back lamp performance is executed from the time the payout end command is received until the first specific time or the second specific time has elapsed, but when the payout start command is received, the back lamp performance may be executed for the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer than the addition of credits and the payout of game medals) plus the first specific time or the second specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. In addition, the back lamp performance is different during normal play and during AT, but the same back lamp performance may be executed. In addition, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a certain pattern, but a series of on and off patterns may be determined and output from the start to the end of the back lamp performance. In addition, the "first back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance A and the "first payout sound period" of the payout sound A are both the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the first specific time, and both are the same period, but these "first back lamp performance period" and "first payout sound period" may be different periods from each other. The same applies to the relationship between the "second back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance B and the "second payout sound period" of the payout sound B. In short, the "first payout sound period" and "second payout sound period" of the payout sounds A and B, and the "first back lamp performance period" and "second back lamp performance period" of the back lamp performance A and B are each longer than the period during which actual payouts are being performed, and as long as the relationship is "first payout sound period" < "second payout sound period" and "first back lamp performance period" < "second back lamp performance period," these periods can be set appropriately.

<Settlement effect> This effect is executed when the game medals are settled, and is executed based on the settlement start command and settlement end command. A settlement sound (settlement effect) indicating that the game medals are being paid out and a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed are output. The settlement sound starts when the settlement start command is received, and a sound different from the payout sound (for example, a "do" sound) is repeatedly output until the payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the sound ends with the output of a voice indicating that the settlement has been completed, such as "Settlement has been completed," within a third specific period (for example, 5 seconds). In other words, in the settlement effect, the sound is output over a predetermined settlement effect period (the period during which the actual payout is being performed plus the third specific time) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the settlement process is being performed).

Hereinafter, various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described with reference to Figs. 31 to 35. Fig. 31 is a time chart when the insertion operation is not performed with the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 32 is a time chart when the insertion operation is performed with the MAX BET switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 33 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the payout process is completed, Fig. 34 is a time chart when the game medal is not inserted after the settlement process is completed, and Fig. 35 is a time chart when the game medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed. Note that, for convenience of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 31 to 35, but the status of the corresponding process or effect is described in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/BL effect/settlement effect, ON indicates a state in which it is being executed, and OFF indicates a state in which it is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the process etc. is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that it is ended. For the payout sound/insertion sound, ON indicates that it is being output, and OFF indicates that it is not being output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that it is lit, and OFF indicates that it is off. For the MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that it has been operated, and OFF indicates that it has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted.

<When the MAX BET switch is not used to insert a coin after the payout process is completed> As shown in FIG. 31, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts outputting a payout sound A (referred to as a payout sound in the figure, the same applies below) and a back lamp effect A (referred to as a BL effect in the figure, the same applies below) based on the payout start command received. At time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means continues outputting the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A as a winning effect for the T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout end command. After the payout process is completed at time t1, the main control means performs a process such as updating the RT state (a game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert a coin. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert a coin at time t2. The MAX BET lamp continues to be lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, the T1 period has elapsed since time t1, so the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period and the first back lamp effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp effect A while turning on the MAX BET lamp from time t1 onwards. By continuing to output the payout sound A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX bet switch is operated after the payout process is completed> As shown in FIG. 32, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not operated after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance A, and outputs the insertion sound A (written as insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times as the insertion performance from the timing of time t3 to the timing of time t4 (during the T2 period). Even if various situations such as outputting the payout sound A and outputting the insertion sound A are combined at the timing after time t3, smooth control is possible, and this allows the player to recognize that the payout has been performed, while also being aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and the bet setting has been performed, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at time t3, the payout sound A continues to be output, but by ending the back lamp effect A, the player is made aware by sound that a payout has been made, and is made aware by sight that a bet has been set. Note that while FIG. 32 illustrates the insertion operation using the MAX BET switch, the insertion sound can also be output by inserting a coin using the 1 BET switch or inserting a coin.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement button after the payout process is completed> As shown in FIG. 33, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the insertion operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the payout process is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement button is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A and the back lamp performance A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. After that, it starts outputting the settlement sound as a settlement performance based on the settlement start command. At the timing of time t6, the main control means ends the settlement process and sends a settlement completion command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the settlement completion command, it replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that settlement has been completed for the T3 period (third specific time). When the settlement process is started, if the payout sound A and the settlement sound are output simultaneously, it will confuse the player, so by ending the output of the payout sound A and the backlight effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, when the settlement process is started, the player can be made to accurately recognize that a settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When no gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed> As shown in FIG. 34, at time t8, the main control means starts the settlement process, and the sub-control means starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement effect based on the settlement start command received. Here, the back lamp effect is not executed (output) during settlement, so that the payout process and the settlement process can be visually different processes. At time t9, the main control means ends the settlement process and transmits a settlement end command to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives the settlement end command, it replaces the output of the settlement sound with the output of a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed for a period of T3. After the settlement process is completed at time t9, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert gaming medals. At time t10, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert gaming medals. Since no medals were inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T13, the T3 period has elapsed since time t9, so the sub-control means ends the output of the sound indicating that the settlement has been completed. As described above, the settlement presentation is being executed from time t10 onwards, but it is possible to insert a coin.

<When a gaming medal is inserted after the settlement process is completed> As shown in Fig. 35, up to the timing of time t10, the situation is the same as when a gaming medal is not inserted after the settlement process is completed, and at the timing of time t11, the main control means inserts a gaming medal, sets a bet on one medal, and transmits a medal insertion command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means outputs an insertion sound A once as an insertion performance based on receiving the medal insertion command, and outputs the sound from the timing of time t11 to the timing of time t12. Even when various situations are combined, such as outputting a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed and outputting the insertion sound A at the timing after time t11, smooth control is possible, and this allows the player to recognize that the settlement process has been completed, while also recognizing that a medal has been inserted and a bet has been set, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. 31 to 35, the payout sound is payout sound A and the BL effect is back lamp effect A. However, in these Figs. 31 to 35, the payout sound may be payout sound B and the BL effect may be back lamp effect B (in this case, it goes without saying that the T1 period in Figs. 31 and 38 is to be read as the second specific time). Even in this case, the same effect as described above is achieved.

<Changes in mode> A configuration has been described in which the same sound is repeatedly output during the payout process or the settlement process until it is completed. In addition to the above-mentioned commands, a command indicating that one coin has been paid out or a command that can identify the number of remaining coins to be paid out may be transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means each time a coin is paid out, and the sub-control means may output a payout sound or a settlement sound each time one coin is paid out based on receiving these commands transmitted from the main control means. In addition, the settlement sound is a different sound from the payout sound, but it may be the same sound as the payout sound. By making them the same sound, the sound data can be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. If they are the same sound, the payout process and the settlement process can be distinguished by the presence or absence of a backlight effect, and the player can be made to recognize that the settlement process is being performed appropriately even if the settlement process is performed immediately after the payout process. In addition, the settlement sound may be the same sound as the error sound. In this case, the sound data can also be reduced, resulting in a reduction in data capacity. Also, during the AT, the payout sound B is output, but in addition to outputting the payout sound B from the start of the payout process, a sound such as "get" or "yes!" indicating the correct push order may be output from the start of the payout process to the end of the payout process and within a time period shorter than the second specific time (2 seconds) that has elapsed. By outputting the sound indicating the correct push order, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated correctly, and by outputting the payout sound for a longer time than the sound indicating the correct push order, the player can recognize that the game medals have also been properly paid out. Also, although the MAX BET lamp is turned on and off by the main control means, the main control means may transmit to the sub-control means whether the MAX BET switch is in an operable state or not, and the sub-control means may turn the lamp on and off.

Also, as the insert effect, it has been described that an insert sound is output, but in addition to outputting the insert sound, an image indicating the insert may be displayed on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the insert has been made. As the winning effect, it has been described that a payout sound is output and a back lamp effect is executed, but an image indicating that a win has been made (for example, displaying GET) on the display device 32, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the win has been made. In this case, when executing the insert effect, the display device 32 may end the display as the winning effect, or the LED lamp may end the notification, or the display device 32 may not display or the LED lamp may not be used as the insert effect. As the settlement effect, it has been described that a settlement sound is output and a sound indicating that the settlement has been completed is output, but an image indicating that the settlement process is being performed on the display device 32 (for example, displaying settlement in progress) may be displayed, or an LED lamp for the effect may be used to notify the user that the settlement is being performed. In this case, when the insertion effect is executed, the display on the display device 32 or the notification on the LED lamp as the settlement effect may be terminated, or the display on the display device 32 or the notification on the LED lamp as the insertion effect may not be executed. Also, although the winning effect is executed for the push order role, it may be executed for other minor roles (such as the watermelon role, the bell role or the cherry role that do not require pushing order, etc.). For other minor roles, a payout sound different from the push order role is output, or a back lamp effect different from the push order role is executed, so that it is easy to recognize that a role different from the push order role has won. Also, the time and length of the period in this embodiment are merely examples, and various changes are possible.

<Explanation of errors related to the hopper 44 that can be applied to this embodiment and winning effects> Next, the relationship between errors related to the hopper 44 that can be applied to this embodiment and winning effects will be explained.

In the presentation applicable to this embodiment described below, the purpose is to allow the player to recognize the results of the game or presentation before a hopper empty error occurs when a winning presentation is performed following the start of the payout process or a presentation after the reels have stopped.

The following describes the configuration related to errors related to the hopper 44 and winning effects that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Main control means> The main processing of the main control means is as described in the present embodiment and the explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect, and deposit effect that are applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processing that are omitted in the description of this embodiment are explained below.

<Winning Process (Payout Process)> The payout process is a process for paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor role (the symbol combination stopped and displayed) when it is determined by the winning determination process that a minor role has won. Paying out game medals here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. In order to pay out game medals from the hopper 44, the main control means (main control board 100) drives the hopper motor by inputting a drive signal to the hopper motor (ON state), and ejects game medals one by one by rotating the turntable, and when the payout sensor detects the game medal for a predetermined time (the time from the start of passage to the end of passage is between 3 ms and 200 ms), it is determined that one game medal has been paid out. In addition, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means (sub-control board 1000) when starting a payout based on a win (whether it is adding credits or paying out from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when it is to end the payout. Based on the payout start command, the sub-control means can execute winning effects such as displaying the payout number and the cumulative difference in the number of medals. The payout start command includes information on the number of medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are also transmitted when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a win in a replay). When there is a loss or a win in a replay, information on the number of medals to be paid out is transmitted as 0, followed by the payout end command.

<Errors related to the hopper 44> As errors related to the hopper 44, a hopper retention error, a hopper empty error, and an abnormality detection error can be detected. The hopper retention error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the payout outlet of the hopper 44 is clogged with game medals when the game medals are paid out, the hopper empty error is an error that occurs when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper are empty, and the abnormality detection error is an error that occurs when it is determined that an abnormal input has been made to the payout sensor of the hopper 44. When the main control means detects an error and notifies the error, it transmits an error notification start command including information on the type of error to the sub-control means, and transmits an error recovery command when the error is released. Based on the error notification start command, the sub-control means displays error information (error screen) corresponding to the type of error detected on the display device 32, and based on the error recovery command, ends the error screen display and returns to the display before the error occurred. In addition, the main control means transmits an error detection command indicating that an error has been detected at the timing when the abnormality detection error is detected, and the sub-control means displays that an abnormality has been detected based on the error detection command.

<Hopper retention error> When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to perform the medal dispense operation that rotates the rotating wheel, and if the dispense sensor continues to detect the medal for a certain period of time (201 ms) or more, it is determined that the game medals are jammed, and a hopper retention error is set. <Hopper empty error> When game medals are dispensed from the hopper 44, a drive signal is input to the hopper motor to perform the medal dispense operation that rotates the rotating wheel, but if the dispense sensor does not detect any game medals for a certain period of time (3.5 seconds), it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, and a hopper empty error is set. <Abnormality detection error> When the dispense sensor detects an abnormal input for a certain period of time (3 ms) or more when the game medals are not being dispensed, it is determined that an abnormality has been input to the dispense sensor, and an abnormality detection error is set. The error is displayed when no game is being played (when waiting for game medals to be inserted, when waiting for the start lever to be accepted).

<Secondary control means> Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects can be executed based on the results of the role selection (internal lottery results), error notifications can be executed, push order navigation effects can be executed during the AT, winning effects can be executed, the result screen can be displayed, result announcement effects can be executed, etc.

<Winning Effects> These effects are executed when game medals are paid out, and include an acquisition display effect that indicates that a predetermined number of game medals are being paid out, and an accumulation display effect that indicates that the game medals won by the player have accumulated to a predetermined number. The acquisition display effect and the accumulation display effect are executed based on the sub-control means receiving a payout start command.

<Acquisition display performance> The acquisition display performance is a performance executed when the push order role is won during the AT, and the correct symbol combination stops as a result of the correct push order operation, and an advantageous payout is performed. The acquisition display performance may be displayed as "GET" without specifying the game medals to be paid out, or may be displayed as "12 medals GET" so that it is specified that 12 game medals will be paid out. If the push order role is won during the AT and the correct push order operation is not performed, an incorrect symbol combination stops and an unfavorable payout (a payout of a smaller number of game medals than the correct symbol combination, such as a payout of 1 medal) may be performed, but in that case the acquisition display performance is not executed. The acquisition display performance starts when a payout start command is received, and is executed for a predetermined acquisition display performance period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is performed (the period during which the payout process is performed). Therefore, it is executed even if all the game medals to be actually paid out to the player have not been paid out. This is to prevent the display of winning from being canceled when the next game starts, or from being confused with the result of the next game, if the display of winning is executed after all medals have been paid out. Also, by executing the display of winning even if all game medals have not been paid out, the player can be made aware of the result of the game (that a payout will be obtained) in advance.

<Cumulative display effect> The cumulative display effect is an effect that is executed when the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT (also referred to as the total number of game medals) exceeds a specified number for the first time (500, 1000, 1500, 2000). Specifically, the cumulative number of acquired medals is counted during one AT from the start of the AT, and the cumulative display effect is executed (started) when it is determined that the cumulative number exceeds 500 due to the payout of game medals. After that, even if the cumulative number falls below 500 and exceeds 500 again, the cumulative display effect is not executed. As for the mode of the cumulative display effect, "500 medals GET" is displayed according to the specified number. The cumulative display effect is started when a payout start command is received and it is determined that the cumulative number will exceed the specified number due to the payout, and is executed for a predetermined cumulative display effect period (1 second) that is shorter than the period during which the actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is being performed). As with the acquisition display effect, it is executed even if the game medals actually paid out to the player do not exceed the specified number. This is to prevent the timing of the cumulative display effect being inconsistent when the cumulative display effect is executed when the specified number is actually exceeded, resulting in the effect being canceled when the next game starts, or being confused with the result of the next game. Also, by executing the cumulative display effect even if the specified number has not been exceeded, it is possible to make the player aware of the result of that game (exceeding the specified number) in advance. Note that while the conditions for executing both the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may be met in one game, in this embodiment, in games in which the cumulative display effect can be executed, as a general rule, only the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. However, cases in which the acquisition display effect is executed, which differs from the general rule, will be described later.

<Display of the result screen> The result screen displayed in this embodiment is a screen displayed when the AT ends, and displays the total number of game medals acquired during the AT, the number of games indicating the execution period of the AT, etc. When the result screen is displayed, a display for calling attention (a display to prevent addiction) is also displayed. When the final game of the AT ends (when the command to stop all reels is received), the display of the result screen begins, and the display of the result screen continues until the next game begins. Note that while the result screen is displayed in the final game, only the acquisition display effect can be executed, and even if any of the specified numbers is exceeded in the final game, the cumulative display effect is not executed. For example, if a push order role is won and the correct push order is operated, the correct pattern combination stops, an advantageous payout is made, and the specified number of 500 coins is exceeded, if it is not the final game, the cumulative display effect is executed, but if it is the final game, the result screen is displayed, so the cumulative display effect is executed without executing the acquisition display effect. This is because the result screen displays the total number of medals won during the AT, and if the cumulative display effect is also performed, similar information will be displayed on top of each other, confusing the player.

<Result Notification Effects> The result notification effects are effects that notify the player that an advantageous result has been obtained, and are effects that are executed in the final game of a series of effects. Specifically, the result notification effects are effects that notify the player of whether an advantageous result has been obtained, such as winning a bonus, winning an additional number of games remaining in the AT, or winning a specialized zone that increases the chances of additional bonuses. As an example, the result of a battle effect or the like notifies the player of whether an advantageous result has been obtained. If an advantageous result has been obtained, an image indicating success or victory is displayed, and if an advantageous result has not been obtained, an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. In a battle effect, a lever operation is triggered to display a screen in which an ally character and an enemy character face off against each other, and after all the reels have stopped (due to receipt of a command to stop all reels), the ally character and the enemy character compete against each other, and after a certain amount of time has passed and the effect branching timing, an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat is displayed. The timing for branching occurs 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and the result notification effect ends when an image indicating success or victory, or an image indicating failure or defeat, is displayed, which is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process. This means that the result notification effect ends before a hopper empty error occurs (is detected) and an error screen is displayed, allowing the player to check whether or not they have achieved a favorable result, regardless of the occurrence of an error. Note that since the command to stop all reels and the command to start payout are sent at approximately the same time, the start of the payout process described above may be replaced with after all reels have stopped.

Hereinafter, various effects executed according to the progress of the game will be described with reference to Figs. 36 to 41. Fig. 36 is a time chart when payout is performed normally, Fig. 37 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), Fig. 38 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs), Fig. 39 is an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally, Fig. 40 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs), and Fig. 41 is an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). Note that for convenience of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 36 to 38, but the corresponding processing and the status of the performance are described in parentheses. Specifically, ON of the payout processing indicates a state in which it is being executed, and OFF indicates a state in which it is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the processing is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that it is ended. ON for payout indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. ON for the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect indicates that the effect is being executed (displayed), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (not displayed). ON for the result notification effect indicates that it is being executed (the effect is in progress), and OFF indicates that it is not being executed (the effect has ended and the display has stopped on the screen announcing the result). ON for error (empty hopper) and error (hopper stuck) indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. ON for error display indicates that an error code is being displayed by the main control means or an error screen is being displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that no error code or error screen is being displayed.

Figures 39 to 41 show the case where the acquisition display effect is executed, and when the cumulative display effect is executed, the notation "GET 12 coins" displayed in the acquisition display effect in the figures changes to the notation "GET 500 coins" displayed in the cumulative display effect.

It is possible to combine the winning effect, settlement effect and deposit effect described above, and times t0 and t1 in Figures 31 to 33 are the same as times t0 and t1 in Figure 36. Time t5 in Figures 31 and 32 is later than time t1 in Figure 36 and earlier than time t15.

<When payout is performed normally> As shown in FIG. 36, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. One second later, at time t14, the sub-control means ends the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect. After that, at time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. The time related to the payout process is 1.5 seconds when it is performed normally (in this example, 12 game medals are paid out normally). The acquisition display effect starts when the payout process starts and ends before the payout process ends. This allows the player to recognize that he will acquire game medals and that the cumulative number of acquired game medals will exceed a predetermined number before the payout process is completed. The result notification effect is executed from the start of the game, so it is already being executed when the payout process starts. At time t15, the result notification effect branches off, and the display from this point onwards differs between displaying an image indicating success or victory, and displaying an image indicating failure or defeat. At time t16, the result notification effect that was being executed ends. Time t15 is 2.7 seconds after the start of the payout process, and time t16 is 3 seconds after the start of the payout process.

<When payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs)> As shown in FIG. 37, the main control means starts the payout process at time t0, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect based on the received payout start command. After the time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, the game medals are not paid out and the rotation of the wheel continues. Then, at the time t17, the main control means determines that the game medals in the hopper 44 are empty, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means displays an error screen. At the other times t14, t15, and t16, as in FIG. 36, at the time t14, the acquisition display effect or the accumulation display effect ends, at the time t15, the effect branching timing occurs, and at the time t16, the result notification effect ends. The period during which the winning display effect and the cumulative display effect are executed and the period until the result notification effect ends are set shorter than the period from when the payout process begins until the hopper empty error occurs, making it possible to check the contents of the winning display effect, the cumulative display effect, and the result notification effect before the hopper empty error occurs and the error screen is displayed. Note that the figure shows a case in which a hopper empty error occurs when not a single medal is paid out after the payout process begins, and if a hopper empty error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing of the hopper empty error will be later than time t17 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out.

<When payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)> As shown in FIG. 38, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of the game medals is not executed because the game medals are stuck at the outlet of the hopper 44. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has been continuously detecting for more than 201 ms since the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that the game medals are stuck, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. Also at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display of) the acquisition display effect or cumulative display effect that was being executed and the result notification effect that was also being executed, and displays an error screen. The acquisition display effect or the cumulative display effect is executed from the start of the payout process, and is executed before the payout process starts and a hopper retention error occurs, so it is possible to check the contents of the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect before the error screen is displayed. Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs when not a single medal is paid out after the start of the payout process. If a hopper retention error occurs after multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes for multiple game medals to be paid out, and the period for executing the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect will be longer.

Although the execution of the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect is canceled and not displayed, the effect itself may be executed while an error screen is displayed superimposed on the effect to make it invisible. In this case, if the error is cleared during the execution of an effect, the effect being executed becomes visible from the moment the error is cleared. However, a reset switch must be operated to clear the error, and since the reset switch is located inside the cabinet, it is necessary to unlock the locking device and open the front panel PS2. Normally, it takes more than three seconds from the start of the payout process to the end of the result notification effect before the error can be cleared, so even if a hopper retention error occurs and the hopper retention error is cleared in the shortest time possible, the winning display effect, cumulative display effect, and result notification effect will not return to being executed, but will return to the screen after all effects have finished.

<Display screen when payout is performed normally> Figure 39 shows an example of a display screen when payout is performed normally. Figure 39 shows a scene in which a game has been played with 11 games remaining in the AT and a total of 230 game medals have been won, and a battle effect (result announcement effect) is being executed. The number of remaining games is displayed in the upper left of the screen (since the game was played with 11 games remaining, one is subtracted and it is displayed as 10G (games)). The total number of game medals won in the AT is displayed as 230 in the upper right of the screen. Friendly characters (characters with round heads) are displayed on the left side of the center of the screen, and enemy characters (characters with star-shaped heads) are displayed on the right side.

FIG. 36(a) shows a screen at the timing when all reels stop during the execution of the battle performance (receiving a command to stop all reels), and the performance proceeds after this timing to announce the result. FIG. 36(b) shows a screen at the timing of time t0 in FIG. 36, which indicates the timing when the payout process is started. One game medal is paid out, and the total number of game medals is increased by one from 230 to 231, and the display of "GET 12 medals" moves from the right side of the screen toward the center so that it can be specified that 12 game medals will be paid out as an acquisition display performance. In the center of the screen, a competition between the ally character and the enemy character has started. FIG. 36(c) shows a timing when three game medals have been paid out, and the display of "GET 12 medals" is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen so that it can be specified that 12 game medals will be paid out as an acquisition display performance. The competition between the ally character and the enemy character continues.

36(d) shows the timing when eight game medals have been paid out, and the large "12 medals GET" display in the center of the screen is moving toward the left side of the screen toward the end of the acquisition display effect. ... Figure (h) shows the timing after the branching point in the effect, and shows the process of displaying an image indicating failure. The enemy character is enlarged in the image of the friendly character competing with the enemy character, making it clear that this will result in failure. Figure (i) shows the timing of time t16 in Figure 36, when the battle effect ends. "Failure" is displayed in the bottom right of the screen, making it clear that the effect indicated failure. The image displayed in Figure (i) has ended as an effect, but will continue to be displayed until the start of the next game.

<Display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs)> Figure 40 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper empty error occurs). From (a) to (i) in the same figure, the flow of the acquisition display effect, the accumulation display effect, and the result notification effect is the same as in Figure 39. However, since no game medals are paid out after the payout process begins, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and is not updated. Figure 40 (j) is the timing of time t17 in Figure 37, when no game medals are detected for 3.5 seconds after the payout process begins, so the hopper empty error is set in the main control means and the error screen indicating the hopper empty error is displayed in the sub control means. The same image is displayed whether an image indicating success or failure is displayed before the hopper empty error occurs.

<Display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs)> Figure 41 shows an example of a display screen when payout is not performed normally (when a hopper retention error occurs). From (a) to (c) of the same figure, the flow of the acquisition display effect, the accumulation display effect, and the result notification effect is the same as in Figure 39. However, since the payout of the game medals has not been performed after the payout process has started, the total number of game medals in the upper right corner of the screen remains at 230 and has not been updated. (k) of the same figure is the timing of time t18 in Figure 38, when a hopper retention error is set in the main control means and a screen indicating the hopper retention error is displayed in the sub-control means. If the payout sensor of the hopper 44 continues to detect for 201 ms or more after the payout process has started, the main control means determines that the game medals are jammed and sets a hopper retention error. When the main control means sets a hopper retention error, it sends a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error to the sub-control means. When the sub-control means receives a command indicating the occurrence of a hopper retention error, it displays a screen indicating the hopper retention error on the display device 32.

<Changes in mode> The period during which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are performed is set to a shorter period (1 second) than the period (1.5 seconds) required when the payout process is performed normally, but it may be set to a longer period. Specifically, it may be set to a period longer than 1.5 seconds and shorter than the period required to detect a hopper empty error (3.5 seconds). By setting the period longer than the period required when the payout process is performed, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect can be more easily seen by the player. In addition, the period required when the payout process is performed normally is set to 1.5 seconds, but the required time may be different depending on the number of coins in the payout process and whether the payout process is only the addition of credits or includes the payout of game medals from the hopper. In addition, although only one of the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect is performed, when the conditions for performing both effects are met, the cumulative display effect may be performed after the acquisition display effect. The winning display effect ends one second after the payout process begins, and the cumulative display effect is executed for one second thereafter, so that the player can recognize the contents of the cumulative display effect even if a hopper empty error occurs. In addition, the winning display effect is executed when a push order role is won during AT, and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct symbol combination stops and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is made, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order-independent role (a so-called shared bell) that results in an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) regardless of the push order is won, and the symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order-independent role stops.

The acquisition display effect may have multiple types of modes when a favorable payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed. Specifically, the color and font when "GET 12 coins" is displayed may be different depending on the state. More specifically, the color and font may be different depending on whether the state is favorable for winning the AT addition, or the color and font may be different during the premonition of the occurrence of a continuous effect or during the premonition of the transition to the addition specialization zone. By varying the mode of the acquisition display effect, the player can be informed that he or she will acquire game medals, and can be made to expect that a favorable situation may occur in the next game or later. In addition, the color and font when "GET 12 coins" is displayed may be different depending on the setting value set in the gaming machine. Information for estimating the setting value set in the gaming machine can be provided each time the acquisition display effect is executed. In addition, the cumulative display effect may have a mode that can be displayed only when a specific setting value is set, other than for each specified number. Specifically, when the set value is set to "2," "4," or "6," if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 246 for the first time, "GET 246" is displayed. This may be displayed whenever the number exceeds 246, or it may be displayed only if a lottery is held and a winner is drawn. By suggesting the setting with the content displayed in the cumulative display effect, not only can the player be notified of the cumulative number, but information for guessing the setting value set in the gaming machine can also be provided. Only when the set value is set to "6," "GET 666" may be displayed if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds 666 for the first time. In addition, multiple display modes with different colors, fonts, etc. may be provided for each specified number, and the setting value set in the gaming machine or the state may be suggested depending on the displayed display mode.

The acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect can be executed during the AT, and even if the cumulative number of game medals exceeds a specified number only while the result screen is displayed, the acquisition display effect is executed without executing the cumulative display effect, but other situations in which the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect are not executed may be provided. Specifically, in a situation called a pseudo bonus, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. Also, in a situation during a pseudo bonus executed during the AT, the acquisition display effect may not be executed, and only the cumulative display effect may be executed. Also, in a situation such as a preparation period before starting the AT, an AT start screen, a consecutive effect executed during the AT, or a premonition of a consecutive effect, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. In an ending state that can be executed before the end of the advantageous zone, the acquisition display effect and the cumulative display effect may not be executed. By providing cases where they are executed and cases where they are not executed depending on the game state managed by the main control means and the state of the effect managed by the sub-control means, the necessary information can be appropriately notified to the player.

Whether to execute the cumulative display effect was determined based on the cumulative number of game medals acquired by the player during the AT and the number of game medals paid out by the payout process, but it may be determined using the value of the MY counter. Specifically, the main control means transmits a command indicating the value of the MY counter to the sub-control means after the game end check and when the lever is operated. The value of the MY counter after the game end check indicates the value after the payout process, and the value of the MY counter when the lever is operated indicates the value after the bet amount is subtracted. The number of game medals included in the payout start command is added to the value of the MY counter when the payout start command is received as a result of the game, and it is determined whether the total value exceeds the specified number. If a value based on the MY counter value is displayed as the cumulative number during the AT, the player can grasp the number of game medals that can be acquired before the advantageous zone ends. The result notification effect is a battle effect executed in the final game of the consecutive effects, but it may be an effect executed in one game instead of in the consecutive effects. In addition, the effects are not limited to battles in which friendly characters compete against enemy characters, but may be other effects that associate the results of the effects with results that are advantageous to the player, such as whether or not the player wins first place in a lottery or wins in a maze.

Although the result notification effect is described as displaying the result after the effect branch timing as time elapses after all reels have stopped, the result may be displayed by operating the effect button. Specifically, at the effect branch timing (timing of time t15), an image of a switch simulating an effect switch (also called an operation prompt image or operation prompt effect) is displayed, and an image indicating success or failure is displayed by the player operating the effect switch. By displaying the operation prompt image at the effect branch timing, even in a situation where a hopper empty error occurs and an error screen is displayed, it is possible to recognize that the operation prompt image is displayed before the error screen is displayed. In addition, after all reels have stopped (after all reels have stopped), a PUSH button effect may be executed to notify the stage change of the effect or the number of added games remaining in the AT. Specifically, after all reels have stopped and before time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs, an image of a switch simulating an effect switch is displayed, and the player operates the switch to change the stage of the effect or to notify the number of added games. It is possible to recognize that an image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed (a push button performance is executed) before a hopper empty error occurs (an error screen is displayed). Also, before the image of a switch simulating a performance switch is displayed, an image of the switch simulating a performance switch may be displayed or teased, and it is possible to recognize that, as a result of teasing, an image of the switch simulating a performance switch will be displayed before the error screen is displayed.

In addition to the result announcement effect and the PUSH button effect, a comment effect, etc., may be executed when the stop switch of the last reel is operated or when all reels are stopped. By executing these effects before the time t17 before the hopper empty error occurs (for example, the timing of time t15 or the timing of time t1), the content of the effect can be recognized before the hopper empty error occurs. In addition, the effect is executed when the push order role is won, and the correct symbol combination is stopped as a result of the correct push order operation, and an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) is performed, but it may also be executed when a role other than the push order role is won. Specifically, it may be executed when a push order non-issue role (so-called shared bell), which executes an advantageous payout (12 coins paid out) regardless of the push order, is won, and a symbol combination (correct symbol combination) corresponding to the push order non-issue role is stopped. In addition, the length of the time and period described in the above embodiment is an example, and can be changed as needed.

Next, various settings for executing timer interrupt processing will be explained. In the initial settings for the operation of the gaming machine in Figure 5, the interrupt mode is set. Setting the interrupt mode means making various settings (settings of the main control built-in registers) to enable timer interrupt processing. First, the main main control built-in registers for enabling timer interrupt processing will be explained.

<PTC Prescaler Setting Register> The PTC prescaler setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip. By setting a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is possible to set the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC, which will be described later. Specifically, it is possible to set the "number" of divisions of the system clock (SCK) to be supplied to the 8-bit counter PTC. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz, and "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register, 16 MHz/143 = approximately 111.8881 KHZ will be the clock source for the 8-bit counter PTC. The initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "250".

<PTC counter setting register> The PTC counter setting register is one of the main control built-in registers, and is a register that controls the operation settings of the timer circuit of the main control chip. By setting a value in the PTC counter setting register, the count value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set how many times the clock number from the PTC prescaler setting register is input to execute the timer interrupt process. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz, and "143" is set in the PTC prescaler setting register and "125" is set in the PTC counter setting register, when a clock of about 111.8881 KHz (a clock with one period of about 8.9375 μs) is input 125 times (when the 8-bit counter PTC times out), an interrupt flag is set, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register described later. When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the interrupt wait monitor register can output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU, and when the interrupt is permitted (when the IFF1 register described later is "1"), a timer interrupt can be executed. In other words, if the system clock is 16 MHz, the PTC prescaler setting register is set to "143" and the PTC counter setting register is set to "125", timer interrupt processing can be executed at a period of 1/16 MHz x 143 x 125 = approximately 1.117 ms (milliseconds). After a value is set in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC starts to be updated (for example, subtracted by 1) based on the clock from the PTC prescaler setting register. The initial value of the 8-bit counter PTC (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0".

<Interrupt waiting monitor register> The interrupt waiting monitor register is one of the main control built-in registers. The interrupt waiting monitor register is a 1-byte (8-bit) storage area, and when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and receives an interrupt request signal output from the timer circuit of the main control chip, a specified bit (for example, the first bit) of the interrupt waiting monitor register becomes "1". In this way, when the specified bit of the interrupt waiting monitor register becomes "1", it is referred to as storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred in the interrupt waiting monitor register, and when the specified bit of the interrupt waiting monitor register becomes "0", it is referred to as clearing the information stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred.

When the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, it becomes possible to output an interrupt request notification signal to the CPU. In other words, when the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, the interrupt request notification signal can be output to the CPU, and when the interrupt is permitted (when the IFF1 register described below is "1"), a timer interrupt can be executed. Then, when timer interrupt processing is executed in response to the interrupt request notification signal (this can be before executing the timer interrupt processing, simultaneously with executing the timer interrupt processing, or after executing the timer interrupt processing), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is cleared.

On the other hand, even if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, if the interrupt is disabled (the IFF1 register described later is "0"), an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU, but timer interrupt processing is not executed. In this way, if the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupt was disabled (the IFF1 register described later is "0"), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is retained (not cleared). Also, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, the interrupt request notification signal continues to be output to the CPU. If the timer interrupt processing could not be executed because the interrupts were disabled (the IFF1 register described later is "0"), the interrupts are enabled (the IFF1 register described later is "1"), and when the timer interrupt processing is executed in response to the interrupt request notification signal (this can be immediately before executing the timer interrupt processing, simultaneously with executing the timer interrupt processing, or immediately after executing the timer interrupt processing), the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is cleared. Note that the initial value of the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0" (the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred).

Next, we will explain the interrupt register that manages the interrupt disabled and enabled states.

<Interrupt register> The interrupt register is a register that the main control chip (e.g. the main control CPU) has. The interrupt register manages the interrupt-related states (also called interrupt states), that is, the "interrupt disabled state (also called interrupt disabled section or interrupt disabled period)" and the "interrupt enabled state (also called interrupt enabled section or interrupt enabled period)". Specifically, the interrupt registers are the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register, and the value of the IFF1 register is used to manage the interrupt disabled state and interrupt enabled state. Therefore, a description of the IFF2 register will be omitted. Also, unless otherwise specified, the interrupt register refers to the IFF1 register.

When the IFF1 register is "0", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and timer interrupt processing can be executed when an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU. When the IFF1 register is "1", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register, and timer interrupt processing is not executed even if an interrupt request notification signal is output to the CPU. In other words, an interrupt disabled state means that the IFF1 register is "0", and an interrupt enabled state means that the IFF1 register is "1".

The IFF1 register becomes "0" when an instruction that prohibits interrupts (for example, the "DI" instruction) is executed. The IFF1 register becomes "1" when an instruction that permits interrupts (for example, the "EI" instruction) is executed. The IFF1 register becomes "0" when a timer interrupt process is executed (this may be immediately before the timer interrupt process is executed, simultaneously with the timer interrupt process, or immediately after the timer interrupt process is executed). In other words, the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main process refers to the state from the execution of an instruction that prohibits interrupts to the execution of an instruction that permits interrupts, and the interrupt prohibition state associated with the execution of timer interrupt process refers to the state from the execution of timer interrupt process to the execution of an instruction that permits interrupts. The initial value of the IFF1 register (the value when the power is turned on from off) is "0". Therefore, the state from the time the power is turned on to the execution of an instruction that permits interrupts can also be said to be an interrupt prohibition state. On the other hand, the interrupt permit state refers to a state that is not an interrupt prohibition state.

Now, let us return to the explanation of setting the interrupt mode in the initial settings for the operation of the gaming machine in Figure 5. When setting the interrupt mode, a value is stored (set) in the PTC prescaler setting register. For example, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. Next, a value is stored (set) in the PTC counter setting register. For example, "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

In this way, when the interrupt mode is set, after "125" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated cyclically from "125" to "1", as follows: "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → .... Note that after the interrupt mode is set in the initial settings for the operation of the gaming machine in FIG. 5, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is configured to continue to be updated even when other programs (processes/instructions) are being executed. Also, the timing at which the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "125" is referred to as the value of the 8-bit counter PTC having timed out.

After the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to allow interrupts has been issued. Here, the command to allow interrupts is preferably issued after the RAM check process has determined whether the checksums of all RAM are normal (after the power-off recovery data is normal or recoverable in Figure 5). For example, the command to allow interrupts could be executed by "Start interrupt process" in Figure 8, or by "Light up the saved setting value display data on the setting value display LED" in Figure 10.

In this way, when the 8-bit counter is configured to start updating before the RAM check process (determining whether the RAM before the power was turned off is the same as the RAM after the power is restored), the 8-bit counter can be timed out earlier (information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register) than when the 8-bit counter is updated after the RAM check process, so that the timer interrupt process can be executed without delay when a command is issued to allow an interrupt to be executed after a RAM abnormality is determined.

In this embodiment, "143" is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register when the interrupt mode is set, but the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register does not have to be executed. Specifically, it is also possible to set the interrupt period by utilizing the fact that the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250" (the initial value is not "0").

For example, if the system clock is configured to be 16 MHz, the initial value of the PTC prescaler setting register is "250", so the timer interrupt processing period can be appropriately determined by storing any value in the PTC counter setting register. Below are examples of timer interrupt processing periods according to the values stored in the PTC counter setting register. a) When "0" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 4 ms (milliseconds). b) When "128" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 2 ms (milliseconds). c) When "64" is stored in the PTC counter setting register, the timer interrupt processing period can be set to 1 ms (milliseconds).

In this way, even if the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register is not performed, the update of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be started by executing the process of storing a value in the PTC counter setting register. In other words, if it is desired to store a value different from the initial value in the PTC prescaler setting register, it is preferable to store the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register. For example, if a value different from the initial value is stored in the PTC prescaler setting register after storing a value in the PTC counter setting register, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is first updated based on the frequency corresponding to the initial value (250) of the PTC prescaler setting register, and then, if a value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register is stored, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated based on the frequency corresponding to the value different from the initial value stored in the PTC prescaler setting register. In such a case, the update period of the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is not constant, which leads to a failure of the main control chip. Therefore, when executing the process of storing a value in the PTC prescaler setting register, the failure of the main control chip can be suppressed by storing the value in the PTC prescaler setting register before the process of storing the value in the PTC counter setting register.

Next, using Figure 42, the relationship between the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled state, and the IFF1 register will be explained using a simple program example. (A) in Figure 42 shows a program for the main game progress processing. The "DI" command is an command for disabling maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing) (called an interrupt disabled command). The "EI" command is an command for enabling maskable interrupt processing (e.g., timer interrupt processing) (called an interrupt enabled command). Additionally, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary commands (programs).

In FIG. 42(A), when the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0", and interrupts are disabled. When the "AAAA", "BBBB", "..." instructions are executed thereafter, the IFF1 register remains at "0". When the "EI" instruction is then executed, the IFF1 register becomes "1", and interrupts are enabled. In other words, interrupts are disabled during the period from the "DI" instruction to the "EI" instruction.

However, the timer interrupt process is not executed immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "CCCC" instruction, which is the instruction one step ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, the timer interrupt process is executed after the "CCCC" instruction is executed. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the "DI" instruction and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred (if the interrupt process is not started immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter continues to be updated. With this configuration, even if the instruction "EI" that allows interrupts is executed, the interrupt process is not executed until the next instruction (in this example, "CCCC") is executed, so that the instruction after the instruction "EI" that allows interrupts can be executed reliably. Specifically, a return instruction such as "RET" (an instruction to execute a program at a return address) may be used as the instruction following the "EI" instruction that allows interrupts. Even if there is an instruction that allows interrupts, the timer interrupt process is not executed until the next instruction is executed, so that the instruction following the "EI" instruction that allows interrupts can be executed reliably.

Examples of commands to prohibit interrupts and commands to permit interrupts in the main game progress processing include: a) when sending a command from the main control means to the sub-control means, a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing the command to the RAM's memory area, etc., before executing a command to permit interrupts; b) when turning the blocker ON (medal acceptance permitted state), a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing information for turning the blocker ON to the RAM's memory area and a process of writing information for turning on the medal insertion permitted lamp to the RAM's memory area, etc., before executing a command to permit interrupts; c) when turning the blocker OFF (medal acceptance refusal state), a command to prohibit interrupts is issued, followed by a process of writing information for turning the blocker OFF to the RAM's memory area and a process of writing information for turning off the medal insertion permitted lamp to the RAM's memory area, etc., before executing a command to permit interrupts. In addition, when providing commands to prohibit interrupts and commands to permit interrupts, the commands are not limited to the above-mentioned A) to C), and commands to prohibit interrupts and commands to permit interrupts may be provided as appropriate.

Such an interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is provided, for example, to prevent the execution of a timer interrupt process from changing RAM data or from executing a process involving a malfunction based on RAM data while a process consisting of multiple instructions (instruction A, instruction B, ..., instruction Z) is being executed. Note that the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is set to the interrupt prohibited state by an instruction that prohibits interrupts (for example, a DI instruction) and set to the interrupt permitted state by an instruction that permits interrupts (for example, an EI instruction), but interrupts may be prohibited by an instruction other than the above DI instruction, and interrupts may be permitted by an instruction other than the above EI instruction.

Figure 42 (B) shows a program for interrupt processing. As with Figure 42 (A), the "EI" instruction is an instruction (called an instruction to permit interrupts) for permitting maskable interrupt processing (for example, timer interrupt processing), and "AAAA", "BBBB", "CCCC", "..." are arbitrary instructions (programs). The "RETI" instruction is an instruction (return instruction) for terminating timer interrupt processing, and corresponds, for example, to "RETURN" in Figure 7.

When executing a timer interrupt process (when executing can be before ('before' includes 'immediately before'), at the same time as, or after ('after' includes 'immediately after')), the IFF1 register becomes '0'. This makes it possible to prevent the next timer interrupt process from being executed during the timer interrupt process. Note that the 'DI' command is not required when starting the timer interrupt process. Also, when terminating the timer interrupt process, in order to change from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state, the 'EI' command is executed immediately before the interrupt process, i.e., immediately before the 'RETI' command. This 'EI' command sets the IFF1 register to '1'. Note that the 'EI' command corresponds to the 'save interrupt enable flag ON' in Figure 7. The 'RETI' command following the 'EI' command also sets the IFF1 register to '1'. In other words, the period from the start of the timer interrupt process to the 'EI' command is interrupt disabled.

However, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable not immediately after the "EI" instruction is executed, but after the "RETI" instruction, which is the instruction one step ahead of the "EI" instruction, is executed. For example, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the start of the timer interrupt process and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable after the "RETI" instruction is executed. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out at a predetermined timing between the start of the timer interrupt process and the "EI" instruction, and the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated (if the interrupt process is not started immediately), the counter value of the 8-bit counter continues to be updated. In this way, if the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" command, the timer interrupt process can be executed, and if the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" command, the game progress main process can be executed. Therefore, even if the "EI" command that permits an interrupt is executed, the interrupt process is not executed until the next command "RETI" is executed, thereby preventing the next timer interrupt process from being executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, using (1) in Figure 43, we will explain the relationship between the timer interrupt processing and the 8-bit counter PTC when there is no interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing. When "m (m is a numerical value)" is stored as a value in the PTC counter setting register, "m" is stored in the 8-bit counter PTC, and then, when an update period arrives, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is updated by 1, such as "m-1", ..., "2", "1", "m", "m-1", "m-2", ... In this way, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC cycles between "m" and "1".

At the timing of t1, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC changes from "1" to "m". In other words, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (or does), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. After that, based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), timer interrupt processing can be executed. This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing can be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts are disabled).

At timing t2, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled state) to "1" (interrupt enabled state) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts in the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends by the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

The value of the 8-bit counter PTC is also configured to be updated when the update period of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives, even while the timer interrupt process is being executed. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated regardless of the time required for the timer interrupt process, so that the timer interrupt process can be executed at a constant cycle.

Next, using (2) in Figure 43, we will explain the relationship between the timer interrupt processing and the 8-bit counter PTC when an interrupt is prohibited in the game progress main processing.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Also, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out when the interrupt is prohibited, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At the timing of t3, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt prohibited state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state). At the timing of t3, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, so after one instruction in the game progress main processing is executed based on the instruction to permit an interrupt in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing can be executed. When the timer interrupt processing is executed (when it is executed, it can be either before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t4, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

As in FIG. 43 (1), the value of the 8-bit counter PTC is configured to be updated when the update period of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives, even while the timer interrupt process is being executed. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated regardless of the time required for the timer interrupt process, so that the timer interrupt process can be executed at a constant cycle.

The value of the 8-bit counter PTC is also configured to be updated when the update period of the 8-bit counter PTC arrives, even if the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-prohibited state. By configuring it in this way, the 8-bit counter PTC is updated even if the game progress main processing is in an interrupt-prohibited state, so that the timer interrupt processing can be executed at a fixed cycle.

Next, using the <Example (1) showing the execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in Figure 44, we will explain the interrupt period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out while interrupts are prohibited in the game progress main processing. Note that the normal period of the timer interrupt processing (the period from when the 8-bit counter PTC times out to the next time the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T". Note that measurement of "T" (updating the 8-bit counter PTC) begins after a value is stored in the PTC counter setting register.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Also, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out when the interrupt is prohibited, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At the timing of t3, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt prohibited state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state). At the timing of t3, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, so after one instruction in the game progress main processing is executed based on the instruction to permit an interrupt in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing can be executed. When the timer interrupt processing is executed (when it is executed, it can be either before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register is cleared. As described above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t4, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

When the 8-bit counter PTC times out at timing t5, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. After that, based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), timer interrupt processing can be executed. This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing can be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts are disabled).

At timing t6, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

When the 8-bit counter PTC times out at timing t7, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. After that, based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), timer interrupt processing can be executed. This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing can be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), simultaneously with execution, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts are disabled).

At timing t8, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

Here, the period from timing t2 to timing t5 is T. Similarly, the period from timing t5 to timing t7 is T. For example, when timing t2 is "n×T (where "n" is a natural number)," timing t5 can be expressed as "(n+1)×T." Furthermore, timing t7 can be expressed as "(n+2)×T." Furthermore, timing t3 can be expressed as "a specific timing that is after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T."

First, let us look at the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing t3. The timer interrupt processing executed at the timing t3 should have been executed at t2, which is the execution period of the timer interrupt processing. In other words, if the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing was not in effect at the timing t2, the timer interrupt processing would have been executed at the timing t2. In other words, because the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing was in effect at the timing t2, the timer interrupt processing was executed at the timing t3 when the interrupt permission state was established.

Next, let us focus on the timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5. The timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5 is executed before "T" has elapsed since the timing of t3. In other words, the measurement of "T", which is the interrupt period, has not started from the timing of t3. The timer interrupt processing executed at the timing of t5 is configured to be executed when T has elapsed since the timing of t2. In other words, it is configured to be executed based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC, which continues to update the count even when the timer interrupt processing is not executed, has timed out (based on the fact that information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). In this way, when the timing of t2 is "n×T", the timing of t3 is "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T"", and the timing of t4 is "(n+1)×T", information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t5. In other words, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable at timing t5.

Similarly, the timer interrupt process executed at the timing of t7 is also configured to be executed based on the 8-bit counter PTC timing out (based on the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register). In this way, when the timing of t2 is "n×T", the timing of t3 is "a specific timing after "n×T" and before "(n+1)×T", the timing of t4 is "(n+1)×T", and the timing of t7 is "(n+2)×T", the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register at the timing of t7. In other words, the timer interrupt process is configured to be executable at the timing of t7.

As described above, even if timer interrupt processing cannot be executed at the original timer interrupt processing period (n x T) due to the interrupt prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing after this timer interrupt processing can be returned to a state in which the timer interrupt processing can be executed when the original timer interrupt processing period arrives (x x T (where "x" is a natural number)). This makes it possible, for example, to reduce the impact on timer measurement executed within the timer interrupt processing (longer timer measurement timing).

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing when the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times when the IFF1 register is 0, using <Example (2) showing the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing> in Figure 44.

<Example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> shows a case where the main game progress processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time while interrupts are prohibited in the main game progress processing. Even in such a case, if the system clock is normal, the value of the 8-bit counter PTC can be updated at normal intervals.

At timing t1, a command to disable interrupts is issued in the game progress main process, and the IFF1 register changes from "1" (interrupts allowed) to "0" (interrupts disabled).

At timing t2, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. However, because the game progress main processing is in an interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt processing cannot be executed. Therefore, the interrupt wait monitor register continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Also, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out when the interrupt is prohibited, the 8-bit counter continues to update thereafter.

At timing t3, the 8-bit counter PTC times out again. However, because the interrupt wait monitor register still stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, the interrupt wait monitor register does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred again. The 8-bit counter continues to update after that.

At the timing of t4, an instruction to permit an interrupt is issued in the game progress main processing, and the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt prohibited state) to "1" (interrupt permitted state). At the timing of t4, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register, so after one instruction in the game progress main processing is executed based on the instruction to permit an interrupt in the game progress main processing, the timer interrupt processing can be executed. When the timer interrupt processing is executed (when it is executed, it can be either before execution ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as execution, or after execution ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt waiting monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register becomes "0" (interrupt prohibited state).

At timing t5, the timer interrupt process ends and the timer interrupt process is terminated. Specifically, the execution of an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process changes the IFF1 register from "0" (interrupts disabled) to "1" (interrupts enabled), and the timer interrupt process is terminated by the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

At the timing of t6, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out (or does time out), information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. After that, based on the fact that the 8-bit counter PTC has timed out (based on the fact that the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register), timer interrupt processing can be executed. This is because the IFF1 register is "1". When executing timer interrupt processing (when executing can be before ("before" includes "immediately before"), at the same time as executing, or after ("after" includes "immediately after")), the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred stored in the interrupt wait monitor register is cleared. As mentioned above, while the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the IFF1 register is "0" (interrupts are disabled).

At timing t7, the timer interrupt process ends. Specifically, the IFF1 register changes from "0" (interrupt disabled) to "1" (interrupt enabled) by executing an instruction to enable interrupts within the timer interrupt process, and the timer interrupt process ends with the next instruction, the return instruction (RETI instruction).

In this way, even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice (multiple times) between the timings of t1 and t4, the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred once. Note that in FIG. 44, an example is given in which the 8-bit counter PTC times out twice during an interrupt disabled state, but even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out three or four times during an interrupt disabled state, the interrupt wait monitor register stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred once. After the interrupt disabled state ends, the timer interrupt process is executed once based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register. Note that even if the 8-bit counter PTC times out multiple times during an interrupt disabled state, the number of times it has timed out is not counted.

As described above, if the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" times (where "n" is 2 or more) during an interrupt prohibited state, the timer interrupt process is configured not to be executed "n" times consecutively (repeatedly) after the state changes from the interrupt prohibited state to the interrupt permitted state. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt process from being repeated multiple times in succession after the state changes from the interrupt permitted state to the interrupt permitted state, during which time the game progress main process cannot be executed.

Note that in <Example (2) showing execution timing of timer interrupt processing> in Figure 44, a case is shown in which the game progress main processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time during an interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing. Similarly, even if the timer interrupt processing goes out of control or takes an unexpected amount of time during an interrupt prohibited state in the timer interrupt processing, and the 8-bit counter PTC times out "n" (where "n" is 2 or more) during an interrupt prohibited state in the timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing is configured not to be executed "n" times consecutively (repeatedly) (to be executed only once) after the interrupt prohibited state changes to an interrupt permitted state.

<Designed processing time of a program> A program is something that is composed of multiple instructions. In this case, the designed processing time from the start of a program to the end of a program can be calculated from the types of instructions from the instruction related to the start of a program (e.g., instruction A) to the instruction related to the end of a program (e.g., instruction Z).

First, the time required to execute one command can be calculated from the number of states required to execute one command and the frequency of the system clock. Specifically, the time required to execute one command can be calculated by 1/system clock frequency x number of states. The number of states can be interpreted as the number of clocks. Below, the time required to execute one command will be explained using specific commands when a 16 MHZ system clock is used. (a) DI Command content: Command to disable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute the command: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds) (b) EI Command content: Command to enable interrupt processing Number of states: 4 states Time required to execute the command: 1/16 MHZ x 4 = 0.25 μS (microseconds) (c) DEC (HL) Command content: Decrement the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register by 1. Number of states: 11 states Time required to execute an instruction: 1/16 MHZ x 11 = 0.6875 μS (microseconds)

In this way, even when the same system clock frequency is used, the time required to execute one instruction may differ depending on the type of instruction. Also, even when the instructions are different, the time required to execute one instruction may be the same. Note that the above instructions are only a part of the multiple instructions, and there are many other instructions besides the above. Note that the frequency of the system clock when executing the game progress main processing is the same as the number of system clocks when executing the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, for example, the time required to execute an "EI" instruction in the game progress main processing is the same as the time required to execute an "EI" instruction in the timer interrupt processing.

In other words, the designed processing time of a program can be calculated from the total number of states of multiple instructions from the start of the program to the end of the program. Specifically, it can be calculated by multiplying 1/system clock frequency by total number of states. In other words, since the system clock frequency is uniform within a single gaming machine, a program with a larger total number of states will have a longer designed processing time than a program with a smaller total number of states.

<Designed processing time of timer interrupt processing> The designed processing time of timer interrupt processing is the time from when timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends (for example, when the RETI command is executed). However, because the commands to be executed differ depending on the information stored in the RWM and the progress of the game, even when timer interrupt processing is executed normally, there is some variation in the processing time of timer interrupt processing. In other words, because the commands executed in timer interrupt processing are not necessarily the same for all timer interrupt processing, the total number of states when one timer interrupt processing is executed differs. Therefore, the designed processing time of timer interrupt processing is the average time from when timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends when timer interrupt processing is executed normally. The designed processing time of timer interrupt processing is sometimes referred to as the time related to timer interrupt processing.

<Maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing> The maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing is the same as the maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing in that it is the time from when timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends. Also, as mentioned above, even when timer interrupt processing is executed normally, there will be some variation in the processing time of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing is the time required to execute the instruction with the greatest total number of states from when a single timer interrupt processing starts to when it ends. Note that the maximum design processing time for timer interrupt processing is sometimes referred to as the maximum time related to timer interrupt processing.

<Designed processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing> In the case where there is only one interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing, the designed processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing is the time from the command to prohibit the interrupt (e.g., DI command) to the command to permit the interrupt (e.g., EI command) (also referred to as the processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing) (excluding the state from when the power is turned on to when the command to permit the interrupt is executed). However, since the command to be executed differs depending on the difference in the information stored in the RAM and the difference in the progress of the game, even if the game progress main processing is executed normally, the total number of states may differ. Therefore, the processing time of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing varies to some extent. In other words, the command to be executed in the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing is not necessarily the same, so the total number of states when the processing of the interruption prohibition state in the game progress main processing is executed differs. Therefore, when the game progress main processing is executed normally, the average processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is set as the design processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

In addition, if there are at least two interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing, the design processing time for each interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the longest design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is regarded as the design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing. Note that the design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is sometimes referred to as the time related to the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Maximum design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing> When there is only one interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing, the time required to execute the command with the greatest total number of states from the start of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing to the end of the interrupt prohibited state is regarded as the maximum design processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

In addition, if there are at least two interrupt prohibited states in the game progress main processing, the design maximum processing time for each interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is calculated, and the longest design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is regarded as the design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited section in the game progress main processing. Note that the design maximum processing time for the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is sometimes also referred to as the maximum time related to the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the design processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing> When the timer interrupt processing period (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the design processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is "S'", it is preferable to configure so that T>S' is satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the timer interrupt period from occurring multiple times while the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is being executed. In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from differing from the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed is reduced) due to the influence of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the maximum design processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing> When the timer interrupt processing period (the period at which the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the design processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is "S", it is preferable to make T > S. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the timer interrupt period from occurring multiple times while the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing is being executed, as compared to the case where T > S' (S' is the design processing time of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing). In other words, it is possible to prevent the number of times the 8-bit counter PTC times out from being different from the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed (the number of times the timer interrupt processing is executed is reduced) due to the influence of the interrupt prohibited state in the game progress main processing.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process> If the period of the timer interrupt process (the period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process is "t'", it is preferable to make T/2 > t'. In other words, it is preferable to configure the designed processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process. By configuring in this way, the timer interrupt process is executed when the period of the timer interrupt process arrives, and then the game progress main process can be executed for a period longer than T/2 until the next period of the timer interrupt process arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main process can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

<Relationship between the timer interrupt period and the maximum design processing time of the timer interrupt process> If the period of the timer interrupt process (the period when the 8-bit counter PTC times out) is "T" and the maximum design processing time of the timer interrupt process is "t", it is preferable to make T/2>t. In other words, it is preferable to configure the maximum design processing time of the timer interrupt process to a period less than half the period of the timer interrupt process. By configuring in this way, compared to a case where T/2>t' (t' is the design processing time of the timer interrupt process), it is possible to execute the timer interrupt process when the period of the timer interrupt process arrives, and then execute the game progress main process for a period longer than T/2 until the next period of the timer interrupt process arrives. In other words, it is possible to prevent the period in which the main process can be executed from becoming too short due to the execution of the timer interrupt process.

<Types of interrupt processing> Next, we will explain the types of interrupt processing. Interrupt processing can be broadly divided into maskable interrupt processing (referred to as INT), which is not executed when an interrupt cause occurs in an interrupt disabled state, and non-maskable interrupt processing (referred to as NMI), which is executed even when an interrupt cause occurs in an interrupt disabled state.

<Non-maskable interrupt processing> When a cause of a non-maskable interrupt occurs, the CPU is notified that a cause of a non-maskable interrupt has occurred. The CPU that has received the notification that a cause of a non-maskable interrupt has occurred suspends all processing, and executes the non-maskable interrupt processing with the highest priority. However, even if a cause of a non-maskable interrupt occurs, it is not executed until the CALLEX instruction used when executing a program in the second program area from a program in the first program area is executed, and then the RETEX instruction used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area is executed. In other words, even if a cause of a non-maskable interrupt occurs during the period when a program in the second program area is being executed by the CALLEX instruction, the non-maskable interrupt processing is not executed, and the non-maskable interrupt processing is executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. The CALLEX instruction is an instruction different from a normal CALL instruction (call instruction) and is used only when a program in the second program area is executed from a program in the first program area, and is not used when a program in the first program area is called from a program in the first program area, or when a program in the second program area is called from a program in the second program area. Therefore, it is also called a special call instruction. The RETEX instruction is an instruction different from a normal RET instruction (return instruction) and is used only when a program in the second program area is executed from a program in the first program area by the CALLEX instruction, and then the program in the second program area is returned to the program in the first program area. Furthermore, unlike the above-mentioned RET instruction and RETI instruction, the RETEX instruction changes from an interrupt disabled state to an interrupt enabled state, and even if a cause of a non-maskable interrupt occurs between the CALLEX instruction and the RETEX instruction, the non-maskable interrupt processing is executed immediately after the RETEX instruction (the next instruction based on the RETEX instruction). For this reason, the RETEX instruction is also called a special return instruction. As an example of non-maskable interrupt processing, a power outage can be treated as the cause of a non-maskable interrupt, and the power outage processing described in FIG. 6 can be treated as non-maskable interrupt processing.

<Maskable interrupt processing> The main control chip used in this embodiment is capable of executing up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. The timer interrupt processing described above is one of the maskable interrupt processing. For example, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt waiting monitor register. Then, based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred, the timer interrupt processing can be executed. As described above, when the interrupt is prohibited, the timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed. In addition, even if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has occurred is stored in a predetermined bit of the interrupt waiting monitor register, the timer interrupt processing (maskable interrupt processing) cannot be executed until the CALLEX instruction used when executing a program in the second program area from the program in the first program area is executed and then the RETEX instruction used when returning from the program in the second program area to the program in the first program area is executed. In other words, even if a maskable interrupt occurs during the execution of a program in the second program area by the CALLEX instruction, the maskable interrupt process is not executed, but is executed after the RETEX instruction is executed. Note that in this embodiment, an example will be described in which one type of maskable interrupt process, timer interrupt process, is used as the maskable interrupt process.

<Interrupt vector address> An interrupt vector address refers to the address (also called the start address) where the first program (instruction) of the maskable interrupt process is stored. In concrete terms, when the 8-bit counter PTC times out and executes the timer interrupt process, the address indicated by the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is first obtained, and then the timer interrupt process can be executed by jumping to the obtained address. For example, if the interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt process are addresses 0004h and 0005h (addresses determined by 2 bytes) and the address where the first instruction of the timer interrupt process is stored (also called the start address of the program of the timer interrupt process) is address 0050h, then addresses 0004h and 0005h store 0050h, which is the address where the first instruction of the timer interrupt process is stored (actually, 50h is stored at address 0004h and 00h is stored at address 0005h). Then, when executing the timer interrupt process, a jump is first made to address 0050h, determined by addresses 0004h and 0005h, and the instruction at address 0050h (the first instruction of the timer interrupt process) can be executed.

The interrupt vector address is determined based on the value of the I register and a value set in a program management area (also called a program management region) mounted on the main control board 100. Specifically, the value of the upper byte of the interrupt vector address is determined by the value of the I register, and the value of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address is determined based on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area. For example, if the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is 0004h, the upper byte 00h is determined by the value of the I register, and the lower byte 04h is determined by the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area.

<I register> The I register is one of the registers that the CPU has, and is also called the "interrupt page address register." The I register can store one byte of data and can set the upper 1 byte of the interrupt vector address. The value of the I register can be freely set by executing an instruction to set it to a specific value. For example, the value of the I register can be set to 10h by executing an instruction to set the value of the I register to 10h (LD I, 10h). When the value of the I register is 10h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 10h, so if the lower address of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is 04h according to the value set in the interrupt initial setting area of the program management area, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process will be 1004h. The initial value of the I register is 00h. In other words, if the power is turned off under the condition that the value of the I register is 10h, and then the power is turned on, the value of the I register will be 00h. In addition, if the power is turned off while the value of the I register is 00h, and then the power is turned on, the value of the I register remains at 00h. In this embodiment, no instruction is executed to set the value of the I register to a value other than 00h (the value of the I register is not changed from 00h by the program in the first control area and the program in the second control area). In other words, in this embodiment, the initial value of 00h is used as the value of the I register. Therefore, compared to executing an instruction to set the value of the I register to a value other than 00h, the program capacity can be reduced. Also, since the value of the I register is 00h, the upper address of the interrupt vector address is 00h. In other words, as shown in FIG. 71, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process can be set in the control area of the usage area (the first control area described above).

<Each area of the main control ROM> Figure 71 is a diagram showing each area stored in the main control ROM in this embodiment. First, addresses 0000h to 11FEh are the control area. This control area is the control area of the use area (the first control area described above), and various instructions are stored in the control area. In addition, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is determined in the control area. However, as described above, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is an address, not a program. Therefore, when the main control chip is running normally, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is not executed as an instruction. Address 11FF is an unused area. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. Addresses 1200h to 1DF6h are the data area. This data area is the data area of the use area (the first data area described above), and the lottery table and the like used (referenced) by the program (instruction) of the first control area are stored in the data area. Addresses 1DF7h to 1FFFh are an unused area. 0 (00000000b) is stored in the unused area. Addresses 2000h to 245Dh are a control area outside the used area (the second control area described above). Various instructions are stored in the control area outside the used area. Unlike the control area, the control area outside the used area does not have an interrupt vector address defined for timer interrupt processing. Addresses 245Eh to 2526h are a data area. This data area is a data area outside the used area (the second data area described above), and the data area stores tables and the like that are used (referenced) by the programs (instructions) in the second control area. Addresses 3FC0h to 3FFFh are a program management area.

<Program management area> The program management area includes the area where driving outside the designated area is prohibited, which is an area that specifies areas that are not determined to be program runaways, and the interrupt initial setting area, which is an area that specifies the lower addresses of the vector address. The program management area is sometimes called the program management area.

After the power is turned on and before the first program (program at address 0000h) starts (before user mode starts (specifically, during security mode)), various settings of the main control chip can be made based on the values (information) stored in each area of the program management area. In other words, after the settings of the area specifying the prohibited area outside driving and the interrupt initial setting area are completed, the first program (program at address 0000h) is executed. Note that security mode involves security checks of the control area and data area of the main control ROM, inspection of the program management area, settings based on the program management area, etc. After that, if it is determined that there is no abnormality in security mode, it transitions to user mode. In other words, it executes programs sequentially starting from the program (command) at address 0000h of the control area. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in security mode (for example, if the value set in the program management area is abnormal), it does not transition to user mode. In other words, it stops without executing the program (command) at address 0000h of the control area (the main control chip stops control).

<Designated area outside driving prohibition setting area> The designated area outside driving prohibition setting areas include the program code end address 1 setting area, the program code start address 2 setting area, and the program code end address 2 setting area. For example, the program code end address 1 setting area is made up of a two-byte area at addresses 3F03h and 3F04h, the program code start address 2 setting area is made up of a two-byte area at addresses 3F05h and 3F06h, and the program code end address 2 setting area is made up of a two-byte area at addresses 3F07h and 3F08h.

In this embodiment, the control area is from address 0000h to 11FEh, and the control area outside the use area is from address 2000h to 245Dh. Therefore, the program code end address 1 setting area is set to 11FEh, which is the last address of the control area. The program code start address 2 setting area is also set to 2000h, which is the first address of the control area outside the use area. The program code end address 2 setting area is also set to 245Dh, which is the last address of the control area outside the use area. Note that the first address of the control area, 0000h, is not set. Even if the first address of the control area, 0000h, is not set, the program code start address 1 for the program code end address 1 will be 0000h. With the above settings, it is possible to prevent a reset from occurring when executing (fetching instructions from) addresses 0000h to 11FEh. In addition, when executing (fetching instructions) programs from address 2000h to address 245Dh, a reset can be prevented from occurring. On the other hand, when the CPU attempts to execute (fetch instructions) a program outside the area set in the designated outside driving prohibition setting area, a reset can be caused. For example, when attempting to execute (fetch instructions) a program at address 11FFh (unused area) in this embodiment, a reset occurs. When a reset occurs, the power remains on, the registers are initialized, and the process starts from before the user mode starts (specifically, the security mode), and various settings of the main control chip are performed based on the values (information) stored in each area of the program management area. After executing the security mode, if no abnormality is determined in the security mode, the programs can be executed sequentially from the first program (program (instruction) at address 0000h). In this way, the control area can be made into an area (designated area) that is not subject to resetting simply by setting the last address, and the control area outside the use area can be made into an area (designated area) that is not subject to resetting by setting the first address and the last address. In other words, instead of setting four addresses, you can set two areas (designated areas) that are not reset by setting only three addresses. By configuring it in this way, you can reduce the storage area of the program management area.

<Interrupt initial setting area> The interrupt initial setting area is an area where the lower address of the interrupt vector address is set. In other words, it is an area where part of the interrupt vector address is set. Specifically, the interrupt initial setting area is composed of a 1-byte area at address 3FDAh. Figure 72 will be used to explain the details of the interrupt initial setting address.

(A) of FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the interrupt initial setting area. The interrupt initial setting area is composed of a 1-byte storage area from bit D0 to bit D7. The two bits, bit D0 and bit D1, are used to set the interrupt priority. Details of the interrupt priority will be described later, but in this embodiment, bit D1 is set to 0 and bit D0 is set to 1 (01b is set). By setting 01b as the interrupt priority, the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are automatically assigned to a value corresponding to 01b (details will be described later). In other words, by simply setting the value of two bits, the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address can be set. Note that in this embodiment, 01b is set as the interrupt priority, but any value such as 00b, 10b, 11b can be set, and the lower 4 bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address can be set based on the value of the two bits. Fixed values are set for bit D2 and bit D3. In this embodiment, fixed values are set for bit D2 to 0 and bit D3 to 0 (00b is set). In addition, if 00b is not set as the fixed value, or if a value other than 00b is set due to noise or the like, the power is turned on and the security mode before the user mode is determined to be abnormal, and the user mode is not started. If the predetermined fixed value is not set in this way, there is a high possibility that the ROM is abnormal, so by not starting the user mode (not executing the program start process in an abnormal state), it is possible to prevent disadvantages to the gaming facility and the player. The four bits from D4 to D7 are used to set the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address. In this embodiment, the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b. In this embodiment, the upper four bits of the lower address of the interrupt vector address are set to 0000b (0h), but this is not limited to this, and can be set to any value, such as 1000h (8h) or 1111b (Fh).

(B) of Fig. 72 is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priority and automatic allocation. As described above, the main control chip used in this embodiment is capable of executing up to six types of maskable interrupt processing. Specifically, it is possible to execute six types of maskable interrupt processing: "PTC0" to "PTC2", "RX0" to "RX1", and "XINT".
In the case of a gaming machine capable of executing a plurality (at least two) of these maskable interrupt processes, when interrupt factors occur at the same time, the interrupt priority determines which maskable interrupt process is to be prioritized. As the interrupt priority, "priority A" is the highest interrupt priority, and the interrupt priority decreases from "priority A" in order. In other words, "priority F" is the lowest interrupt priority. Note that "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt factors used in timer interrupt processes, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to the timer interrupt process in this embodiment. Also, the interrupt priority levels "00b", "01b", "10b", and "11b" correspond to the values (interrupt priority levels) set in the D0 and D1 bits shown in FIG. 72 (A).

For example, if 01b is set in the area for setting the interrupt priority level in the interrupt initial setting area, as shown in Figure 72 (B), a) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC0 will be automatically assigned to 0000b, b) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC1 will be automatically assigned to 0010b, c) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of PTC2 will be automatically assigned to 0100b, d) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of XINT will be automatically assigned to 0110b, e) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX0 will be automatically assigned to 1000b, and f) the lowest 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of RX1 will be automatically assigned to 1010b. In other words, when PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the lower four bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing can be set to 0100b (4h) by automatic allocation of the main control chip. Also, for example, when 10b is set in the area for setting the interrupt priority level in the interrupt initial setting area and PTC2 is used for timer interrupt processing, the lower four bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing can be set to 1000b (8h) by automatic allocation of the main control chip. As described above, the lower four bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing can be set to 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), and 1010b (Ah).

As described above, the value of the upper 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address can be set to any value between 0000b (0h) and 1111b (Fh), and the value of the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the interrupt vector address can be set to 0000b (0h), 0010b (2h), 0100b (4h), 0110b (6h), 1000b (8h), and 1010b (Ah). In other words, the lower address of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process can be set to any value between 00h and FAh depending on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area. For example, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is set to 04h depending on the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process will be 0004h (and 0005h). Also, if the value of the I register is 00h and the lower address of the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process is set to 84h due to the value set in the interrupt initial setting area, the interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process will be 0084h (and 0085h). Although we will not go into details here, we should note that the interrupt vector addresses for the multiple maskable interrupt processes mentioned above can be determined according to the value set in the interrupt initial setting area.

<Relationship between power-on processing and interrupt vector addresses of timer interrupt processing> Figure 73 is a diagram showing the relationship between power-on processing and interrupt vector addresses of timer interrupt processing. Part of the power-on processing, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored from address 0000h to address 0003h. Addresses 0004h and 0005h store the interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt processing. Addresses xxxxh (xxxx is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to XXXXh (XXXX is a predetermined hexadecimal value) store the timer interrupt processing. Addresses yyyyh (yyyy is a predetermined hexadecimal value) to YYYYh (YYYY is a predetermined hexadecimal value) store the continuation of the power-on processing. Note that the areas written in dashed lines are assumed to store other programs (instructions).

As is clear from FIG. 73, the power-on process starts from address 0000h and is executed up to address 0003h. The continuation of the power-on process is configured to start from address yyyyh. Specifically, a jump command (JR yyyyh) is stored from address 0001h to address 0003h, which causes the program following address 0003h to be address yyyyh (since this jump command is a 3-byte command, it uses the program area from address 0001h to address 0003h). The power-on process corresponds to the program start process in FIG. 5. In addition, an interrupt vector address for the timer interrupt process is stored between address 0003h and address yyyyh. In other words, all the commands constituting the power-on process are configured not to be stored in consecutive addresses. By configuring in this way, the game store staff can understand that the voltage is starting up in an unstable state. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable, and the program (instructions) may not be executed correctly (the main control chip does not start up normally). In such a case, if the instructions constituting the power-on process are configured as a series, for example, one instruction stored in the address next to a certain instruction may not be executed among the instructions constituting the power-on process, and the program may be executed in an abnormal manner. In other words, there is a risk that an error unexpected by the player or the game store staff may occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between part of the power-on process and the continuation of part of the power-off process, for example, if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh is not executed normally (if the instruction at address 0004h is executed), it will take longer to execute the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards (or the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards will not be executed) than if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh is executed normally. In other words, for example, if there is a program (command) after address yyyyh to determine whether to transition to setting change mode ("Setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" in Figure 5), the time to transition to setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or the setting change mode will not be transitioned to) if a jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is not executed normally, compared to a case in which the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is executed normally. Therefore, after turning the power on, the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage was unstable when the power was turned on by checking whether the time it took to transition to setting change mode was abnormal.

Note that the addresses shown in FIG. 73 are merely examples, and a part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored from address 0000h to address 0003h. However, for example, addresses 0000h to 0007h may be stored as a part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on. Similarly, the interrupt vector addresses of the timer interrupt process are stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h, but any value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the next address of the program of the power-on process, may be used. For example, if a part of the power-on process, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored at addresses 0000h to 0007h, and address yyyyh is 1000h, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process may be set to address 0064h, etc. In other words, if a jump command is stored at address A as the power-on processing program, and the power-on processing program continues from address B, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing may be stored (defined) between addresses A and B. Also, although address xxxxh is set to a smaller value than address yyyyh, address xxxxh may be set to a larger value than address yyyyh. Also, although the vector address of the timer interrupt processing is set to a smaller value than address xxxxh, the vector address of the timer interrupt processing may be set to a larger value than address xxxxh. Also, although the dashed line portion has been described as another program (instruction), data that is not a program (instruction) (another interrupt vector address or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) may be stored.

Furthermore, the decision to transition to setting change mode has been given as an example of processing after address yyyyh, but even with processing (not shown) for outputting an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power has been turned on as processing after address yyyyh, the designed time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instruction) is being executed normally (or the external signal is not output), so the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state based on whether the time until the security signal was output was abnormal. Similarly, the processing after address yyyyh may be the first "interrupt permission command" of multiple "interrupt permission commands (also called interrupt permission commands)" since the power-on process began. By configuring in this way, the designed time until the timer interrupt process can be executed is longer than when the program (instruction) is being executed normally (or the timer interrupt process is not executed), so the gaming store staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state by whether the timing of the display of the number of credits (lighting of the credit number display) due to the timer interrupt process, the timing of the lighting of the MAX BET lamp, and the timing of the lighting of the medal insertion possible lamp were abnormal. It should be noted that, to repeat, after the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to allow the interrupt is issued. Here, the interrupt mode can be set by processing after address yyyyh, or by processing the address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Relationship between power-on processing, interrupt vector addresses of timer interrupt processing, and other programs><Pattern1> in FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the relationship between power-on processing, interrupt vector addresses of timer interrupt processing, and other programs. Various explanations will be made using this <Pattern 1>. A part of the power-on processing, which is the program that is executed first when the power is turned on, is stored from address 0000h to address 0003h. The interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing is stored at addresses 0004h and 0005h. The first processing is stored from address 0008h. The second processing is stored from address 0010h. The third processing is stored at address 0018h. The fourth processing is stored from address 0020h. The fifth processing is stored from address 0028h. The sixth processing is stored from address 0030h. The seventh processing is stored from address 0038h. The eighth process is stored from address 0040h. A timer interrupt process is stored from address xxxxh (xxxx is a predetermined value in hexadecimal) to address XXXXh (XXXX is a predetermined value in hexadecimal). The continuation of the power-on process is stored from address yyyyh (yyyy is a predetermined value in hexadecimal) to address YYYYh (YYYY is a predetermined value in hexadecimal). Note that other programs (commands) are stored in the areas enclosed by dashed lines.

Here, the first process, the second process, the third process, the fourth process, the fifth process, the sixth process, the seventh process, and the eighth process refer to processes (programs) called by a special call instruction (RST instruction). The special call instruction (RST instruction) is an instruction used to call a program (instruction) at a specific address (0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, 0040h), unlike a normal call instruction (CALL instruction), and can call a program (instruction) with a smaller program capacity and shorter processing time (fewer number of states) than a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). For example, the following is a comparison of the use of a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) and the use of a special call instruction (RST instruction) when calling the first process starting from 0008h. A) When calling a program at address 0008h using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction): CALL 0008h (program size used: 3 bytes, number of states: 5) B) When calling a program at address 0008h using a special call instruction (RST instruction): RST 08h (program size used: 1 byte, number of states: 4) As described above, the program size used can be reduced to half or less when calling a program (instruction) at the specific address using a special instruction (RST instruction) compared to when calling a program (instruction) at the specific address using a normal call instruction (CALL instruction). In addition, the processing time required to call a program (instruction) at the specific address can also be shortened. Therefore, it is preferable that at least one of the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth processes called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction) is configured as a process that is called multiple times between an operation for starting a certain game (e.g., turning on the start switch) and an operation for starting the next game of the certain game (e.g., turning on the start switch). In other words, it is preferable that at least one of the first, second, third, fourth, fifth, sixth, seventh, and eighth processes is a process that is called frequently. In this way, by configuring the process that is called frequently to be called using the special call instruction (RST instruction), it is possible to reduce the program capacity by using the special call instruction (RST instruction) rather than using the normal call instruction (CALL instruction).

Furthermore, it is preferable that the first process, the second process, the third process, the fourth process, the fifth process, the sixth process, and the seventh process, which are called (executed) by the special call instruction (RST instruction), are composed of a program of 8 bytes or a program of 8 bytes or less. For example, if the first process is a program of 8 bytes, the program (instruction) of the first process is stored at addresses 0008h to 000Fh. On the other hand, if the first process is a program of 4 bytes, the program (instruction) of the first process is stored at addresses 0008h to 000Bh. If the first process is a program of 4 bytes, the addresses 000Ch to 000Fh may be defined as follows. Example 1) Addresses 000Ch to 000Fh are set as unused areas (00000000b is stored). Example 2) Store another process (another program) of up to 4 bytes in addresses 000Ch to 000Fh. Here, the other process is called with a normal call command (CALL command) rather than a special call command (RST command).

In the above example, the first process is a 4-byte program, but the same applies when the first process is not a 4-byte program but an X-byte program (X is a number less than 8). In addition, the first process at address 0008h is shown as an example, but the above example is not limited to address 0008h and can also be applied to the second process at address 0010h, the third process at address 0018h, the fourth process at address 0020h, the fifth process at address 0028h, the sixth process at address 0030h, and the seventh process at address 0038h.

Also, for example, if the first process at address 0008h is a program with a capacity of 15 bytes from address 0008h to address 0016h, the second process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) may not be provided. However, if the process called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it at address 0040h, which is the last address (the address with the largest value) among the addresses that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) (defined as the eighth process in this embodiment). In other words, for the process stored at address 0040h (the eighth process in this embodiment), there is no problem even if it exceeds 8 bytes, because there is no address that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) at addresses after address 0040h. By configuring in this way, eight processes (the same number of processes as the maximum number that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction)) can be stored as processes that can be called by the special call instruction (RST instruction).

Note that addresses 0008h, 0010h, 0018h, 0020h, 0028h, 0030h, 0038h, and 0040h are used as addresses storing processes (programs) called by the special call instruction (RST instruction), but these eight addresses are merely examples and are not limited to these. However, it is preferable that the upper byte of the addresses storing processes called by the special call instruction (RST instruction) is 00h. By configuring in this way, processes that are frequently called can be located near the top address (0000h), and during the development stage, processes that are frequently called can be designed first and other processes can be designed later. Furthermore, while a normal call instruction (CALL instruction) is an instruction that is used (stored) both within the control area and in the control area outside the use area, it is preferable that a special call instruction (RST instruction) is an instruction that is used (stored) within the control area but not used (stored) in the control area outside the use area. By configuring it in this way, when a developer or a third party checks the program, they can tell at a glance that an area that contains a special call instruction (RST instruction) is a control area, and an area that does not contain a special call instruction is a control area outside the use area.

In addition, two examples of processing (programs) called by a special call command (RST command) are shown, but they are not limited to the following processing and can be configured with various processing. Example 1) Command set processing Content: 1) Prohibit interrupts. 2) Call and execute processing for writing information to be sent to the sub-control means in the RWM area of the main control means with a normal call command (CALL command). 3) Allow interrupts. Examples of call locations: When sending information indicating that the reels have started spinning. When sending information to the sub-control means indicating that all reels have stopped. When sending an error type. When sending a setting value. When the start lever is operated and a performance group number is sent, etc. Example 2) Interrupt waiting processing Content: 1) Determine whether or not timer interrupt processing has been executed. 2-1) If it is determined that timer interrupt processing has not been executed, return to 1). 2-2) If it is determined that timer interrupt processing has been executed, end the processing. Example of call location: When clearing rising data indicating that a specific switch (setting switch, 1 bet switch, etc.) has been operated.

As described above, the power-on process starts from address 0000h and continues to address 0003h. The power-on process is configured to start from address yyyyh. Specifically, the program following address 0003h is configured to execute a jump command (JR yyyyh) to address yyyyh (since the jump command is a 3-byte command, it uses the program area from address 0001h to address 0003h). The power-on process corresponds to the program start process in FIG. 5. In addition, between addresses 0003h and yyyyh, the process called by the special call command (RST command) and the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process are stored. In other words, all the commands constituting the power-on process are configured not to be stored in consecutive addresses. By configuring in this way, the game store staff can understand that the voltage is unstable when starting up. Specifically, when the power is turned on (immediately after the power is turned on), the voltage is unstable, and the program (instructions) may not be executed correctly (the main control chip does not start up normally). In such a case, if the instructions constituting the power-on process are configured as a series, for example, the next instruction of a certain instruction may be executed without executing another instruction among the instructions constituting the power-on process, and the program may be executed in an abnormal manner. In other words, there is a risk that an error unexpected by the player or the game store staff may occur. However, by storing the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process between part of the power-on process and the continuation of part of the power-off process, for example, if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh is not executed normally (if the instruction at address 0004h is executed), it will take longer to execute the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards (or the program (instructions) from address yyyyh onwards will not be executed) than if a jump instruction (JR yyyyh) in which the program following address 0003h is at address yyyyh is executed normally. In other words, for example, if there is a program (command) after address yyyyh to determine whether to transition to setting change mode ("Setting key switch ON and door open detection switch ON?" in Figure 5), the time to transition to setting change mode will be longer than the designed time (or the setting change mode will not be transitioned to) if a jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is not executed normally, compared to a case in which the jump command (JR yyyyh) that causes the program following address 0003h to be at address yyyyh is executed normally. Therefore, after turning the power on, the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage was unstable when the power was turned on by checking whether the time it took to transition to setting change mode was abnormal.

The addresses described in <Pattern 1> of Fig. 74 are merely examples, and a part of the power-on process, which is the program to be executed first when the power is turned on, is stored from address 0000h to address 0003h. However, for example, as in <Pattern 2> of Fig. 74, addresses 0000h to 0007h may be stored as a part of the power-on process, which is the program to be executed first when the power is turned on. Similarly, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process is stored at address 0004h, but it may be any value smaller than address yyyyh, which is the next address of the program of the power-on process. For example, if a part of the power-on process, which is the program to be executed first when the power is turned on, is stored at addresses 0000h to 0007h, and address yyyyh is 1000h, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt process may be set to address 0064h, etc. In other words, in the case where a jump command is stored in address A as a program for power-on processing, and the program for power-on processing continues from address B, the interrupt vector address of the timer interrupt processing or the process called by a special call command (RST command) may be stored (defined) between addresses A and B. Although the xxxxh address is set to a value smaller than the yyyyh address, the xxxxh address may be set to a value larger than the yyyyh address. Although the dashed line portion is described as another program (command), data other than a program (command) (another interrupt vector address or unused data (data in which 00000000b is stored)) may be stored. Although the vector address of the timer interrupt processing is set to a value smaller than the xxxxh address, the vector address of the timer interrupt processing may be set to a value larger than the xxxxh address.

Furthermore, the decision to transition to setting change mode has been given as an example of processing after address yyyyh, but even with processing (not shown) for outputting an external signal (security signal) indicating that the power has been turned on as processing after address yyyyh, the designed time until the external signal is output is longer than when the program (instruction) is being executed normally (or the external signal is not output), so the arcade staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state based on whether the time until the security signal was output was abnormal. Similarly, the processing after address yyyyh may be the first "interrupt permission command" of multiple "interrupt permission commands (also called interrupt permission commands)" since the power-on process began. By configuring in this way, the designed time until the timer interrupt process can be executed is longer than when the program (instruction) is being executed normally (or the timer interrupt process is not executed), so the gaming store staff can determine whether the voltage started up in an unstable state by whether the timing of the display of the number of credits (lighting of the credit number display) due to the timer interrupt process, the timing of the lighting of the MAX BET lamp, and the timing of the lighting of the medal insertion possible lamp were abnormal. It should be noted that, to repeat, after the interrupt mode is set, the timer interrupt process can actually be executed after a command to allow the interrupt is issued. Here, the interrupt mode can be set by processing after address yyyyh, or by processing the address before jumping to address yyyyh.

<Stage change performance> In this embodiment, the device is configured to be able to execute a stage change performance (sometimes referred to as a switching performance) that switches the performance stage that can be displayed on the liquid crystal. As the performance stage, there are multiple types of performance stages, such as a normal stage and a high probability stage that suggests a high probability state in which the probability of winning the AT is higher than that of the normal stage, and the device is configured to be able to execute a stage change performance when transitioning from one performance stage to another. This stage change performance allows the performance stage to be switched smoothly. Note that there are multiple types of stage change performances, and the selection ratio of the performance stage to be transitioned to is configured to be different depending on the type of stage change performance (for example, a specific stage change performance may have a higher expectation of transitioning to a high probability stage than a specific stage change performance, or a transition to a high probability stage is always made when a specific stage change performance is executed). Note that the type of stage change performance may be configured to suggest a stay mode (details are omitted, but the probability of winning the AT and the ceiling number of games until the AT is won are configured to differ depending on the stay mode) or a setting value. It is also configured to be able to execute effects that correspond to the performance stage (display of background images (still or moving images) on the LCD screen, output of background music from the speakers, lighting patterns of specified lamps, lighting colors of specified lamps, etc.).

Figure 45 is an example of a stage change presentation in this embodiment, which is configured to display UI image A (also referred to as the first UI image), UI image B (also referred to as the second UI image), and UI image C (also referred to as the third UI image) as UI images (sometimes referred to as UI display, UI, or game information image). A UI image is an image that can be displayed on the LCD in the same (or similar) display mode and in the same display area across multiple presentation stages, and information that allows the player to grasp the game situation, etc. is displayed as a UI image.

Here we will explain UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C in detail.

UI image A is an image showing the name of the production stage. In FIG. 45(1), the letters "Beach Stage" are framed, but they may be composed of letters only, without a frame.

UI image B is an image that shows the current number of credits. For example, when the MAX BET switch is pressed and the MAX BET process is executed when "50" is displayed as the number of credits, UI image B is configured to display "50 → 49 → 48 → 47" updated one by one at a speed that the player can see. Note that it may also be configured to display only the number of credits after the MAX BET process, such as "50 → 47."

The UI image C is an image showing the number of payouts in one game. For example, when "10" is paid out in one game, the display mode of the UI image C is configured so that (1) the number is updated by one at a speed that the player can see, such as "0 → 1 → 2 → ... → 9 → 10". It may also be configured so that only the number of payouts is displayed, such as "0 → 10". It may also be configured so that the number of payouts is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) and then "0" is displayed, or it may be configured so that the number of payouts continues to be displayed and "0" is displayed when a bet operation for the next game is performed (or when the operation of the start switch 12 for the next game is accepted).

In addition to these, various types of UI images may be displayed, such as the number of games played in one AT, the number of games remaining, a certain number of points to be used in the game (for example, configured to be accumulated according to the execution of the game or the winning combination, and an AT lottery is executed when 1000 points are reached), the number of games played in normal play, character display, and an outline for displaying a push order navigation image during the AT.

The LCD is also configured to display a background image that corresponds to the current production stage, and in FIG. 45 (1) a background image that corresponds to the beach stage is displayed. Note that the UI image is configured to have a higher display priority (displayed in the foreground) than the background image, so the visibility of the UI image is not reduced by the background image, allowing the player to grasp the game situation at any time.

The type of UI image that can be displayed on the LCD may be changed depending on the game status (normal zone, advantageous zone, RT state, AT, non-AT, chance zone, high probability state, bonus, etc.), or the display mode of the UI image may be changed. In short, the UI image that can be displayed on the LCD may be changed appropriately depending on the game status. In this way, the current game status can be easily understood from the UI image.

The flow of stage change presentation in this embodiment will be described. First, in (1) of FIG. 45, the current presentation stage is the beach stage, and the start switch 12 is operated (pressed) to execute a new game. Next, the background image and UI image are blacked out (go dark) from outside the display area of the liquid crystal from (2) → (3) → (4), and a black image is displayed in the entire display area of the liquid crystal, making the background image and UI image invisible (they may be made invisible by displaying a black image in front of the background image and UI image display, or the background image and UI image may be made invisible by displaying a black image). After that, the background image is displayed from inside the display area of the liquid crystal from (5) → (6) → (7), and a background image corresponding to the presentation stage after the transition (after the stage change) is displayed. Note that the UI image A displays "town stage" corresponding to the presentation stage after the transition. In this way, by configuring the background image and UI image so that they cannot be seen for at least a portion of the time during the stage change performance, the player can be directed to which performance stage they have transitioned to. Furthermore, even if the display mode of the UI image differs before and after the stage change performance, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity. Note that when the performance stage is switched by executing the stage change performance, the name of the performance stage after the transition may be output from the speaker. For example, in FIG. 45, a sound is output saying that the performance stage after the transition is "town stage."

In this embodiment, it is sufficient that the background image and UI image are configured to be invisible at least at some timing during the execution period of the stage change performance (the background image and UI image may be configured to be invisible at all times during the stage change performance), and various methods for making the background image and UI image invisible can be appropriately applied. In addition, during the period during which the background image and UI image are invisible (for example, the period (4) in FIG. 45), a predetermined image (for example, an image of a predetermined character or an image of a title logo) may be displayed to create a chance-up pattern stage change performance that is relatively more advantageous to the player than a normal stage change performance (such as a high probability of winning the transition lottery to the AT, or a high probability of transitioning to a high probability state where the probability of winning the transition lottery to the AT is high, etc.). Note that the chance-up pattern stage change performance and the normal stage change performance may be different types of stage change performance, or may be similar stage change performances with some differences in the performance aspects.

In this embodiment, the execution period of the stage change effect (the time required from start to finish) is configured so that the execution period of the normal stage change effect and the execution period of the chance-up pattern stage change effect are the same. By configuring in this way, the execution end timing of the effect can be the same for the normal stage change effect and the chance-up pattern stage change effect, so that the game can be played without any sense of incongruity. The execution period of the chance-up pattern stage change effect may be configured to be longer than the execution period of the normal stage change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the chance-up pattern stage change effect from being overlooked. The execution period of the chance-up pattern stage change effect may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the normal stage change effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity that the effect ends relatively quickly when the chance-up pattern stage change effect is executed, and this sense of incongruity allows the player to sense that it is a chance-up pattern stage change effect.

In addition, the predetermined stage change performance may be configured to be relatively more advantageous for the player when it is executed in the second performance mode than when it is executed in the first performance mode (e.g., it is easier to move to an advantageous performance stage, there is a higher possibility of winning the AT lottery, the AT game number addition lottery, or the bonus). In addition, the predetermined stage change performance may be configured to be relatively more advantageous for the player when it is started based on a predetermined stop operation (any of the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) than when it is started based on the operation of the start switch 12. In addition, the performance stage and the performance mode of the stage change performance may be made to correspond to each other (e.g., the stage change performance is executed in the first performance mode on the first performance stage, and the stage change performance is executed in the second performance mode on the second performance stage), so that the case where the correspondence is different is relatively more advantageous for the player than the case where the correspondence is not different.

The display mode of the UI image (color, shape, size, etc. of the UI image), the display position (display area) of the UI image, whether or not the UI image is displayed, and the type of UI image may be configured to vary depending on the game situation (game state, performance stage, etc.). For example, in game state A, UI image A and UI image B may be displayed, but in game state B, only UI image A may be displayed (or no UI image may be displayed), or in game state A, UI image A and UI image B may be displayed, but in game state B, UI image C and UI image D (not shown) may be displayed. For example, the game state A and the game state B may be an AT state and a non-AT state (or a state in which the frequency of executing the push order navigation is relatively low) as game state B, or a game state with an advantageous zone may be game state A and a game state with a normal zone may be game state B, or a state in which the standby demo screen is displayed may be game state A and a state in which the standby demo screen is not displayed may be game state B.

In FIG. 45, UI image A, UI image B, and UI image C are displayed, but the number of UI images displayed and the type of UI images displayed may be changed as appropriate. For example, the aforementioned UI image D may be added, or UI image A may not be displayed and the UI images displayed before and after the stage change performance are the same. Also, UI image A may not be displayed, and an image showing the name of the current performance stage may be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the stage change performance is executed.

In addition, in FIG. 45, all UI images are configured to be invisible for at least a portion of the time period when the stage change performance is being performed, but it may also be configured so that all or part of any of the UI images are invisible for at least a portion of the time period when the stage change performance is being performed.

Next, the timing of starting and ending the execution of the stage change effect in this embodiment will be described. Here, a case will be described in which the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of the Nth game, and the stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game. (1) Based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the Nth game, the rotation of all reels starts. Note that the measurement of the minimum play time starts from the timing when the rotation of all reels starts. (2) After that, after the rotation state of all reels becomes a constant speed rotation state, the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, and all reels are stopped by the stop operation of the left stop switch 13a, the middle stop switch 13b, and the right stop switch 13c by the player. During the Nth game (the period from when the rotation of all reels starts to when all reels stop), the UI image remains displayed. (3) Next, the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is operated, but the reel does not start rotating because the minimum play time has not elapsed since the start of the reel rotation for the Nth game. In addition, the stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game. In other words, even if the minimum play time has not elapsed, the stage change effect is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game. The effect of the stage change effect here is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 45. (4) After that, as the stage change effect progresses, the UI image becomes invisible (for example, the effect of FIG. 45(3)). The UI image is displayed continuously from the Nth game until the UI image becomes invisible due to the stage change effect. (5) Next, the minimum play time elapses from the start of the reel rotation for the Nth game, and the reel rotation for the N+1th game begins. (6) Thereafter, as the stage change performance progresses, the UI image is visibly displayed, and thereafter the UI image continues to be visibly displayed. Note that depending on the time for executing the stage change performance, the UI image may become visible before the minimum time has elapsed. (7) Then, the execution of the stage change performance ends. (8) Then, the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th play becomes valid. Thus, in this embodiment, the stage change performance is executed based on the acceptance of the operation of the start switch 12, and is configured to end when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed.

In this manner, in this embodiment, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of reel rotation for the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, the execution of the stage change effect is completed and the UI image is visibly displayed before operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. With this configuration, the stage change effect has ended and the UI image is visibly displayed at the time operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, allowing the player to properly grasp the game situation and progress in the game without any discomfort.

In addition, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted before a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) less than the minimum play time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, the execution of the stage change effect may be completed and the UI image may be visibly displayed before operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective; on the other hand, if operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) less than the minimum play time has elapsed from the start of rotation of the reels for the Nth game but before the minimum play time has elapsed, and a stage change effect is executed in the N+1th game, the execution of the stage change effect may not be completed by the time operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. If the stage change effect were to end and the UI image be visibly displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective even if the operation of the start switch for the N+1th play is received just before the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of the Nth reel spin, the execution period of the stage change effect would be extremely short, and there is a risk that the player will miss the stage change effect. However, by configuring it in this way, the execution period of the stage change effect can be guaranteed, and the stage change effect can be executed appropriately so that the player does not miss it.

Also, even if the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of the reel rotation for the Nth game, the stage change effect may be completed and the UI image may be visibly displayed before the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. By configuring it in this way, the stage change effect has ended and the UI image is visibly displayed at the time the operation of the stop switch 13 becomes effective, allowing the player to properly grasp the game situation and proceed with the game without any discomfort.

Also, if the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed since the start of the reel rotation for the Nth game, the stage change effect may be configured so that the execution has not yet ended when the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective. In this way, if the operation of the start switch 12 for the N+1th game is accepted after the minimum play time has elapsed, in other words, if the player is not in a hurry to progress with the game, the stage change effect can be configured so that the execution has not yet ended when the operation of the stop switch 13 for the N+1th game becomes effective, allowing the player to pay more attention to the stage change effect.

The execution timing of one stage change performance may be configured to include a case where the performance is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ends with the passage of time, a case where the performance is executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ends with a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop), or a case where the performance is executed based on a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop) and ends with the passage of time. Also, the execution timing may be configured to differ depending on the type of stage change performance, such as a first stage change performance being executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ending with the passage of time, while a second stage change performance being executed based on the operation of the start switch 12 and ending with a predetermined stop operation (either the first stop, the second stop, or the third stop).

Furthermore, regarding the UI images, while the demo screen is being displayed, all UI images may be configured to be visibly displayed, or UI image A may be configured to be invisible (not displayed or given a lower display priority than the demo screen), and UI image B (image showing the number of credits) and UI image C (image showing the number of payouts) may be configured to be visibly displayed. By configuring in this way, the player can properly grasp the status of the game regardless of whether the demo screen is being displayed or not. Furthermore, while the demo screen is being displayed, all UI images may be configured to be invisible, or during a specified period during the display of the demo screen, all UI images may be configured to be visibly displayed, but during a specific period different from the specified period during the display of the demo screen, all UI images may be configured to be invisible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display of the demo screen.

In addition, the device may be configured to execute a performance A (which may be a performance that ends in one game or a continuous performance that is executed over a plurality of games) in which the background image corresponding to the performance stage becomes unrecognizable, and when performance A is executed under a situation in which the beach stage is set as the performance stage, at a predetermined timing (the timing when the final stop operation ends, the timing when the final stop operation is performed and processing related to the end of the game ends, the timing when the bet related to the N+1th game is made, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 related to the N+1th game is accepted, etc.) after the end of the Nth game in which the execution of performance A ends, the device may be configured to display the background image corresponding to the beach stage again without executing the stage change performance, and to display an image indicating the name of the performance stage when the background image is displayed again (when the background image is a moving image, a mode in which the background image is displayed from the beginning and a mode in which the background image displayed before performance A is executed is displayed from the continuation are conceivable). Note that the image indicating the name of the performance stage may be displayed as a UI image, or may be configured to end the display after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) without being a UI image. When the same background image is displayed again, the name of the production stage may be configured not to be output as audio from the speaker, or the name of the production stage may be configured to be output as audio from the speaker.

In addition, the stage change effect may be configured to be executed after the execution of effect A is completed. In this case, the stage change effect executed at a predetermined timing after the execution of effect A (the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the timing when the final stop operation is performed and the processing related to the end of the game is completed, the timing when a bet for the next game is made, the timing when the operation of the start switch 12 for the next game is accepted, etc.) and the stage change effect executed under other circumstances may be configured to be stage change effects with different display modes. By configuring in this way, for example, when a player starts a new game and a stage change effect that can be executed after the execution of effect A is executed in the first game, it is possible to accurately grasp the status of the game, such as knowing that effect A was executed up until the previous game.

In addition, even if the image showing the name of the current performance stage is configured not to be a UI image but to be displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 3 seconds) after the stage change performance is executed and then hidden, if it is decided that the stage change performance and the above-mentioned performance A will be executed in one game (in this case, performance A will be executed after the execution of the stage change performance has ended), the image showing the name of the current performance stage may be configured not to be displayed. By configuring in this way, the performance can be switched appropriately.

In addition, the stage change effect may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing (such as the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the timing when a bet is made for the next game, the timing when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated (pressed)) after the final game in the advantageous zone (the game that satisfies the conditions for ending the advantageous zone and the next game becomes a game in the normal zone) has ended. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate the transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, and it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the advantageous zone is continuing.

In addition, the stage change effect may be configured to be executed at a predetermined timing (such as the timing when the final stop operation is completed, the timing when a bet for the next game is made, the timing when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated (pressed)) after the final game in the normal zone (a game that satisfies the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone and the game will be in the advantageous zone from the next game) has ended. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly indicate the transition from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, and it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game even though he or she is in the advantageous zone.

In addition, the presentation stages may be a predetermined presentation stage that is set only in the normal zone, and a specific presentation stage that is set only in the advantageous zone, and when the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met and a transition is made to the advantageous zone in a situation where the predetermined presentation stage is set in the normal zone (when the final stop operation is completed, when the final stop operation is performed and processing related to the end of the game is completed, when a bet is made for the next game, when the start switch 12 for the next game is operated, etc.), a stage change presentation is executed and a transition is made from the predetermined presentation stage to the specific presentation stage. With this configuration, the player can easily know whether or not a transition has been made to the advantageous zone by paying attention to the presentation stage.

The predetermined presentation stage may be configured to be set even when the power is turned off in a predetermined situation in which the game is in a favorable zone and not in an AT state, and the power is turned off and restored without changing the settings, and a stage change presentation is executed before a predetermined number of plays (for example, two plays) are played after the power is turned on, and a transition from the predetermined presentation stage to a specific presentation stage is made. In this embodiment, since the game is always started from the normal zone when the setting is changed, the presentation stage at the start of the game and the flow of the game until the stage change presentation is executed thereafter can be made similar between when the setting is changed and when the setting is not changed, so that it is possible to prevent players from easily figuring out whether the setting has been changed or not. In this embodiment, the game is configured to satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the favorable zone when an average of just under two plays are played in the normal zone, so that the timing at which the stage change presentation is executed for the first time after the power is turned on is almost the same in both cases.

In addition, the stage change effects executed during play in the normal zone and the stage change effects executed during play in the advantageous zone may be configured to have different types of stage change effects (or different presentation modes). By configuring it in this way, it is easy to tell whether the zone is normal or advantageous by visually checking the stage change effects.

Furthermore, in a game in which a stage change effect is executed, the game may be configured so that effects other than the stage change effect are not executed.Furthermore, in a game in which a stage change effect is executed, the game may be configured so that effects based on the operation of the stop switch 13 are not executed other than the stage change effect (effects not based on the stop operation may be executed).By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change effect.

The stage change performance may also be configured to have stage change performance A that can be executed after the end of a specified series of consecutive performances, and stage change performance B that can be executed other than after the end of the specified series of consecutive performances. In this case, whether or not stage change performance A can be executed is determined not based on the result of the internal lottery, but whether or not stage change performance B can be executed may be determined based on the result of the internal lottery (the selection ratio for execution or non-execution differs depending on the result of the internal lottery). Note that stage change performance A and stage change performance B may be configured to have different performance aspects, or may be configured to have the same performance aspect.

Next, the volume of the performance stage BGM, stage change performance BGM, error notification sound, etc. will be described. In this embodiment, the volume level is adjustable, and the volume output from the speaker is relatively loud when the volume level is high, and the volume output from the speaker is relatively quiet when the volume level is low. In the following, the volume level is set to the maximum value, but the same configuration may be used even if it is set to a value other than the maximum value. The speaker may be configured to have a sound whose volume output depends on the volume level and a sound whose volume output does not depend on the volume level. For example, the volume of the error notification sound that notifies the first error (recoverable error) depends on the volume level, but the volume of the error notification sound that notifies the second error (unrecoverable error) may be configured to be independent of the volume level. The distinction between the first error and the second error is not limited to whether it is a recoverable error or an unrecoverable error, and can be set appropriately.

First, during "non-AT", at least a beach stage and a city stage can be set as the production stage, and production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is output from the speaker. For example, beach stage BGM is output from the speaker during the beach stage, and city stage BGM is output from the speaker during the city stage. Production stage BGM is a sound that is output continuously (repeatedly) during a period when sounds such as a specified production sound or a specified error notification sound are not being output. Note that the production stage BGM may be configured to end output when a specified time (e.g., one minute) has elapsed since the end of the game, or when a demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the system is configured so that stage change performance A or stage change performance B can be executed on either the beach stage or the city stage, and when the stage change performance is executed, a sound corresponding to the stage change performance is output from the speaker. The volume of the sound of the stage change performance is configured so as not to depend on the performance stage before the execution of the stage change performance. The sound of the stage change performance may be configured to end output when a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the end of the game or when a demo screen is displayed.

Note that during "non-AT", the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change performance (stage change performance A or stage change performance B) is configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the performance stage BGM (beach stage BGM or town stage BGM). This configuration allows the player to focus on the stage change performance. Also, if stage change performance B is configured to be relatively more advantageous for the player than stage change performance A, the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance B is executed may be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance A is executed, and this configuration prevents the player from missing the execution of stage change performance B.

In addition, during "non-AT", the average volume of the sound of the stage change performance (stage change performance A or stage change performance B) is configured to be louder than the average volume of the performance stage BGM (beach stage BGM or town stage BGM). This configuration makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change performance. Furthermore, if stage change performance B is configured to be relatively more advantageous to the player than stage change performance A, the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance B is executed may be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the sound when stage change performance A is executed, and this configuration can prevent the player from missing the execution of stage change performance B.

Next, during "AT", at least the volcano stage can be set as the production stage, and production stage BGM corresponding to the current production stage is configured to be output from the speaker. For example, during the volcano stage, volcano stage BGM is output from the speaker as the BGM for the volcano stage. Also, during "AT", a stage change production may be executed, and in this case, the maximum volume of the sound for the stage change production may be configured to be louder than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM. By configuring in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stage change production, just as during "non-AT".

The sound that is the loudest among the sounds that are output during "AT" may be configured to be the navigation voice that is output when the push order navigation is performed (for example, a voice that guides the push order, such as "Left!") or the conversation voice of the characters.

Next, the "error notification sound" is output when a specific error (for example, an error related to the hopper) occurs (the gaming machine detects the error) and notifies the user of the specific error, regardless of the presentation stage or game state. When an error is notified, an image showing the content of the error is displayed on the LCD at the same (or approximately the same) timing as the output of the error notification sound.

In this embodiment, as the sound during notification of a predetermined error, background music during an error and an error voice are output. The error voice is a voice such as "Please call a store clerk."

In addition, for certain errors, the maximum volume of the error voice is louder than the maximum volume of the background music during an error. If the maximum volume of the background music during an error were louder, there is a risk that the player will not be able to properly hear whether it is an error notification or a special effect, but by configuring it in this way, it is possible to properly inform the player that an error is occurring.

In addition, for certain errors, the average volume of the error voice is louder than the average volume of the background music during an error. If the average volume of the background music during an error were louder, there would be a risk that the player would not be able to accurately hear whether it was an error notification or a special effect, but by configuring it in this way, it is possible to accurately inform the player that an error is occurring.

Note that although an error related to the hopper is given as an example of a specified error, this is merely one example and may be applied to other errors such as an error related to the selector, or may be applied to all errors including the first error and the second error, and is configured to satisfy the above-mentioned configuration with at least one error.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is louder than the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "non-AT", and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is louder than the average volume of the production stage BGM "non-AT". In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is louder than the maximum volume of the stage change production sound "non-AT", and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during AT" is louder than the average volume of the stage change production sound "non-AT". By configuring it in this way, it is possible to progress through the game without losing the sense of exhilaration during the AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during the AT" is louder than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during the AT" is louder than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM "during the AT" is louder than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the production stage BGM "during the AT" is louder than the average volume of the voice during an error. By configuring it in this way, if a specified error occurs during the AT, the BGM during the AT will be output at a louder volume than the sound during the specified error notification after the specified error is cleared, which prevents the BGM during the AT from being difficult to hear and allows the game to proceed without losing the sense of exhilaration during the AT.

In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT" is smaller than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the production stage BGM during "non-AT" is smaller than the average volume of the voice during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production during "non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the BGM during an error, and the average volume of the sound of the stage change production during "non-AT" is smaller than the average volume of the BGM during an error. In addition, the maximum volume of the sound of the stage change production during "non-AT" is smaller than the maximum volume of the error voice, and the average volume of the sound of the stage change production during "non-AT" is smaller than the average volume of the voice during an error. By configuring it in this way, if a specific error occurs during non-AT, the specific error notification sound will be output at a louder volume than before the specific error was notified, making it easier to notice that a specific error has occurred.

In this embodiment, the display priority of the image related to the stage change performance is configured to be higher than the display priority of the UI image, so that the UI image cannot be seen for at least a part of the stage change performance. However, the display priority of the image related to the stage change performance may be configured to be lower than the display priority of the UI image, so that the UI image can be seen even during the stage change performance. Also, a full-screen performance that is different from the stage change performance and displays a predetermined image on the entire surface of the liquid crystal may be executed. The full-screen performance may be, for example, a performance that displays an image of a predetermined character and a famous line of the predetermined character on the entire surface of the liquid crystal, and may be executed when suggesting that a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role has been won, or when suggesting that a player may be given a beneficial benefit such as a lottery for transition to an AT or an addition to an AT. The full-screen performance may be configured to have multiple types of full-screen performance. In addition, the display priority of the image related to the full screen performance may be configured to be higher than the display priority of the UI image, so that the UI image cannot be viewed for at least a portion of the full screen performance, or the display priority of the image related to the full screen performance may be configured to be lower than the display priority of the UI image, so that the UI image can be viewed even during the full screen performance. Also, the execution period of the stage change performance (the time required from start to finish) may be configured to be longer than the execution period of the full screen performance, or the execution period of the stage change performance may be configured to be shorter than the execution period of the full screen performance.

Furthermore, the relationship between the display priority of images related to stage change performance and UI images, and the relationship between the display priority of images related to full screen performance and UI images may be configured as follows: (1) Display priority of images related to stage change performance > Display priority of UI images, and display priority of images related to full screen performance > Display priority of UI images (i.e., the UI images are not visible during at least a portion of the period during the stage change performance and at least a portion of the period during the full screen performance) (2) Display priority of images related to stage change performance > Display priority of UI images, and display priority of images related to full screen performance < Display priority of UI images (i.e., the UI images are not visible during at least a portion of the period during the stage change performance, but are visible during the full screen performance) (3) Display priority of images related to stage change performance < Display priority of UI images, and display priority of images related to full screen performance > Display priority of UI images (i.e., the UI image is visible during the stage change effect, but not for at least a portion of the full screen effect) (4) Display priority of the image related to the stage change effect < display priority of the UI image, and display priority of the image related to the full screen effect < display priority of the UI image (i.e., the UI image is visible during both the stage change effect and the full screen effect) Note that the relationship may be configured to always be one of (1) to (4) regardless of the game situation, the type of stage change effect being executed, or the type of full screen effect, or the relationship may be appropriately changed from (1) to (4) depending on the game situation, the type of stage change effect being executed, and the type of full screen effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to effectively draw the player's attention to each effect.

Note that if two-coin and three-coin bet play are possible (the payout rate is lower when playing with two coins than when playing with three coins), the stage change effect may be performed when playing with three coins, but may not be performed when playing with two coins. This configuration can make the player realize that playing with three coins is more advantageous, since playing with two coins does not create a sense of expectation in the player.

In addition, if two-coin and three-coin bet play are possible (two-coin bet play has a lower payout rate than three-coin bet play), the UI image may be displayed when playing three-coin bet play, but may not be displayed when playing two-coin bet play. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make the player realize that playing three-coin bet play is more advantageous, since playing two-coin bet play gives the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, if two-coin and three-coin bet play are possible (the payout rate is lower when playing with two coins than when playing with three coins), the UI image may be configured to be displayed for both three-coin and two-coin bet play. By configuring it in this way, the same UI image as for three-coin bet play is displayed when playing with two coins, so the player is not made aware of a malfunction of the gaming machine and the frequency of the effects (for example, the stage change effect is not executed when playing with two coins) does not give the player a sense of expectation, so the player can be made to realize that playing with three coins is more advantageous and that playing with two coins is not a malfunction.

<Display mode of NEXT image> In this embodiment, when a continuous performance is executed across multiple games as a performance to notify the result of a predetermined lottery (a lottery as to whether to move to the AT or not, a lottery as to whether to move to a chance zone or not, a lottery as to whether to add to the AT, a lottery as to whether to move to an AT add-on specialized zone (a period with a high probability of winning the lottery as to whether to add to the AT) etc.), it is configured to be possible to display an image (sometimes referred to as a NEXT image or a continuation image) indicating that the continuous performance will continue in the next game during one game of the continuous performance. The display mode of the NEXT image is explained below.

Figure 46 shows an example of the flow of a continuous presentation in which the NEXT image is displayed. Figure 46 shows that the game progresses from "1" in the upper left to "7" in the lower right. If an outcome favorable to the player is to be notified after "7", "8" is displayed, and if an outcome unfavorable to the player is to be notified after "7", "9" is displayed. In addition, "S" in the figure indicates the start switch 12, and a "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13.

At "1" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the title of the continuous performance, "Repel the Shark!", is displayed on the LCD, and the first game of the continuous performance has begun. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle," indicating that operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Below, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle," this indicates that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and therefore operation of the stop switch is invalid.

At "2" in FIG. 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect of a shark swimming from right to left is displayed as a response to the first stop operation.

At "3" in FIG. 46, a second stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a shark swimming from left to right is displayed as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

In Figure 46, "4" indicates that the third stop operation has been performed on the stop switch 13, and a rippling effect is displayed as an effect corresponding to the third stop operation. Here, the first play of the continuous effect ends, and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 for the next play, so the word "NEXT" is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD as the NEXT image.

In "4" in Fig. 46, the display of "NEXT" is configured to be displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal after the third stop operation is accepted, but the display mode of "NEXT" may be such that the characters "NEXT" are displayed at the bottom left of the liquid crystal after the third stop operation is accepted, the characters "NEXT" slide from the bottom left of the liquid crystal to the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and the characters "NEXT" stop when they move to the bottom right position of the liquid crystal. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, when the characters "NEXT" are displayed to slide and move from the bottom left of the liquid crystal to the bottom right (while the characters "NEXT" are moving), the characters may be displayed in a mode with lower visibility than when they are displayed stopped at the bottom right of the liquid crystal (such as the characters being displayed faintly, an image other than the characters "NEXT" being displayed, or an effect image having a higher display priority than the characters "NEXT" being displayed). Generally, a player plays a game in the order of start switch 12 → left reel 8a → center reel 8b → right reel 8c, so the flow up to the display of the NEXT image can be made the same as the game progress, making the progress of the game feel smooth. Also, the NEXT image is configured to be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds can be exemplified, but a different time may be set depending on the continuous performance) has passed since the performance corresponding to the acceptance of the third stop operation is executed.

At "5" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated, and the second game of the consecutive performances begins. Here, a performance is displayed in which a character on a boat confronts a shark.

At "6" in FIG. 46, the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and a shark attacks is displayed as an effect in response to the first stop operation.

In Figure 46, "7" indicates that a second stop operation has been performed on the stop switch 13, and the display area of the LCD screen is divided into two parts to show a character attacking with a spear and a shark attacking as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

At "8" and "9" in FIG. 46, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image related to the result of the continuous performance (whether the specified lottery was won or not) is displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation. At "8" in FIG. 46, it is notified that the specified lottery has been won, and the words "Repel!" and an image of a character are displayed, while at "9" in FIG. 46, it is notified that the specified lottery has not been won, and the words "Defeat...?" and an image of a shark are displayed.

In addition, in Figure 46, the "NEXT" image is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD as in "4" in Figure 46, the "Defeat!" image is displayed in the bottom left of the LCD as in "8" in Figure 46, and the "Defeat...?" image is displayed in the top left of the LCD as in "9" in Figure 46, so that each is displayed in a different display area of the LCD. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that each image has a different meaning.

Also, in a plurality of different consecutive performances, the images to notify that the first and second consecutive performances have won the predetermined lottery may be configured to have different display modes (different characters, different display positions, etc.), and the NEXT images of the first and second consecutive performances may be configured to have the same display mode. For example, when notifying that the first consecutive performance has won the predetermined lottery, "Repel" is displayed in the lower left of the LCD, and when notifying that the second consecutive performance has won the predetermined lottery, "Victory" is displayed in the upper right of the LCD, and it is considered that the display mode of the NEXT images of the first and second consecutive performances is the same. In the case of such a display mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the NEXT image indicates the continuation of the consecutive performances between different consecutive performances.

In addition, while FIG. 46 shows an example in which the presentation changes with each stop operation by the player, the presenter may be configured to progress over time after the start switch 12 is operated to start the game. For example, even if no stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13 after "1" in FIG. 46, the presentation may progress over time, and the presentation may progress to "4" in FIG. 46.

<BGM during consecutive performances> Next, the BGM that is output during consecutive performances will be explained based on the consecutive performances explained in FIG. 46. The flow of consecutive performances in FIG. 46 has been described above, so it will be omitted.

When shown by "1" in FIG. 46 (when the start switch 12 is operated and the first play of the continuous performance begins), a predetermined continuous performance BGM corresponding to the continuous performance is output. Note that when shown by "1" in FIG. 46, BGM corresponding to the performance at which the continuous performance begins may be output, and when shown by "2" in FIG. 46 (when the first stop operation is performed on the stop switch 1), BGM corresponding to the continuous performance may be output.

Then, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation ("2" to "4" in FIG. 46), but the BGM during the continuous performance continues to be output. Here, if the next game start operation (insertion of the first coin, operation of the 1 bet switch, operation of the MAX bet switch, operation of the start switch 12, etc.) is not performed after the third stop operation is performed, the performance displayed in response to the third stop operation (the performance displayed in the third stop operation is looped in a situation where the performance cannot proceed any further) and the NEXT image remain displayed, and the BGM during the continuous performance also continues to be output (if the BGM during the continuous performance is played to the end, it returns to the beginning and is played in a loop). By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from leaving in the middle of a continuous performance that may result in an advantageous result for the player. It is also possible to prevent another player from easily taking a seat when a player leaves the seat for a toilet break, etc.

In addition, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped without a bet operation or settlement operation being performed and the demo screen is displayed, the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped when the demo screen is displayed and the background music in the demo screen may be output instead, or the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the demo screen is displayed. In addition, if the sub-switch 20 is operated at a predetermined timing before the predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped, the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped when the menu screen is displayed and the background music in the menu screen may be output instead, or the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the menu screen is displayed.

In addition, even if the demo screen is displayed immediately after the third stop operation is performed and the settlement operation is performed after all reels have stopped, the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped when the demo screen is displayed and the background music during the demo screen may be output instead, or the output of the background music during the continuous performance may be stopped and silenced when the demo screen is displayed.

In addition, the demo screen may be configured not to be displayed during the continuous performance. In this case, if a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the third stop operation was performed and all reels had stopped without a bet operation or settlement operation being performed, the volume of the background music during the continuous performance may be lowered or muted.

Also, the menu screen may be configured not to be displayed even if the sub switch 20 is operated during the continuous performance. In this case, even if the sub switch 20 is operated after the third stop operation is performed and all the reels have stopped, the menu screen will not be displayed and the background music during the continuous performance will continue to be output. After that, the demo screen may be displayed when a predetermined time (e.g. 60 seconds) has elapsed since all the reels had stopped, or the demo screen may not be displayed.

Then, as shown at "5" in Figure 46, the start switch 12 is operated and the second game of the consecutive performance begins, but the BGM continues to be played during the consecutive performance.

Then, the game progresses with the first stop operation, the second stop operation (from "6" to "7" in Figure 46) (output of BGM during continuous performance continues), and then the third stop operation ("8" or "9" in Figure 46) is performed. When an image relating to the result of the continuous performance (sometimes called a result image) is displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation, output of BGM during continuous performance is stopped, and BGM or SE (sound effect) relating to the result of the continuous performance is output. Note that once BGM or SE relating to the result of the continuous performance is output, it does not loop, and output ends when the playback time has elapsed. In addition, as background music or sound effects related to the results of the continuous performance, background music or sound effects indicating a win (for example, a lively, bright, flashy sound effect) are output when a specific lottery is won, and background music or sound effects indicating a non-win (for example, a disappointing, dark, dull sound effect) are output when a specific lottery is not won, and if the volume levels are set to the same, the volume of the sound effects indicating a win may be configured to be louder than the volume of the sound effects indicating a non-win.

In this way, during a continuous performance, the BGM continues to be played while the NEXT image is displayed, but the BGM is stopped while the image related to the result of the continuous performance is displayed. When the result of the continuous performance is displayed in this way, unlike in the middle of the continuous performance, the sound is silenced, making it possible to clearly notify the player that this is the final game of the continuous performance.

<Display mode of NEXT image and image related to the result of consecutive performance> Next, using FIG. 47, we will explain the display mode of the NEXT image of each consecutive performance and the image related to the result of the consecutive performance.

Figure 47 is a diagram showing the flow of a consecutive performance (sometimes called the second consecutive performance) different from the consecutive performance shown in Figure 46 (sometimes called the first consecutive performance). Figure 47 shows that the game progresses from "1" in the upper left to "7" in the lower right. If an outcome favorable to the player is to be announced after "7", "8" is displayed, and if an outcome unfavorable to the player is to be announced after "7", "9" is displayed. In addition, "S" in the figure indicates the start switch 12, and a "white circle" or "black circle" indicates the stop switch 13.

At "1" in Figure 47, the start switch 12 is operated (pressed), the title of the continuous performance, "Make the Flowers Bloom!", is displayed on the LCD, and the first game of the continuous performance has begun. At this time, the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "black circle," indicating that operation of the stop switch 13 is valid. Below, when the stop switch 13 is displayed as a "white circle," this indicates that the stop switch 13 has already been operated and therefore operation of the stop switch is invalid.

In Figure 47, "2" indicates that the first stop operation has been performed on the stop switch 13, and an image of the ground with nothing blooming is displayed as a representation in response to the first stop operation.

In Figure 47, "3" indicates that a second stop operation has been performed on the stop switch 13, and a flower bud appears as an effect in response to the second stop operation.

At "4" in FIG. 47, the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect corresponding to the third stop operation is a cloud-flowing effect without flowers blooming. Here, the first play of the continuous effect ends, and the continuation of the continuous effect is executed by operating the start switch 12 for the next play, so the word "NEXT" is displayed in the bottom right of the LCD as the NEXT image.

In "4" in Fig. 47, the display of "NEXT" is configured to be displayed at the bottom right of the liquid crystal after the third stop operation is accepted, but the display mode of "NEXT" may be such that the characters "NEXT" are displayed at the bottom left of the liquid crystal after the third stop operation is accepted, the characters "NEXT" slide from the bottom left of the liquid crystal to the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and the characters "NEXT" stop when they move to the bottom right position of the liquid crystal. In addition, in the case of such a configuration, when the characters "NEXT" are displayed to slide and move from the bottom left of the liquid crystal to the bottom right (while the characters "NEXT" are moving), the characters may be displayed in a mode with lower visibility than when they are displayed stopped at the bottom right of the liquid crystal (the characters are displayed faintly, an image other than the characters "NEXT" is displayed, or an effect image with a higher display priority than the characters "NEXT" is displayed, etc.). Generally, a player plays a game in the order of start switch 12 → left reel 8a → center reel 8b → right reel 8c, so the flow up to the display of the NEXT image can be made the same as the game progress, making the progress of the game feel smooth. Also, the NEXT image is configured to be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds can be exemplified, but a different time may be set depending on the continuous performance) has passed since the performance corresponding to the acceptance of the third stop operation is executed.

At "5" in Figure 47, the start switch 12 is operated, and the second game of the consecutive effects begins. Here, no flowers bloom, and rain clouds are displayed.

In Figure 47, "6" indicates that the first stop operation has been performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect displayed in response to the first stop operation is that no flowers are blooming and it is raining.

In Figure 47, "7" indicates that a second stop operation has been performed on the stop switch 13, and the effect displayed in response to the second stop operation is that no flowers are blooming, but it is raining and thundering.

At "8" and "9" in FIG. 47, a third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13, and an image related to the result of the continuous performance (whether the designated lottery was won or not) is displayed as a performance corresponding to the third stop operation. At "8" in FIG. 47, it is notified that the designated lottery has been won, and the words "Blooming!" and an image of a blooming flower are displayed, while at "9" in FIG. 47, it is notified that the designated lottery has not been won, and the words "Too bad!?" and an image of a flower bud are displayed.

Here, when comparing the first and second consecutive performances, the display mode of the NEXT image is configured to be the same, but the display mode of the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance (the image of "Repel!" or "Defeat...?" in the first consecutive performance, and the image of "Bloom!" or "Too bad!?" in the second consecutive performance) is configured to be different.

Games that notify the results of consecutive effects often execute effects that are important to the gaming machine (the so-called selling points of the gaming machine), so interest can be increased by changing the display mode of the image related to the result of the consecutive effects according to the type of consecutive effects in the game that notifies the results of the consecutive effects.

In addition, although not shown, in the game following the game in which the result of the consecutive performance has been announced, if it has been announced that a specific lottery has been won, a first specific performance is performed that clearly indicates that it has been won (for example, a "Bonus Confirmed" or "Congratulations!" display, or a specific lamp on the gaming machine is illuminated in rainbow colors, etc.), and if it has been announced that the specific lottery has not been won, a second specific performance is performed that indicates that the consecutive performance has ended in failure (for example, the LCD display is darkened, a stage change performance is performed, etc.), and the background image of the normal game state is displayed. Here, the first specific performance is configured to be brighter than the second specific performance.

In addition, in Figures 46 and 47, the first and second consecutive performances are each executed over two games, and the NEXT image is displayed once each, but this is not limited thereto. For example, the first consecutive performance may be executed over a maximum of three games, and the NEXT image may be displayed a total of two times, after the third stop operation of the first game and after the third stop operation of the second game. In other words, the first consecutive performance may be configured to display the NEXT image a maximum of two times, and the second consecutive performance may be configured to display the NEXT image once.

When configured in this way, the first consecutive performance is configured to display the NEXT image more times than the second consecutive performance, and to have a higher chance of winning a specified lottery.

In addition, in the first consecutive performance, the probability of winning a predetermined lottery is higher when the NEXT image is displayed twice than when the NEXT image is displayed once.

In this way, the more times the NEXT image is displayed, the higher the chance of winning a given lottery. With this configuration, when the NEXT image is displayed, it not only continues the performance, but also builds anticipation for a continuous performance. Note that when a NEXT image is displayed multiple times, the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be the same NEXT image, the second NEXT image may be larger than the first NEXT image, or the first NEXT image and the second NEXT image may be configured with different colors for the NEXT letters and the surrounding area.

<Display priority of NEXT image and UI image> Furthermore, when the above-mentioned UI image is configured to be displayed, the UI image and NEXT image displayed in the bottom right of the LCD screen may overlap. In this case, the display priority of the NEXT image is configured to be higher than the display priority of the UI image. In this way, by emphasizing the display related to consecutive performances that affect the player's profits, it is possible to focus the player on the results of consecutive performances.

The display priority of the NEXT image may also be configured to be lower than the display priority of the UI image. This configuration allows the player to properly grasp the status of the game even during continuous performance. The display areas of the NEXT image and the UI image may also be configured to be different display areas so that the images do not overlap. This configuration allows the player to properly grasp both the progress of the continuous performance and the status of the game.

<Display area for captions and NEXT images during continuous performance> Next, we will explain the display area for captions and NEXT images during continuous performance.

In this embodiment, the term "telop" (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "telop display," "telop effect," "subtitle," "subtitle effect," or "text information") refers to the effect of displaying the lines of characters or narration in text in accordance with the effect displayed on the LCD screen.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 46 or FIG. 47, a caption related to the continuous performance may be displayed during the continuous performance. The caption is displayed in accordance with the progress of the continuous performance, which changes over time. Note that if the progress of the continuous performance changes in response to the operation of the start switch 12 or the operation of the stop switch 12, the caption may be configured to be displayed in response to the operation of the start switch 12 or the operation of the stop switch.

The caption is displayed in the lower display area of the LCD, and the size of the caption display area varies depending on the number of characters to be displayed. Also, the caption display area is configured so that there is a display area for the NEXT image in a straight line to the left and right.

Here, the display of the caption and the NEXT image are configured so that their display areas do not overlap. Specifically, in a game during a continuous performance in which a NEXT image is displayed, the caption is displayed with a relatively shorter number of characters than in a game during a continuous performance in which a NEXT image is not displayed, and is configured so as not to overlap with the NEXT image. On the other hand, although not shown, in a game that notifies the result of a continuous performance, since a NEXT image is not displayed, the caption may be configured to display a relatively longer number of characters than in a game during a continuous performance in which a NEXT image is displayed. Also, if the caption has a large number of characters, the caption may be displayed over multiple lines so that the display areas of the NEXT image and the caption do not overlap. This configuration can prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image with the caption.

In Figure 48, the caption is made up of four letters, "What?", and does not overlap with the NEXT image, preventing the player from confusing the NEXT image with the caption.

When the NEXT image and the caption are displayed at the same time, the NEXT image may be configured to be displayed with effects at a predetermined interval, while the caption may be configured to be a fixed image without effects. This configuration can further prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image with the caption.

In addition, when displaying a caption in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, the NEXT image may be configured to be displayed at a specified timing after the caption is displayed.

Also, the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be configured not to end with the passage of time. In this case, during the continuous performance, the display may be configured not to switch to the demo screen even if a predetermined time (for example, one minute) has passed from a predetermined timing after the end of the game (the timing when the third stop operation is received, the timing when all reels have stopped, the timing when the payout process is completed, etc.), and the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be continued until the start operation of the next game (betting operation, operation of the start switch 12, etc.) is performed. Also, during the continuous performance, the display may be configured to switch to the demo screen when a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined timing after the end of the game, and the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be continued until the timing of switching to the demo screen, and the display of the NEXT image and the telop may be terminated at the timing of switching to the demo screen. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the player from confusing the NEXT image with the telop, and to make it easier to understand the situation of the game.

Also, in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, if the number of characters in the caption is large, the caption may be displayed first, and the NEXT image may be displayed after the caption display has finished. By configuring in this way, the period during which the NEXT image is displayed can be made different from the period during which the caption is displayed, so that both the NEXT image and the caption can be displayed clearly without reducing visibility.

The display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the telop may be configured to overlap, but in this case, it is preferable to configure the display priority of the NEXT image to be higher than the display priority of the telop. By configuring it in this way, the player can properly understand that the continuous performance will continue in the next game.

<Display mode until the NEXT image is displayed> Next, the flow until the NEXT image is displayed will be described using FIG. 49. FIG. 49 shows a case where, when the NEXT image is displayed, something that cannot be recognized as a character (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a slide image) is displayed as a trajectory moving from the bottom left to the bottom right of the liquid crystal, and the NEXT image is displayed when the slide image moves to the bottom right of the liquid crystal. Note that the slide image may be an image that cannot be recognized as a character or any object, such as "1" to "4" in FIG. 49 (an image showing an afterimage in "1" to "4" in FIG. 49), or an image of a specific object that is not a character, such as "5" to "8" in FIG. 49 (an image of a baseball in "5" to "8" in FIG. 49).

In "1" or "5" in FIG. 49, in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, after the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 is accepted, a time t1 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or a time t1 has elapsed since the start switch 12 is operated, a slide image is displayed in the lower left corner of the LCD.

In "2" or "6" in FIG. 49, in a game where the NEXT image is displayed, the slide image moves to near the center of the bottom of the LCD screen after time t2 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t2 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated. Note that t2>t1.

In "3" or "7" in FIG. 49, in a game where the NEXT image is displayed, the slide image moves to the bottom right of the LCD screen after time t3 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13, or after time t3 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated. Note that t3>t2.

"4" or "
In "No. 8", in a game in which a NEXT image is displayed, the display of the slide image ends and the NEXT image is displayed in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display after a time t4 has elapsed since the third stop operation on the stop switch 13 or after a time t4 has elapsed since the start switch 12 was operated. Note that t4>t3.

By moving the slide image from the bottom left to the bottom right of the LCD screen in this way, it is possible to attract the player's attention, and to make the player aware of the NEXT image that appears after the slide image is displayed.

Furthermore, the display area of the slide image and the display area of the push order navigation image may be configured to overlap at least partially.Furthermore, the display area of the NEXT image and the display area of the push order navigation image may be configured to overlap at least partially.However, in this case, the slide image and NEXT image are configured to be displayed after the third stop operation.

By configuring it in this way, the push order navigation image ceases to be displayed when the third stop operation is performed, so the push order navigation image and the slide image, or the push order navigation image and the NEXT image, are not displayed overlapping each other, and the push order navigation image, slide image, and NEXT image can all be displayed without reducing visibility.

Note that the display areas of the slide images and the subtitles are configured to overlap at least partially and may be displayed simultaneously, but depending on the importance of the displayed content, the display priority of the slide images may be set to be higher than the display priority of the subtitles, or conversely, the display priority of the subtitles may be set to be higher than the display priority of the slide images.

Furthermore, with regard to the timing for ending the display of the NEXT image and the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance (for example, the "Repel!" and "Defeat...?" images in FIG. 46, and the "Bloom!" and "Too bad!?" images in FIG. 47), the display is configured so that neither the NEXT image nor the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance ends depending on the amount of time that has passed since it was displayed. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the player from missing important information for understanding the progress of the consecutive performance.

The NEXT image may be configured to not end its display even if a bet operation for the next game is performed (including a bet operation by operating the MAX bet switch 18, a bet operation by operating the 1 bet switch 19, or a bet operation by manually inserting medals), but to end its display when the start switch 12 is operated to start the next game, and the image relating to the result of the continuous performance may be configured to end its display when a bet operation for the next game is performed. In this way, by not ending the display of the NEXT image due to a bet operation, it is possible to emphasize that the continuous performance will continue in the next game.

Furthermore, the display areas for the NEXT image and the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance are configured to be different. For example, as shown in FIG. 46, the NEXT image is displayed in a specified display area at the bottom right of the LCD, and the image relating to the result of the consecutive performance is displayed in a specified display area at the bottom left or top left of the LCD. In this way, by varying the display position depending on the image being displayed, the player's viewpoint can be appropriately guided, allowing the player to focus on the entire LCD.

Also, as described above, the NEXT image and the image related to the result of the continuous performance may be configured to be displayed as time passes after the start switch 12 is operated to start the game, or may be configured to be displayed as time passes after the third stop operation (sometimes called the final stop operation) on the stop switch 13 is operated.

Here, the time (t2) from when the start switch 12 is operated or the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13 until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is designed to be longer than the time (t1) from when the start switch 12 is operated or the third stop operation is performed on the stop switch 13 until the NEXT image is displayed.

Specifically, (1) it is designed so that the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the NEXT image is displayed. (2) it is designed so that the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the NEXT image is displayed. (3) it is designed so that the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the NEXT image is displayed. (4) it is designed so that the time from when the start switch 12 is operated until the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed is longer than the time from when the third stop operation is performed until the NEXT image is displayed.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation until an image showing the result of the continuous performance is displayed.

Also, as mentioned above, the NEXT image is first displayed at the bottom left of the LCD screen, then moves to the bottom right of the LCD screen, where it stops and is displayed. In other words, the NEXT image is configured so that the position at which it starts to be displayed (the display area where it starts to be displayed) and the position at which it ends to be displayed (the display area where it ends to be displayed) are different. On the other hand, the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is displayed without moving from the time it starts to the time it ends. In other words, the image relating to the result of the continuous performance is configured so that the position at which it starts to be displayed and the position at which it ends to be displayed are the same. In this way, by displaying the NEXT image while moving, it is possible to effectively convey to the player that the continuous performance will continue in the next game. Also, by displaying the image relating to the result of the continuous performance without moving its display position, it is possible to draw attention to the result of the continuous performance.

<Navigation image> Next, the navigation image in this embodiment will be described. Note that, although the push order navigation image (sometimes called stop operation information) will be described here, it is not limited to the push order navigation image, and may also be applied to the above-mentioned button press navigation image and operation mode navigation image.

In this embodiment, for example, during an AT or other game in which the push order bell is selected as a result of an internal lottery, information suggesting advantageous operation of the stop switch (such as being awarded the maximum amount of gaming media that can be obtained in that game) can be displayed on the LCD as a push order navigation image. Specifically, the numbers "1," "2," and "3" can be used to indicate six different push orders, with "1" indicating the stop switch operated as the first stop operation, "2" indicating the stop button operated as the second stop operation, and "3" indicating the stop button operated as the third stop.

The first stop operation or the third stop operation may be configured as a two-choice push (whether to operate the stop switch at reel positions 1 to 10 or 11 to 20, for example, with the push order navigation image indicating either the image of the blue 7 or the image of the red 7), and combined with the six push order options to indicate 12 different operation modes. The push order navigation image displayed on the left side of the LCD corresponds to the left reel 8a, the push order navigation image displayed near the center of the LCD corresponds to the middle reel 8b, and the push order navigation image displayed on the right side of the LCD corresponds to the right reel 8c. For example, when "123" is displayed as the push order navigation image, it indicates the push order for operating the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a, middle reel 8b, and right reel 8c. In this embodiment, a part of the push order navigation image, such as "1", may be referred to as the "push order navigation image", and the entire push order navigation image, such as "123", may be referred to as the "push order navigation image".

<Modes of push order navigation image> Figure 50 shows an example of a mode of the push order navigation image in this embodiment. Figure 50 explains an example of a push order navigation image for the first stop operation, but the same configuration is also applied to the second stop operation and the third stop operation.

The push order navigation image is composed of a "navigation number image" and a "navigation background image", and is configured to have at least four display modes for the push order navigation image: "normal mode", "highlighted mode", "failed mode", and "successful mode".

The navigation number image is an image of numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed. The navigation background image is a decorative image around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed, or an image that shows an effect around the numbers that indicate the order in which buttons should be pressed.

First, <1> in Figure 50 is a push order navigation image in normal mode, in which a push order navigation image corresponding to a stop switch that should not currently be operated is displayed in normal mode. Note that the configuration is such that audio corresponding to the push order navigation image displayed in normal mode is not output. Furthermore, among the push order navigation images in normal mode, push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next and push order navigation images corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last may be displayed separately. In this case, a mode can be considered in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated next is displayed larger than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated last, and smaller than the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated.

Next, <2> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in an emphasized mode, in which the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should currently be operated is displayed in an emphasized mode. The push order navigation image displayed in an emphasized mode is configured to output a sound corresponding to the push order navigation image from the speaker S. For example, when it is time to operate the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a, a sound saying "left" is output. The push order navigation image in an emphasized mode has at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" larger than the push order navigation image in a normal mode, and is configured to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated. Furthermore, in addition to the size, the push order navigation image in an emphasized mode may be displayed brighter than the push order navigation image in a normal mode, or displayed in a color or font different from the normal mode, to visually notify the player of the stop switch that should currently be operated in an easy-to-understand manner.

Next, <3> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in a successful mode, and when the stop switch that is currently to be operated is operated (when the stop switch corresponding to the push order navigation image currently displayed in a highlighted mode is operated), the push order navigation image displayed in a highlighted mode is displayed in a successful mode. In other words, when the stop switch that is currently to be operated is operated in the correct operating mode, the push order navigation image displayed in a highlighted mode changes to a successful mode. In addition, when the stop switch that is currently to be operated is operated and the push order navigation image is displayed in a successful mode, a sound corresponding to the next push order is output (for example, when the stop switch corresponding to the center reel 8b should be operated next, a sound "It's the middle" is output from the speaker S), and the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that is to be operated next is displayed in a highlighted mode. In addition, the push order navigation image in the successful mode is configured to end its display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, when the stop switch is operated in the correct manner, a sound effect or voice (sometimes called a success sound) indicating that the pressing sequence is correct may be output from the speaker S. By configuring it in this way, the player can recognize that the stop switch has been operated in the correct manner not only visually but also audibly.

In addition, the push order navigation image in the successful mode is configured so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is larger than the push order navigation image in the normal mode. Note that the push order navigation image in the emphasized mode and the push order navigation image in the successful mode are configured so that both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are approximately the same size.

Next, <4> in FIG. 50 is a push order navigation image in a failure mode, and when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated (when a stop switch corresponding to a push order navigation image displayed in a normal mode is operated), all push order navigation images currently displayed are displayed in a failure mode. In other words, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated to display the push order navigation image in a failure mode, all push order navigation images currently displayed change to a failure mode. In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated to display the push order navigation image in a failure mode, a sound indicating that the push order is incorrect (for example, a sound such as "What are you doing?", which may be called a failure sound) may be output from the speaker S, or a sound indicating that the push order is incorrect may not be output. In addition, the push order navigation image in the failure mode is configured to end its display after being displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). In addition, when a stop switch that should not be operated at present is operated, the push order navigation image in the failure mode may not be displayed, and the display of all push order navigation images may immediately end (shorter than the predetermined time).

In addition, when a stop switch that should not currently be operated is operated and all currently displayed push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state, the size of the push order navigation images is configured to remain the same as it was before the stop operation. In other words, the push order navigation images that were displayed in an highlighted state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the highlighted state size, and the push order navigation images that were displayed in a normal state before the stop operation are displayed as failed push order navigation images in the normal state size.

In addition, in this embodiment, the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the display of the push order navigation image in the successful mode is terminated is configured to be longer than the time from when the operation of the stop switch 13 is accepted to when the display of the push order navigation image in the unsuccessful mode is terminated.

This configuration gives players a sense of superiority when they succeed, and when they fail, it is less likely that other players will notice that they pressed the buttons incorrectly, which increases the fun of the game.

In addition, the push order navigation image may be configured to be displayed with effects for all modes, including the normal mode, the highlighted mode, the successful mode, and the unsuccessful mode, or may be configured to be displayed with effects for at least one mode of the push order navigation image.

Furthermore, the push order navigation image for all modes, including the normal mode, the highlighted mode, the successful mode, and the unsuccessful mode, may be configured to be displayed as moving images, or the push order navigation image for all modes may be displayed as still images, or the push order navigation image for at least one mode may be displayed as a moving image and the push order navigation image for the other modes may be displayed as still images.

Also, when the start switch 12 is operated to start a game, all push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, and then when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation) may be displayed in an highlighted manner. Also, when the start switch is operated to start a game, the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first may be displayed in an highlighted manner, and the other push order navigation images may be displayed in a normal manner, but from the start of display until the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as still images, and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, all push order navigation images may be displayed as moving images involving some kind of movement.

By configuring it in this way, it becomes easier for the player to visually recognize that the operation of the stop switch has been validated, and it is possible to prevent pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. When the operation of the stop switch is validated in this way, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in an emphasized manner, or the push order navigation image is changed from a still image to a moving image; this is sometimes referred to as a stop acceptance effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the start switch 12 is operated to start the game and the push order navigation image is displayed, a predetermined sound effect (sometimes called a navigation display sound) is output from the speaker S.

The timing for outputting the sound (e.g., "left") corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first from the speaker S may be immediately after the start switch 12 is operated, or when the reels start to spin, or when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective. In other words, it is sufficient that the speaker S is configured to output the sound at any timing between when the start switch 12 is operated and when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective.

By configuring it this way, even if the display of the push order navigation image is delayed due to a malfunction of the LCD display, the player can audibly recognize which stop switch should be operated first, which does not impede the progress of the game and prevents pushing the buttons incorrectly.

In addition, Figure 51 is an example of a case in which the push order navigation image is displayed on the LCD in this embodiment, and by displaying "123" on the LCD, it is shown that the correct push order is to operate the stop switches corresponding to the left reel 8a → the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b → the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c. In Figure 51, since the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated first, "1" is displayed in the push order navigation image in an highlighted state, and "2" and "3" are displayed in the normal state.

<Configuration relating to display of push order navigation image and power cut> Next, the display of the push order navigation image when a power cut occurs while the push order navigation image is being displayed and the power is restored without changing the settings will be described using an example in which the winning-A1 condition device is won during the AT and the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left, center, right" is displayed on the LCD. Note that the configuration relating to the display of the push order navigation image and power cut described below can be applied in appropriate combinations even when the timing of the power cut or the appearance of the push order navigation image is different (such as the push order navigation image "213" corresponding to the correct push order of "center, left, right"). It can also be applied in appropriate combinations with the <Configuration relating to display of push order navigation image and specified errors> described below.

(1) When the power is turned off before the first stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch that should be operated first (first stop operation), so it is displayed in an highlighted state, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal state. Also, because the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a should be operated as the first stop operation, the voice "Go left" is output from the speaker S. Note that the voice such as "Go left" that corresponds to the stop switch that should currently be operated is sometimes simply referred to as the navigation voice.

After that, while the first stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs and all display on the LCD is terminated (power is not turned on). After that, at a timing (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a specified navigation timing) such as when a drive voltage is supplied to the sub-control board after the power is restored and the drawing process can be executed, or when a drive voltage is supplied to the main control board and a command regarding the push order is sent to the sub-control board, the push order navigation image of "123" is displayed again on the LCD. Note that the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in an highlighted state, and the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal state. At this time, the navigation sound is not output again. At this time, the configuration may be such that the navigation display sound is not output again, or that it is output.

In this way, if the power is turned off after the push sequence navigation image is displayed but before the first stop operation, and then the power is restored, the push sequence navigation image will return but the navigation voice will not. By not outputting the navigation voice when the power is restored, the processing of the sub-control board when the power is restored is reduced, and the push sequence navigation image can be displayed quickly.

The navigation voice may be output again when the power is restored. By configuring it in this way, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity between before the power was cut and after the power is restored.

In addition, if the game is configured to execute the aforementioned operation acceptance effect when the operation of the stop switch becomes effective, the game may be configured to display the push order navigation image together with the stop acceptance effect when the power is restored after a power outage. By configuring the game in this way, the game can be played without any sense of incongruity between before the power outage and after the power is restored.

In addition, when the power is restored after a power outage, the push order navigation image may be configured to be displayed without the stop acceptance effect. By configuring it in this way, the processing of the sub-control board when the power is restored after a power outage can be reduced, and the push order navigation image can be displayed quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation image is displayed again when the power is restored after a power outage, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation may be configured to display both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image," while the other push order navigation images may be configured to display only the "navigation number image." This configuration reduces the processing load on the sub-control board when the power is restored after a power outage, allowing the push order navigation image to be displayed quickly.

In addition, when the push order navigation images are displayed again when the power is restored, both the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" can be displayed for all push order navigation images displayed when the power is restored. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to play without any sense of incongruity between before the power was lost and after the power is restored.

(2) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

Afterwards, while the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which power is not turned on). Then, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal state. In other words, the same images are displayed as after a stop is accepted when the push order for the first stop on the stop switches is the correct push order.

In addition, at this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

Also, at this time, as before the power failure, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if it was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since its display began before the power failure. Note that, when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is displayed again after the power failure is restored, it may be configured to be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if the power is restored during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the power outage was the correct mode.

In addition, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to concentrate on the stopping operations that the player currently needs to perform.

(3) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and the power is subsequently turned off before the second stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in a failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images is terminated. Also, a sound saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD display is terminated (power is not turned on). After that, even if the drawing process can be executed after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is not displayed. Also, no failure sound is output at this time to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image will not be displayed again after the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Furthermore, as described above, if the stop switch is operated in a correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation is displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation is displayed in a normal manner. On the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored (referred to as navigation timing even if navigation is not actually performed), the push order navigation image is not displayed.

By configuring it in this way, the display after power recovery can be appropriately performed according to the game situation before the power was cut, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut, the player can return to play without lowering his or her expectations (without inadvertently raising his or her expectations).

Note that if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed again in a failed manner at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. Note that even in this case, no failure sound or navigation voice indicating that the push order was incorrect is output after the power is restored. Furthermore, when the push order navigation image in a failed manner is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to be terminated when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be terminated immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

When configured in this manner, if the stop switch is operated in a correct manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation will be displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image corresponding to the second stop operation will be displayed in an highlighted manner, and the push order navigation image corresponding to the third stop operation will be displayed in a normal manner; on the other hand, if the stop switch is operated in an incorrect manner as the first stop operation and then a power outage occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, all push order navigation images will be displayed in an unsuccessful manner.

This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, if the stop switch was operated in an incorrect mode before the power was cut off, even if it takes several minutes for the power to be restored after the power is cut off, the push order navigation image for the failed mode is displayed after the power is restored, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

(4) When the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and the power is then turned off before the third stop operation When the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, and is therefore displayed in an emphasized manner, while the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD display ends (power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of both are displayed at approximately the same size. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image of the successful state of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored from the power cut, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display started before the power was cut off. In addition, when the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is displayed again after the power is restored from a power outage, it may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted manner.

By configuring it this way, even if the power is turned off and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was turned off can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong order. In particular, since the press order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in a correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power outage is restored, the push order navigation image of "1" may be displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image of "2" may be displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" may be displayed in an emphasized manner. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images of "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner, so that the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images of the successful manner of "1" and "2" are configured to be displayed again when the power outage is restored, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display was started before the power outage. In addition, when the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "1" and "2" is displayed again after the power is restored, the display may be configured to end when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the push order navigation image was displayed again, or the display may be configured to end immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since the push order navigation image was displayed again. In other words, before the power is turned off, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images of the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at different times, but after the power is turned off, the push order navigation images of the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if the power is cut off and restored during AT, the operation state of the stop switch before the power was cut can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the buttons incorrectly. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation images corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful manner, it is possible to clearly show that only the third stop remains and that the correct push order has been followed.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized manner. Note that in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to concentrate on the stopping operations that the player currently needs to perform.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then the power is turned off before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" ceases. In addition, the sound "What are you doing?" is output from the speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, before the third stop operation has been performed, a power outage occurs and all LCD displays cease (a state in which the power is not turned on). After that, even if the specified navigation timing arrives after the power is restored, the push order navigation image will not be displayed. At this time, no failure sound will be output to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect manner before the power was cut off, the push order navigation image is not displayed again when the power is restored, allowing the player to return to play without lowering their expectations (and without inadvertently raising their expectations).

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct manner, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful manner at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed manner. Also, in this case, no failure sound is output after the power is restored to indicate that the push order was incorrect. Note that when the push order navigation image in the failed manner is displayed again after the power is restored, it may be configured to cease displaying after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to cease displaying immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, by redisplaying the push order navigation image corresponding to the stop operation in the correct mode, the player can understand which stop operation he or she performed incorrectly.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in a correct mode, then the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect mode, and then a power outage occurs before the third stop operation, all push order navigation images may be configured to be displayed in a failed mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. Also, in this case, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect after the power is restored. Note that the push order navigation image in the failed mode may be configured to end its display when it is displayed again after a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if it takes several minutes from the power outage to the power recovery, the push order navigation image in the failed mode is displayed after the power is restored, so that it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because there is no payout or only one coin or the like is paid out despite the AT being in progress.

(6) When the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the power is then turned off before the third stop operation, the third stop is performed after the power is restored, and then the power is turned off again. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a power outage occurs, and all LCD displays end (a state where the power is not turned on). Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. When the push order navigation image for the successful state of "2" (the push order navigation images for the successful states of "1" and "2" if the push order navigation for the successful state of "1" is also configured to be displayed), if it is displayed again after the power is restored from the power outage, it may be configured to end its display when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to immediately end its display even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

Then, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is terminated (if the push order navigation for the successful mode of "1" is also configured to be displayed, the display of the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" is also terminated), and in a situation where the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, if the third stop operation is performed in the correct mode, the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the successful mode. Also, at this time, a specified image (sometimes called a GET image) is configured to be displayed indicating that all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode.

After that, when the stop operation is performed up to the third stop, the power is cut off again and all display on the LCD screen is terminated. After that, even after the power is restored, the push order navigation image and the GET image are not displayed. At this time, the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation are not output.

By configuring it in this way, the player can smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, since no new stop operation is required after the third stop, by not reproducing the push order navigation image, the player can effectively understand that no new stop operation is required.

In addition, if the operation is performed correctly up to the third stop operation and then a power outage occurs again, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be configured to be displayed again in the successful mode at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly see that all stop operations have been performed in the correct manner.

If the second power outage occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed or is displayed in a successful state at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted state. If the second power outage occurs after the payout process is executed, the push order navigation image is not displayed at the specified navigation timing after the power is restored. In this way, the display content after the power is restored may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the power outage was before or after the payout process was executed.

<Explanation of Rare Role Navigation Image> In addition, in this embodiment, in a game in which a so-called rare role such as a cherry role or a watermelon role is won, the navigation image (sometimes referred to as a rare role navigation image) is configured to display "!!!" as a navigation image indicating the possibility of winning a rare role. The navigation background image of the rare role navigation image and the navigation background image of the push order navigation image are displayed in the same or nearly the same manner. In other words, the push order navigation image and the rare role navigation image are configured to be similar images, although the "numbers" and "!" are different. The rare role navigation image may be configured to be displayed only when any rare role is won, or may be displayed when a specified bonus (for example, the first hit of the AT,
When it has been decided that a special bonus (such as an addition to the AT or transition to a chance zone) will be awarded, the results of the internal lottery may be displayed even in a game that results in a loss or a replay, as a presentation suggesting the possibility of a specified bonus being awarded.

In addition, since there is no advantage or disadvantage to the rare role navigation image depending on the push order, it is configured to always be displayed at the same size during one game (the size does not differ between the normal mode and the highlighted mode, as with the push order navigation image).

In addition, in a game in which the rare role navigation image is displayed, a power outage occurs at any timing before the third stop operation is performed (when the start switch 12 is operated, when the first stop operation is performed, when the second stop operation is performed, when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), and all LCD display ends (state where power is not turned on). After that, the rare role navigation image is configured to be displayed again at a specified navigation timing after the power is restored. Note that, regardless of when the power outage occurs, the rare role navigation image that is displayed again when the power is restored is displayed in the display mode after the start switch 12 is operated, such as "!!!".

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, it allows the player to maintain a sense of hope that they may win a rare combination. It also prevents the player from missing out on a rare combination.

In addition, in a game in which a rare role navigation image is displayed, if a power outage occurs at any time before the third stop operation is performed (the time when the start switch 12 is operated, the time when the first stop operation is performed, the time when the second stop operation is performed, the time when the third stop operation is performed, etc.), the rare role navigation image may be configured not to be displayed again after the power is restored.

By configuring it in this way, players can avoid confusing the push order navigation image with the rare role navigation image.

The rare role navigation images may be configured to end display one by one in response to a stop operation, or may be configured to display all rare role navigation images at the timing when the first stop operation is performed. In addition, when configured to end display of the rare role navigation images one by one for each stop operation, the display may be configured to end in response to the stop ancestor operation in the order of the left rare role navigation image, the middle rare role navigation image, and the right rare role navigation image, regardless of which stop switch 13 was operated, or the display may be configured to end in response to the stop ancestor operation of the rare role navigation image at the position corresponding to the stop switch 13 where the stop operation was performed.

<Configuration for displaying push order navigation image and errors> Next, regarding the display of the push order navigation image after a specified error (medal retention error, medal backflow error, hopper empty error, etc.) occurs while displaying the push order navigation image and the specified error is then cleared, an example will be described in which the winning-A1 condition device is won during the AT, the push order navigation image "123" corresponding to the correct push order of "left, middle, right" is displayed on the LCD, and a hopper empty error occurs as a specified error. Note that the configuration for displaying the push order navigation image and the specified errors described below can be applied in appropriate combinations even when the timing of the occurrence of the specified error or the appearance of the push order navigation image is different. It can also be applied in appropriate combinations with the above-mentioned <Configuration for displaying push order navigation image and power cut>.

(1) When the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation. First, as shown in FIG. 52, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal mode. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal mode.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, before the second stop operation has been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, the push order navigation image becomes invisible (this can be made invisible by ending the display, or by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the LCD screen), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed.

Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in a normal mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the second stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of "1" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image of "3" displayed in a normal mode. Also, at this time, the push order navigation image of the successful mode of "1" is configured to be displayed again when the power is turned off and restored, even if the display was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display was started before the occurrence of the hopper empty error.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. Furthermore, because the push order navigation image for the successful mode is also displayed again, the player can be made aware that the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred was the correct mode.

Also, if the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs before the second stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in an highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a normal mode.

By configuring it this way, the player can concentrate on the stopping operation that he or she is currently performing.

The display mode of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 52 and the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" of the push order navigation image shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are configured to have different designs (pictures, font of numbers, color, etc.). In this way, the design of the push order navigation image may be configured to be changed appropriately depending on the game situation. For example, when the expectation degree for the addition of AT is in a normal state, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, and when it is in a high probability state, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 52. In addition, it may be configured to be possible to select a presentation mode related to the presentation tendency during the AT, and when a predetermined presentation mode is set, the push order navigation image may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, and when a specific presentation mode is set, the push order navigation may be displayed with the design shown in FIG. 52.

By configuring it in this way, players can visually grasp the current game situation through the design of the push order navigation image.

(2) When the first and second stop operations are performed correctly, and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and the display of the push order navigation image becomes invisible (it may be made invisible by ending the display, or may be made invisible by displaying an image related to the error on the front of the liquid crystal), and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, the push order navigation image of "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. Also, at this time, as before the occurrence of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image of "2" is displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation image of "3" is displayed in an emphasized state, so that the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" of both are displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" is configured to be displayed again when the power is restored, even if its display has ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since its display began before the power was cut off.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "2" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in the correct mode, and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation, then at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, the push order navigation image for "1" is not displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode. By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the occurrence of the specified error can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from making a mistake in the push order. In particular, since the push order navigation image corresponding to the first stop operation is not reproduced, the player can focus on the third stop.

In addition, if the first stop operation and the second stop operation are performed in a correct manner and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful manner, the push order navigation image for "2" may be displayed in a successful manner, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in an highlighted manner.

In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output.

In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an highlighted mode, so that the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" are all displayed at approximately the same size. In addition, at this time, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" are configured to be displayed again when the hopper empty error is cleared, even if they had ceased to be displayed because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since their display began before the occurrence of the hopper empty error. Note that the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" may be configured to cease to be displayed when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since their re-display, or may be configured to cease to be displayed immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since their re-display. In other words, before the hopper empty error occurs, the display mode of the push order navigation image changes with each stop operation, so the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at different times, but after the hopper empty error is cleared, the push order navigation images for the successful modes of "1" and "2" end displaying at the same time.

By configuring it in this way, even if a specified error occurs during AT, the operation mode of the stop switch before the specified error occurred can be accurately displayed, preventing the player from pressing the wrong button in the wrong order. In particular, by displaying the push order navigation image corresponding to the first and second stops in a successful mode, it is possible to clearly show that only the third stop remains, and that the correct push order has been followed.

Also, if the first and second stop operations are performed in the correct manner, and then a hopper empty error occurs before the third stop operation, then at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may not be displayed, the push order navigation image for "2" may not be displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" may be displayed in the normal manner. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. By configuring in this manner, the player can concentrate on the stop operation that should currently be performed.

(3) When the first three stop operations are performed correctly and a specified error occurs afterwards First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, because the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, when the second stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the middle reel 8b is operated), the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode. In addition, the navigation voice "Go right" corresponding to the third stop is output from the speaker S. At this time, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in a successful mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in an emphasized mode, so that the "navigation number images" and "navigation background images" of both are displayed at approximately the same size.

After that, when the third stop operation is performed (i.e., the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c, which was the last stop operation, is operated), the push order navigation image "3" is displayed in a successful mode. At this time, all stop operations have been performed in the correct mode, so the GET image is displayed.

After that, a hopper empty error occurs and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error ends, and the push order navigation image of "1", "2", and "3" is displayed again in the successful mode. At this time, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be configured to be output again, or none of them may be output. At this time, the push order navigation images of the successful mode of "1", "2", and "3" are configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is released, even if their display ended because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the start of their display before the hopper empty error occurred. At this time, the GET image may be configured to be displayed again, or not displayed.

Then, the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "1," "2," and "3" may be configured to be turned off when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or may be configured to be turned off immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

This configuration allows the player to easily understand the game situation. In particular, after a specified error is resolved, all push order navigation images are reproduced in a successful manner, making it clear that all stop operations were performed in the correct manner.

Also, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed in the correct mode and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the push order navigation images for "1" and "2" are not displayed, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in a successful mode. In this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, the success sound, and the navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. In addition, at this time, even if the push order navigation image for the successful mode of "3" was terminated because a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) had elapsed since the display began before the hopper empty error occurred, it may be configured to be displayed again after the hopper empty error is released, and the display may be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to be immediately terminated even before the predetermined time has elapsed since it was displayed again. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to clearly show that the third stop operation was performed as the stop operation immediately before the occurrence of the specified error, and that the third stop operation was performed in the correct manner.

Also, if the third stop operation (final stop operation) is performed correctly and then a hopper empty error occurs, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error may be terminated at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, and none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" may be displayed. Note that even in this case, at least one of the navigation display sound, success sound, and navigation voice corresponding to the third stop operation may be output again, or none of them may be output. By configuring in this way, the player can recognize that the final stop operation has already been completed.

In addition, if the specified error occurs before the payout process is executed, the push order navigation images "1" to "3" are configured to be displayed in a successful manner at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared, and if the specified error occurs after the payout process is executed, none of the push order navigation images "1" to "3" are displayed at the specified navigation timing after the specified error is cleared. In other words, the display content after the specified error is cleared may be configured to differ depending on whether the situation before the specified error occurred was before or after the payout process was executed.

(4) When the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, and then a specified error occurs before the second stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to center reel 8b is operated), all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in a failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images is terminated. Also, a sound saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

After that, in a situation where the second stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs, and an image related to the hopper empty error is displayed. After that, at a predetermined navigation timing after the hopper empty error is released, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error is terminated, and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in the failed state is displayed again after the power is turned off and restored, the display may be terminated when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the push order navigation image was displayed again, or the display may be terminated immediately even before the predetermined time has elapsed since the push order navigation image was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

(5) When the first stop operation is performed correctly, the second stop operation is performed incorrectly, and then a specified error occurs before the third stop operation. First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, when the first stop operation is performed in the correct mode (i.e. the stop switch corresponding to the left reel 8a is operated), the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode, the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, and the push order navigation image for "3" is displayed in the normal mode. In addition, the navigation voice "It's in the middle" corresponding to the second stop operation is output from the speaker S. At this time, since the push order navigation image for "1" is displayed in the successful mode and the push order navigation image for "2" is displayed in the highlighted mode, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation image for "3" which is displayed in the normal mode.

After that, if the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner (for example, the stop switch corresponding to the right reel 8c is operated), the push order navigation images of "2" and "3" are displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since they were displayed in the failed manner, the display of all push order navigation images ceases. Also, a voice saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order was incorrect.

Afterwards, in a situation where the third stop operation has not yet been performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, the push order navigation image for "1" may be displayed in a successful state, and the push order navigation images for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused the push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and the push order navigation image for "2" and "3" may be displayed in a failed state. This configuration allows the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, it is possible to clarify which stop operation caused the push order error.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

(6) When the first or second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner and a specified error occurs after the third stop operation First, when the start switch 12 is operated, the push order navigation image "123" is displayed on the LCD. Here, the push order navigation image "1" corresponds to the stop switch (first stop operation) that should be operated first, so it is displayed in an emphasized manner, and the push order navigation images "2" and "3" are displayed in a normal manner. In addition, a navigation voice saying "Go left" corresponding to the first stop operation is output. Note that at this time, since the push order navigation image "1" is displayed in an emphasized manner, at least one of the "navigation number image" and the "navigation background image" is displayed larger than the push order navigation images "2" and "3" that are displayed in a normal manner.

After that, if the first stop operation or the second stop operation is performed in an incorrect manner, the push order navigation image that is displayed at the time when the push order is incorrectly performed is displayed in a failed manner, and when a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the push order navigation image was displayed in the failed manner, the display of the push order navigation image is terminated. In addition, a voice message saying "What are you doing?" is output from speaker S to indicate that the push order has been incorrect.

Then, after the third stop operation is performed, a hopper empty error occurs and an image relating to the hopper empty error is displayed. Then, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of the image relating to the hopper empty error ends and all push order navigation images are displayed in a failed state. At this time, no failure sound is output to indicate that the push order was incorrect. When the push order navigation image in a failed state is displayed again after power is restored, it may be configured to end its display when a specified time (e.g., 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since it was displayed again, or it may be configured to end its display immediately even before the specified time has elapsed since it was displayed again.

In this way, if the stop operation was performed in an incorrect mode before the hopper empty error occurred, the push order navigation image is displayed again in a failed mode after the hopper empty error is cleared, allowing the player to smoothly understand the game situation. In particular, even if it takes several minutes from the occurrence of the hopper empty error to the clearing of the hopper empty error, the push order navigation image in a failed mode is displayed after the hopper empty error is cleared, so it is possible to prevent the player from mistakingly assuming that the gaming machine is broken because no payout or only a small payout (such as one coin) has been made despite the AT being in progress.

Also, at a specified navigation timing after the hopper empty error is cleared, the display of images related to the hopper empty error may be terminated, and all push order navigation images may not be displayed. In this way, by not displaying the push order navigation image of the failed mode again after the hopper empty error is cleared, the player can return to playing without lowering their expectations.

<Configuration for displaying push order navigation image and reel stop warning image> In addition, in a game in which the push order bell is won as a result of an internal lottery and the push order navigation image is displayed, the above-mentioned reel stop warning image (also called a stop promotion image) is displayed because a predetermined time (3 minutes) has passed since the start of reel rotation (or the first stop operation or the second stop operation) without a stop operation being performed, and then the reel stop warning image and the push order navigation image are displayed at the same time, a power outage occurs, and then at a predetermined navigation timing after the power is restored, the push order navigation image is displayed again, but the reel stop warning image may not be displayed again. By configuring in this way, even if an unexpected power outage occurs during a game, the player can concentrate on the push order navigation image, so it is possible to prevent mistakes in pushing the buttons. Note that the above-mentioned <Configuration for displaying push order navigation image and power outage> can be applied as appropriate to the display mode of the push order navigation image at this time.

<Description of hopper 44 errors and winning lamp effects applicable to this embodiment> Next, the relationship between hopper 44 errors and winning lamp effects applicable to this embodiment will be described.

In the effects applicable to this embodiment described below, the purpose is to properly let the player know that he or she has won by executing winning lamp effects based on winning minor roles such as push order roles, or winning lamp effects based on winning replay roles such as replay roles. Also, even if a hopper empty error occurs after winning, the purpose is to let the player know the results of the game before the error occurs.

The following describes the configuration related to errors related to the hopper 44 and the winning lamp effect that can be applied to this embodiment.

<Winning LED lamp> This is part (not shown) of the performance lamp (LED lamp) installed on the front panel PS2, and is a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when a prize is won. It is also a lamp that lights up, flashes, etc. when an error such as a door open error or a hopper empty error occurs.

<Main control means> The main processes of the main control means are as described in this embodiment, the explanation of the winning effects, settlement effects, and deposit effects that are applicable to this embodiment, and the errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 that are applicable to this embodiment, but details of the processes omitted in the description of this embodiment are described below.

<Push Order Role> This is a role that can be won in the role lottery (internal lottery), and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning push order role is displayed on the active line, and when it is determined that a prize has been won by the winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is displayed. The symbol combinations that can be displayed for the push order role include correct symbol combinations that are displayed when the correct push order is followed, and incorrect symbol combinations that are displayed when the correct push order is not followed. The correct symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a bell symbol, mainly consisting of yellow, such as bell-bell-bell, on the active line, and 12 coins are paid out. The incorrect symbol combination is a symbol combination that displays a blank-replay-watermelon, etc. on the active line, and 1 coin is paid out.

<Cherry role> This is a role that can be won in the role lottery (internal lottery). The symbol combination corresponding to the winning Cherry role is displayed frozen on the winning line, and when it is determined to be a win by the winning determination process, medals are paid out based on the symbol combination that is frozen. The symbol combination that corresponds to the Cherry role is a symbol combination in which cherry symbols that are mainly composed of red, such as Cherry-Cherry-Cherry, are displayed frozen on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

<Replay role> This is a role that can be won in the role lottery (internal lottery). The symbol combination corresponding to the winning Replay role is displayed frozen on the winning line, and when it is determined to be a winning prize by the winning determination process, a replay is awarded based on the symbol combination that is frozen. The symbol combination that corresponds to the Replay role is a symbol combination that displays replay symbols, mainly composed of blue, frozen on the winning line, such as Replay-Replay-Replay.

<Winning Process (Payout Process)> The winning process is a process for paying out predetermined game medals according to the winning minor winning combination (the stopped and displayed symbol combination) when it is determined by the winning determination process that a minor winning combination has been won. Paying out game medals here means that if the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit, the credits are added, and if the accumulated credits have reached the upper limit, the game medals are paid out from the hopper 44. The main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means when starting a payout based on a winning combination (whether it is an addition of credits or a payout from the hopper 44), and transmits a payout end command to the sub-control means when ending the payout based on a winning combination. Based on the payout start command and payout end command, the sub-control means can execute winning combinations such as outputting the payout sound of the game medals, executing a back lamp effect (also called a BL effect), and executing a winning lamp effect. The payout start command includes information on the number of game medals to be paid out, and the payout start command and payout end command are sent even when there is no payout (when there is a loss or a replay win). When there is a loss or a replay win, the number of game medals to be paid out is sent as 0, followed by a payout end command. When a replay win is won, the secondary control means can execute winning effects such as outputting the winning sound of the replay and backlight effects based on the payout start command and payout end command.

<Automatic insertion process> The automatic insertion process (automatic bet process) is a process that is executed when it is determined by the winning determination process that a replay role has won. In the automatic insertion process, a bet is automatically set for the same number of coins as the number of coins bet on the game in which the replay role won, without inserting game medals. When the automatic insertion process is executed, the main control means (main control board 100) transmits an automatic insertion command to the sub-control means according to the number of coins bet (inserted). Note that in this embodiment, the sub-control means does not execute an insertion effect (output of an insertion sound) based on the automatic insertion command, but may execute an insertion effect such as outputting an insertion sound in the same way as when a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received.

Even after the automatic insertion process, if the settlement switch is operated, settlement processing is possible in the same way as before starting play when game medals have been bet or stored in the credits (after the required bet number has been set and before the start lever has been operated). However, in the settlement processing after the automatic insertion process, the bet amount set for the bet is not paid out, and instead, a number of game medals corresponding to the amount of stored credits is paid out to the player from the hopper 44 (settlement) processing is executed.

<Secondary control means> Various effects can be executed depending on the progress of the game, and effects such as those described in the explanation of the winning effect, settlement effect, and deposit effect that are applicable to this embodiment, and errors and winning effects related to the hopper 44 that are applicable to this embodiment, are executed. In this embodiment, a winning lamp effect is also executed.

<Winning Effects> These effects are executed when game medals are paid out, or when a symbol corresponding to a replay role wins (is displayed), and are executed based on a payout start command, a payout end command, etc. When game medals are paid out, a payout sound indicating that game medals are being paid out, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. When a symbol corresponding to a replay role wins, a winning sound indicating that a replay has won, a backlight effect, and a winning lamp effect are executed. Note that if a push order role is won in the role lottery (internal lottery) and an incorrect symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line, it is possible to prevent the winning effect from being executed.

<Output of payout sounds> There are two different payout sounds for game medals that are output during the execution of the game medal payout process: payout sound A and payout sound C. Payout sound A is the payout sound that is output when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops, and an advantageous payout (payout of 12 game medals) is made. Payout sound C is the payout sound that is output when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the pattern combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and a payout (payout of 1 game medal) is made.

Payout sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a first sound (e.g., a "zu" sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of the first sound for a first specific time (e.g., 1 second). Payout sound A outputs a sound for a first payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which actual payout is being performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is being performed (the period during which the payout process is performed, e.g., about 1.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by outputting the payout sound for a predetermined payout sound period that is longer than the period during which payout is being performed, the player is made to recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the payout sound is being output, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. As a result, when a performance according to the result of an internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to perform the performance without being canceled midway.

The payout sound C starts when a payout start command is received, and repeats the output of a third sound (e.g., a buzzing sound) until a payout end command is received, and then ends after repeating the output of a predetermined sound for a fourth specific time (e.g., 1.5 seconds) after receiving the payout end command. That is, the payout sound C outputs a sound for a third payout sound period (a period obtained by adding the fourth specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), and this third payout sound period is shorter than the first payout sound period of the payout sound A because the number of game medals paid out is smaller. In this way, the payout sound C is shorter than the payout sound A, but by outputting the payout sound for a period longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can be sure not to miss the payout, even though it is a small number of medals, and can recognize that game medals have been awarded. The output of the payout sound is not canceled (ended) by betting settings (receiving a coin insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

Note that the payout sound starts to be output after the start payout command is received, and is output until a predetermined time has elapsed after the end payout command is received. However, once the start payout command is received, the payout sound may be output for a predetermined time that is the sum of the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between adding credits and paying out game medals) plus a first specific time or a fourth specific time, without being triggered by the end payout command. Also, although payout sound A and payout sound C are different in the above embodiment, the same payout sound may be output.

<Output of winning sound> Winning sound A is a winning sound that is output when a replay role is won. Winning sound A starts when a payout start command is received, and is a winning sound that outputs a fourth sound (e.g., a "ji" sound) until a fifth specific time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed. By outputting the winning sound for a certain period of time, the player can ensure that he or she does not miss it, and can recognize that a replay role has won. The output of the winning sound is not canceled (ended) by a payout end command or bet setting (reception of an automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch acceptance command). The output time of winning sound A may be configured to end before automatic insertion is performed, or by the time game start operation becomes possible.

<Backlamp Effects> There are three different types of backlamp effects: backlamp effect A, backlamp effect C, and backlamp effect D. Backlamp effect A is a backlamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), the correct symbol combination stops as a result of the correct push order, and 12 coins are paid out. Backlamp effect C is a backlamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Backlamp effect D is a backlamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

The back lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern until a payout end command is received. After the payout end command is received, the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in a first pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The back lamp performance A is executed for a first back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.2 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance A for a first back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp performance A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of an internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. In addition, backlight performance A is canceled (ended) when a bet is set (a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command is received).

The back lamp performance C starts when a payout start command is received, and the back lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the third pattern until a payout end command is received, and then ends after the payout end command is received by repeatedly turning on and off the back lamp in the third pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second). The back lamp performance C is executed for a third back lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which actual payout is performed (for example, about 0.2 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp performance C for a third back lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the back lamp performance C is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game can be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway.
In addition, like back lamp effect A, back lamp effect C is canceled (ended) upon bet setting (reception of a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command).

The back lamp effect D starts when a payout start command is received, and ends after repeatedly turning on and off the back lamp in the fourth pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second). By executing the back lamp effect D for the fourth back lamp effect period (the same period as the first specific time), it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that a replay role has been won. In addition, by executing (outputting) the back lamp effect D for the fourth back lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that processing based on the replay role is being performed during the period in which the back lamp effect D is being executed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. Note that the back lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

<Winning lamp effects> There are three different winning lamp effects: winning lamp effect A, winning lamp effect C, and winning lamp effect D. Winning lamp effect A is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a push order role is won during normal play (non-AT), and as a result of operating in the correct push order, the correct pattern combination stops and 12 coins are paid out. Winning lamp effect C is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a cherry role is won during normal play (non-AT), the pattern combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, and 1 coin is paid out. Winning lamp effect D is a winning lamp effect that is output (executed) when a replay role is won during normal play (non-AT), and the pattern combination corresponding to the replay role stops.

The winning lamp performance A starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in yellow until a payout end command is received (fifth pattern), and after the payout end command is received, the winning LED lamp is repeatedly turned on and off in the fifth pattern for a first specific time (for example, 1 second) and ends. The winning lamp performance A is executed for a first winning lamp performance period (a period obtained by adding the above-mentioned first specific time to the period during which the actual payout is performed) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (for example, about 1.5 seconds), so that the player can easily recognize that a payout is being performed. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp performance A for a first winning lamp performance period that is longer than the period during which the payout is performed, the player can recognize that a payout is being performed during the period during which the winning lamp performance A is being performed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed, and further, when a performance according to the result of the internal lottery is performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute it without being canceled midway. In addition, the winning lamp effect A is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by the game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect C starts when a payout start command is received, and the winning LED lamp repeatedly turns on and off in red (sixth pattern) until a payout end command is received, and ends after the payout end command is received by repeatedly turning on and off the winning LED lamp in the sixth pattern for a sixth specific time (e.g., 2.3 seconds). The winning lamp effect C is executed for a third winning lamp effect period (the period during which the actual payout is performed plus the sixth specific time, which is the same length as the first winning lamp effect period) that is longer than the period during which the actual payout is performed (e.g., about 0.2 seconds), making it easier for the player to recognize that a payout is being performed. Furthermore, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect C for a third winning lamp effect period that is longer than the period during which payouts are being made, the player is made to perceive the period during which the winning lamp effect C is being executed as if payouts were being made, which is expected to delay the start of the next game, and furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being executed over a certain period of time, it becomes easier to execute the effect without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect C is not canceled (ended) by betting settings (receiving a medal insertion command or a reserve insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (receiving a start switch acceptance command).

The winning lamp effect D starts when the payout start command is received, and ends after the winning LED lamp is repeatedly lit and extinguished in blue for a seventh specific time (for example, 2.5 seconds) (seventh pattern). The winning lamp effect D is executed for the fourth winning lamp effect period (the same period as the seventh specific time and the same length as the first winning lamp effect period), making it easier for the player to recognize that a replay role has been won. In addition, by executing (outputting) the winning lamp effect D for the fourth winning lamp effect period, the player is made to recognize that a process based on a replay role is being performed during the period in which the winning lamp effect D is being executed, and it is expected that the start time of the next game will be delayed. Furthermore, when an effect based on the result of an internal lottery is being performed over a certain period of time, it is easier to execute the effect without being canceled midway. Note that the winning lamp effect D is not canceled (ended) by betting setting (automatic insertion command), but is canceled (ended) by a game start operation (reception of a start switch reception command).

Winning lamp effects A, C, and D are configured so that the colors of the winning LED lamp when it lights up are different, but the lighting and blinking patterns and the length of the execution period are the same. By making the only difference in color, it becomes easier to recognize that the winning lamp effect is an effect caused by a winning role. Also, by making the execution period the same as the length of winning lamp effect A, when a cherry or replay role is won, the next game can start earlier than when the correct pattern combination for the push order role is displayed, but because the winning lamp effect is being executed, it is expected that the start of the next game will be delayed until the winning lamp effect ends.

Note that the winning lamp effects A and C were executed from the time the payout end command was received until the first specific time or the sixth specific time had elapsed, but when the payout start command was received, the winning lamp effect may be executed for a predetermined time that is the time taken from the start of payout to the end of payout (whichever is longer between the addition of credits and the payout of game medals) plus the first specific time or the sixth specific time, without being triggered by the payout end command. Also, the "first winning lamp effect period", "third winning lamp effect period", and "fourth winning lamp effect period" of the winning lamp effects A, C, and D are set to the same period as the "first payout sound period" of the payout sound A, but the "first winning lamp effect period", "third winning lamp effect period", and "fourth winning lamp effect period" may be set to a period different from the "first payout sound period". It is preferable that the "first winning lamp performance period," "third winning lamp performance period," and "fourth winning lamp performance period" are the same period, and may be longer than the time required to pay out the maximum number of game medals that can be paid out in one game.

<Error Notification> When an error such as an error related to the hopper 44 or a door open error occurs, the main control means displays an error code on the winning number display 27, and the sub-control means notifies the occurrence of the error with the LCD (display device), speaker S, and winning LED lamp. The winning LED lamp lights up in red during the period when an error is being notified. The winning LED lamp also lights up in red when a cherry wins, but by keeping the red light on during an error notification, the pattern differs from when a cherry wins, making it possible to distinguish whether the error is being notified or a win.

<Settlement effect> This effect is executed when the game medals are settled, and a settlement sound (settlement effect) is output to indicate that the game medals are being paid out, and a sound is output to indicate that the settlement has been completed. In the settlement effect, no effects using winning LED lamps or back lamps are executed, so even if a payout has been performed, it is easy to recognize that this is different from the effects based on the winning of small roles or replay roles.

Hereinafter, various effects that are executed according to the progress of the game will be described with reference to Figures 53 to 62. Figure 53 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, Figure 54 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, Figure 55 is a time chart when no insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, Figure 56 is a time chart when an insertion operation is performed with the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the cherry role is completed, and Figure 57 is a time chart when no game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of the replay role is completed. FIG. 58 is a time chart when a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 59 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of a push order role is completed, FIG. 60 is a time chart when the settlement operation is performed with the settlement switch after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, FIG. 61 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper empty error occurs), and FIG. 62 is a time chart when payout is not performed normally after the winning of a cherry role (when a hopper retention error occurs).

Note that, for convenience of explanation, ON and OFF are used in Figs. 53 to 62, but the status of the corresponding process or presentation is described in parentheses. Specifically, for the payout process/settlement process/prize winning lamp presentation (prize winning LED lamp)/BL presentation/settlement presentation/error notification (prize winning LED lamp), ON indicates that the process is being executed, OFF indicates that the process is not being executed, and when it changes from OFF to ON, it means that the process is started, and when it changes from ON to OFF, it means that the process is finished. For the payout ON, it indicates that one game medal has been paid out, and OFF indicates that no game medal has been paid out. For the payout sound/insertion sound/prize winning sound, ON indicates that the game medal is being output, and OFF indicates that no game medal is being output. For the MAX bet lamp/medal insertion possible lamp, ON indicates that the lamp is lit, and OFF indicates that the lamp is off. For the MAX bet switch operation/settlement switch operation, ON indicates that the switch has been operated, and OFF indicates that the switch has not been operated. For medal insertion, ON indicates that the inserted game medal has passed through the medal selector 34 normally (the insertion sensor provided on the medal selector 34 has detected the game medal), and OFF indicates that no game medal has been inserted. For error (hopper empty) and error (hopper stuck), ON indicates that an error has occurred (an error has been detected and set), and OFF indicates that no error has occurred. For error display, ON indicates that an error code is being displayed by the main control means or an error screen is being displayed by the sub-control means based on the occurrence of an error, and OFF indicates that no error code or error screen is being displayed.

It can also be combined with the acquisition display effect, cumulative display effect, result announcement effect, push effect, and comment effect described above, and times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 31 to 41 are the same as times t0 to t5, t17, and t18 in Figures 53 to 62.

<When the MAX BET switch is not inserted after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed> Figure 53 shows the case where the correct push order role is played and the correct symbol combination is displayed and stopped as the winning of the push order role. At the timing of time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound A (written as payout sound in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command, the winning lamp performance A (written as winning lamp performance in the figure, the same below) on the winning LED lamp, and the back lamp performance A (written as BL performance in the figure, the same below) on the back lamp. The time related to the payout process is 1.5 seconds when it is normally executed (in this example, 12 game medals are normally paid out). At the timing of time t1, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means continues output of payout sound A, win lamp effect A, and back lamp effect A as winning effects for a period T1 (first specific time) based on the payout end command.

After the payout process is completed at time t1, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp based on the fact that it is possible to insert game medals at time t2. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. At time t5, since the T1 period has passed since time t1, the sub-control means ends the output of payout sound A, winning lamp presentation A, and back lamp presentation A. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be said to be the first payout sound period, the first back lamp presentation period, and the first winning lamp presentation period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of payout sound A, the winning lamp presentation A, and the back lamp presentation A, while turning on the MAX BET lamp, from time t1 onwards. By continuing the output of payout sound A, the winning lamp presentation A, and the back lamp presentation A, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX bet switch is operated to insert after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed> Figure 54 shows the case where the correct push order is operated, the correct symbol combination is displayed and a winning push order role is obtained. Up until the timing of time t2, the operation is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not operated to insert after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the MAX bet switch is operated to insert. As a result of the operation of the MAX bet switch, the main control means ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp, and the sub-control means ends the back lamp performance A, and outputs the insertion sound A (referred to as the insertion sound in the figure, the same below) three times as the insertion performance from the timing of time t3 to the timing of time t4 (during the T2 period). From time t3 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the payout sound A and performing the winning lamp performance A while outputting the insertion sound A. This allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, while also being aware that the MAX bet switch has been operated and a bet has been set, improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at time t3, the payout sound A is output and the winning lamp performance A continues, but by ending the back lamp performance A, the player can visually recognize that a bet has been set. Note that while FIG. 43 illustrates the insertion operation using the MAX bet switch, the back lamp performance A ends and the insertion sound A is output in the same way when the 1 bet switch is used to insert a coin or a coin is inserted.

<When the MAX BET switch is not used to insert the coin after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry symbol is completed> Figure 55 shows a case where the symbol combination corresponding to the Cherry symbol is displayed on the pay line and wins. At time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of the payout sound C (denoted as payout sound in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command, the winning LED lamp produces a winning lamp effect C (denoted as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same below), and the back lamp produces a back lamp effect C (denoted as BL effect in the figure, the same below). The time required for the payout process is 0.2 seconds when the payout process is performed normally (in this example, one game medal is normally paid out). At time t19, the main control means ends the payout process and sends a payout end command to the sub-control means. Based on the payout end command, the sub-control means continues to output the payout sound C as a winning effect for a T4 period (fourth specific time) until the timing of time t24, to execute the winning lamp effect C for a T6 period (sixth specific time) until the timing of time t5, and to execute the back lamp effect C for a T1 period (first specific time) until the timing of time t23.

After the payout process is completed at time t19, the main control means performs processes such as updating the RT status (game end check process) and turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals. The main control means turns on the MAX BET lamp at time t20 based on the fact that game medals can be inserted. The MAX BET lamp remains lit because the MAX BET switch was not operated. (Note that this diagram assumes that there is enough credit accumulated to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX BET switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX BET switch, the game medals can be inserted at time t20, but the MAX BET lamp does not light up.)

At time t23, a T1 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect A. That is, the period from time t0 to t23 can be considered the third back lamp effect period. At time t24, a T4 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound C. That is, the period from time t0 to t24 can be considered the third payout sound period. At time t5, a T6 period has passed since time t19, so the sub-control means ends the winning lamp effect C. That is, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the third winning lamp effect period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C, while turning on the MAX BET lamp, from time t19 onwards. By continuing the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C, the player is made aware that a payout has been made, and is also made aware that a bet can be set by operating the MAX BET, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine.

<When the MAX bet switch is inserted after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry role is completed> Figure 56 shows the case where the symbol combination corresponding to the Cherry role is displayed on the pay line and wins. Until the timing of time t20, it is the same as when the MAX bet switch is not inserted after the payout process based on the winning of the Cherry role is completed, and at the timing of time t21, the MAX bet switch is inserted. By operating the MAX bet switch, the main control means stops (turns off) the MAX bet lamp, the sub-control means ends the back lamp effect C, and from the timing of time t21 to time t22 (during the T2 period), three coins are bet by the MAX bet switch insertion operation as the insertion effect, so that the insertion sound A (referred to as the insertion sound in the figure, the same below) is output three times. From time t21 onwards, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as outputting the payout sound C, performing the winning lamp effect C, and outputting the insertion sound A, which allows the player to recognize that a payout has been made, while also being aware that the MAX BET switch has been operated and a bet has been set, improving the performance of the gaming machine. Also, at the timing of time t21, the payout sound C and the winning lamp effect C continue to be output, but by ending the back lamp effect C, the player can visually recognize that a bet has been set.

In FIG. 56, it is assumed that there are enough credits stored to allow a bet to be set by operating the MAX bet switch. If a bet cannot be set by operating the MAX bet switch, the machine will be in a state in which a gaming medal can be inserted at time t20, but the MAX bet lamp will not light up. Also, while the explanation was given for inserting a medal using the MAX bet switch, inserting a medal using the 1 bet switch will also end the back lamp effect C and output insertion sound A.

<When no game medals are inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role> As shown in FIG. 57, at the timing of time t0, the main control means transmits a payout start command to the sub-control means with the number of game medals to be paid out being 0, and the sub-control means starts output of winning sound A (written as winning sound in the figure, the same below), winning lamp effect D on the winning LED lamp (written as winning lamp effect in the figure, the same below), and back lamp effect D on the back lamp (written as BL effect in the figure, the same below) based on the received payout start command. The sub-control means continues output of winning sound A as a winning effect for the T5 period (fifth specific time), winning lamp effect D for the T7 period (seventh specific time), and back lamp effect D for the T1 period (first specific time) based on the payout start command. At the timing of time t25, the main control means starts automatic insertion process and transmits an automatic throwing command to the sub-control means. After the automatic insertion process ends at time t26, the main control means turns on the blocker to make it possible to insert game medals.

At time t26, the main control means turns on the medal insertion possible lamp based on the fact that a gaming medal can be inserted. As no medals are inserted thereafter, the lamp remains lit. At time T29, the sub-control means ends the back lamp presentation D because a period T1 has passed since time T09. In other words, the period from time t0 to t29 can be considered the fourth back lamp presentation period. At time t5, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp presentation D because a period T7 has passed since time t0. In other words, the period from time t0 to t5 can be considered the fourth winning lamp presentation period. As described above, smooth control is possible even when various situations are combined, such as continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D while turning on the medal insertion possible lamp from time t26 onwards, and by continuing the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, the player is made aware that a payout has been made and is also made aware that medals can be inserted, improving the performance of the gaming machine. Note that this diagram assumes that the credit accumulation has not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process, and if it is not possible to insert gaming medals, the medal insertion possible lamp will not be lit at time t26 (the blocker will not be turned ON.

<When a gaming medal is inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed> As shown in FIG. 58, up to the timing of time t26, it is the same as the case where a gaming medal is not inserted after the automatic insertion process based on the winning of a replay role is completed, and at the timing of time t27, a gaming medal is inserted, so that the main control means stores one gaming medal in the credit and transmits a storage number command to the sub-control means. The sub-control means ends the back lamp performance D based on receiving the storage number command, outputs the input sound B (written as the input sound in the figure, the same applies below) once as the input performance, and outputs it from the timing of time t27 to the timing of time t28. At the timing after time t27, even if various situations such as the output of the input sound B are combined while performing the winning lamp performance D, smooth control is possible, and thus, it is possible to make the player recognize that the replay role has won, while also making the player recognize that a valuable input has been made and one medal has been stored, thereby improving the performance of the gaming machine. At time t27, the winning lamp effect D continues, but the back lamp effect D is ended, allowing the player to visually recognize that the credits have been accumulated. Note that in this figure, it is assumed that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit (accumulated number is 48 or less) after the automatic insertion process, and the state in which game medals can be inserted continues even if one game medal is inserted.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed> As shown in FIG. 59, up to the timing of time t2, it is the same as when the insertion operation is performed using the MAX bet switch after the payout process based on the winning of the push order role is completed, and at the timing of time t3, the settlement switch is operated instead of the operation of the MAX bet switch. At the timing of time t3, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the MAX bet lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp performance A, and the back lamp performance A at the timing of time t3 without waiting for the lapse of the T1 period. After that, it starts outputting the settlement sound as a settlement performance based on the settlement start command. Note that, although the settlement sound is output as a settlement performance, the performance using the back lamp or the winning LED lamp is not performed. When the settlement process is started, in order to prevent the player from being confused by the simultaneous output of the payout sound A and the settlement sound, the output of the payout sound A, the winning lamp effect A, and the back lamp effect A, which were scheduled to continue for the T1 period, are terminated when the settlement process is started, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed, etc., so that the player can be accurately made aware that a settlement process different from the payout process is being performed.

<When settlement operation is performed using the settlement switch after completion of automatic insertion process based on winning of a replay role> As shown in FIG. 60, up until the timing of time t26, the process is the same as when a gaming medal is inserted after completion of automatic insertion process based on winning of a replay role, and at the timing of time t30 the settlement switch is operated. At the timing of time t30, the main control means starts the settlement process based on the operation of the settlement button, and ends (turns off) the illumination of the medal insertion possible lamp. Then, the sub-control means ends the winning lamp performance D at the timing of time t30, without waiting for the elapse of the T7 period, and the back lamp performance D, without waiting for the elapse of the T1 period. After that, it starts outputting a settlement sound as a settlement performance based on the settlement start command. Note that although the settlement sound is output, no performance using the back lamp or winning LED lamp is performed. When the settlement process has started, the winning lamp effect D and back lamp effect D, which were scheduled to continue for the T7 and T1 periods, are ended, and effects using the back lamp and winning LED lamp are not performed, allowing the player to recognize that the settlement process is being performed. Note that this diagram assumes that the accumulated credits have not reached the upper limit after the automatic insertion process and that 19 or more credits have been accumulated.

<When normal payout is not performed after the cherry winning (hopper empty error occurs)> As shown in FIG. 61, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but since there are no game medals in the hopper 44, the game medals are not paid out and the rotation of the wheel continues. Then, at time t17, the main control means determines that the hopper 44 is empty of game medals, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper empty error. Based on the occurrence of a hopper empty error, the main control means displays an error code, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen and uses the winning LED lamp to notify the error. Note that until time t17, the payout sound C is output, and the winning lamp effect C and back lamp effect C are executed continuously. Until time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red and flashes repeatedly as a winning lamp effect, but at time t17, the winning LED lamp lights up in red as an error notification, so although it is the same red color, the lighting pattern is different, so it is possible to recognize that the winning lamp effect has switched to an error notification. Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper empty error occurs without a single medal being paid out after the start of the payout process. If a hopper empty error occurs after multiple medals have been paid out, the timing of the hopper empty error will be later than time t17 by the amount of medals paid out.

<When normal payout is not performed after the cherry wins (hopper retention error occurs)> As shown in FIG. 62, at time t0, the main control means starts the payout process, and the sub-control means starts the output of payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C based on the received payout start command. After time t0, the payout process is executed, but the payout of the game medals is not executed because the game medals are stuck in the outlet of the hopper 44. Then, at time t18, the payout sensor of the hopper 44 has been continuously detected for more than 201 ms since the start of the payout process, so the main control means determines that the game medals are stuck, ends the payout process, and sets a hopper retention error. At the same time, at time t18, the main control means displays an error code based on the occurrence of a hopper retention error, and the sub-control means cancels (ends the display) the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C that were being executed, and displays an error screen.

The output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C are executed from the timing of the start of the payout process, and are executed before the payout process starts and a hopper retention error occurs, so it is possible to check the winning effects such as the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C before the error screen is displayed. Note that the same figure shows a case where a hopper retention error occurs when not a single medal is paid out after the start of the payout process. In a situation where multiple game medals are being paid out, if a hopper retention error occurs after some of the multiple game medals have been paid out, the timing at which the hopper retention error occurs will be later than time t18 by the amount of time it takes for some of the game medals to be paid out, and the period for the output of the payout sound C, the winning lamp effect C, and the back lamp effect C to be executed will be longer.

<Changes in mode> The time required to normally pay out 12 game medals is 1.5 seconds, and the time required to normally pay out one game medal is 0.2 seconds, but the payout time may vary depending on the number of medals paid out and whether the payout process only adds credits or includes the payout of game medals from the hopper 44. In this case, the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44 may be configured to be longer than the time required to add one game medal to credits. Conversely, the time required to add one game medal to credits may be configured to be longer than the time required to pay out one game medal from the hopper 44.

In the winning lamp performance, the color corresponding to the type of winning combination (yellow light when the push order combination is won and the correct symbol combination is won, red light when the cherry combination is won, and blue light when the replay combination is won) is used, but the color of the light may be a common color (e.g., white) regardless of the type of winning combination. By using a common color, it is possible to simply notify that a certain combination has been won regardless of the symbol combination (outcome) that stops on the reel. In addition, the winning lamp performance can be executed regardless of the color of the symbol corresponding to the combination that stops on the winning line, preventing misidentification. In addition, the common color regardless of the type of combination may be the same white for all combinations, or it may be divided into several groups according to the type of combination (white for bell and replay roles, purple for cherry and watermelon roles).

The winning lamp performance is executed for a time determined by the role after receiving the payout end command, but it may be executed for a time determined by the role after receiving the payout start command. For example, it may be 2.5 seconds when the correct symbol combination, the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role, and the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role are stopped. The execution period of the winning lamp performance is the same as the output period of the payout sound, but it may be a different period. Also, the execution period of the winning lamp performance is the same as the output period of the back lamp performance, but it may be a different period. The execution period of the winning lamp performance may be longer than the time required for the payout process (1.5 seconds) and shorter than the time required for the hopper empty error to be set (3.5 seconds).

Although it has been stated that the winning lamp effect A is executed during normal times (non-AT), it may also be executed during the AT. Also, the color may be the same, but the pattern of lighting and extinguishing and the execution time may be different. Also, it may not be executed during the AT. By not executing it during the AT, the winning lamp effect is executed each time for the correct pattern combination of the push order role, which has an increased winning frequency, and it is possible to avoid causing inconvenience to the player. Similarly, other roles (cherry role, replay role) may be executed during the AT, or may be configured not to be executed during the AT.

Although it has been stated that the winning lamp effect does not end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (receiving the reserve number command), it may also be configured to end with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (receiving the reserve number command). After a replay role is won, the winning lamp effect may not end in the automatic bet processing, but may be configured to end if a game medal is inserted thereafter. Although it has been stated that the back lamp effect ends with the insertion operation of the MAX bet switch (receiving the reserve insertion command) or the insertion of a game medal (receiving the reserve number command), it may also be configured not to end.

Although it has been stated that the winning LED lamp will not be used as the settlement effect, it may be used. This may be the same as the error notification that is performed when an error occurs, or it may be a different effect from the winning lamp effect that is performed when an error is notified or when a winning combination is won. As a different effect, it is desirable that one of the light color, blinking pattern, or time of the winning LED lamp is different, so that it can be recognized as being different from the error notification and winning lamp effects.

When an error occurs, an error notification is performed using the winning LED lamp, but when the power is turned on or when a door open error occurs, an error notification may be performed using the winning LED lamp in the same manner as when a hopper empty error occurs. When the power is turned on, the error notification continues for a certain period of time after the power is turned on, and when a door open error occurs, the error notification continues until the door is closed or until a certain period of time has passed since the door was closed. In these situations, it is possible to proceed with the game, and there is a possibility that the execution of the error notification and the execution of the winning lamp presentation overlap. In the case where they overlap, the error notification may be prioritized over the winning lamp presentation. Prioritizing the error notification may be configured so that the error notification is not executed even if the opportunity to execute the winning lamp presentation is met during the execution of the error notification. In addition, when an error notification is executed during the execution of the winning lamp presentation, the winning lamp presentation may be ended and the error notification is executed.

Also, giving priority to error notification can mean that the winning LED lamp will light up in a way that corresponds to the error notification when an error notification is being executed. Specifically, when the trigger for executing the winning lamp effect is met, the winning lamp effect is executed, while the winning LED lamp only emits light corresponding to the error notification when it is the period for executing the error notification, and when the period for executing the error notification ends and the period for executing the winning lamp effect continues, the winning LED lamp will emit light corresponding to the winning lamp effect.

The winning lamp performance is executed when the correct symbol combination stops in a game in which the push order role is won, when the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry role stops, or when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay role stops, but it can also be configured to be executed when a push order doesn't matter role (a so-called shared bell) in which an advantageous payout (payout of 12 coins) is executed regardless of the push order is won and the symbol combination corresponding to the push order doesn't matter role (the correct symbol combination) stops. It can also be configured to be executed when other roles such as the watermelon role or chance role are won. Also, the times and durations described in the above embodiment are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate.

<Correct operation challenge effect installed in the gaming machine of this embodiment> The gaming machine of this embodiment is provided with an effect that, when a push order role is won, does not notify the correct push order, but only notifies that the push order role has been won, and this effect is referred to as the push order challenge effect. In addition, when a push-button role is won, it is provided with an effect that, when a push-button role is won, does not notify the correct push-button position, but only notifies that the push-button role has been won, and this effect is referred to as the push order + push-button challenge effect. Such push order challenge effects, push-button challenge effects, and push order + push-button challenge effects are collectively referred to as the correct operation challenge effects. A correct operation (correct push order or push-button position) refers to an operation in which a high bell among the push order bells stops.

When the push order + pressing role is selected, the correct push order may be announced but not the correct pressing position, or the correct pressing position may be announced but not the correct push order. In such cases, this may be referred to as a push order + pressing challenge performance, or simply a push order challenge performance or a pressing challenge performance. In any case, these modes are all referred to as a correct operation challenge performance.

The correct operation challenge performance also includes a mode in which only the first stop is not announced when a six-choice push order role is won (in other words, the player is prompted to guess the correct push order of the three options for the first stop), and a mode in which the first stop is announced but the second stop is not announced (in other words, the player is prompted to guess the correct push order of the two options for the second stop).

The correct operation challenge performance includes a feature that notifies the player that one of the three possible pressing positions is different when the pressing position is selected (in other words, the player is prompted to guess the pressing positions of the remaining two options).

If the high bell symbol combination stops due to the player's operation after the correct operation challenge performance is executed (if the correct operation challenge performance is successful), a bonus according to the game status is awarded. For example, during normal play, this is an AT lottery or CZ lottery, and during the AT, this is a lottery for extending the number of AT games (a so-called additional lottery).

The correct operation challenge effect may be executed in a predetermined game state managed by the main control means, or may be executed by lottery when a role that is the target of the correct operation challenge effect is won.

An example of a reel arrangement for realizing the correct operation challenge performance will be explained based on Figure 63.

As shown in Figure 63, each reel has 20 symbols, and the large symbols that are easy to press include "Yellow Seven", "Red Seven", "Bar", and "White Seven". The "Yellow Seven", "Red Seven", "Bar", and "White Seven" are all different colors, with yellow, red, black, and white being prominent, respectively, and because they are larger in size and different in color than the other symbols, they are easy for players to recognize even when the reels are spinning. For advanced players, it is also fine to use "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Replay", "Bell A", "Bell B", and "Blank" as symbols to press with your eyes.

An example of a condition device for realizing the correct operation challenge performance will be explained based on Figure 64.

As shown in Figure 64, the bonus condition devices include a type 1 BB condition device, an RB-B condition device, and an RB-A condition device. In addition, the winning or replay condition devices include a replay-A condition device, a winning-A1 to A6 condition device, a winning-B1 to B4 condition device, a winning-C1 to C12 condition device, and a winning-D1 to D8 condition device. Note that the condition devices shown in Figure 64 are only a part of the devices, and it goes without saying that other condition devices may be included.

Furthermore, in the multiple specifications described below, there are some condition devices that are not necessary, and it is not necessary to have all of the condition devices shown in Figure 64. For example, there are cases where the Winning-A1 to A6 condition devices and the Winning-B1 to B4 condition devices are necessary, but the Winning-C1 to C12 condition devices and the Winning-D1 to D8 condition devices are not necessary. In the specifications described below, only the explanation of the condition devices that are absolutely necessary is given, and condition devices not described may or may not be present.

Figures 65 and 66 are diagrams showing the symbol combinations for each winning symbol or replay symbol. The left reel column in the diagram shows the symbol corresponding to the left reel in the winning symbol, the center reel column shows the symbol corresponding to the center reel in the winning symbol, and the right reel column shows the symbol corresponding to the right reel in the winning symbol.

Figures 67 to 69 are diagrams showing combinations of winning symbols or replay symbols for each condition device, and control for each stop operation. For example, in the winning-C1 condition device in Figure 67, winning symbols 01 to 04 and 09 to 104 are combined, and when the left reel stops first and the left reel red seven symbol is pressed, the center reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 01 to 04 can be stopped, when the left reel stops first and the left reel white seven symbol is pressed, when the center reel stops second and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 25 to 40 can be stopped, and when the left reel stops first, the right reel stops second, and the center reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 09 to 40 can be stopped. It indicates that if the middle reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the right reel stops at the third position, any of the winning symbols 41 to 72 can be stopped; if the middle reel stops at the first position, the right reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position, any of the winning symbols 41 to 72 can be stopped; if the right reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the middle reel stops at the third position, any of the winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped; and if the right reel stops at the first position, the middle reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position, any of the winning symbols 73 to 104 can be stopped.

Also, as mentioned above, if the left reel stops first and you press the red seven symbol on the left reel, the middle reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols 01-04 can stop, but strictly speaking, as long as the stop is within the range that can pull in the bell A symbol, any of the winning symbols 01-04 can stop even if a bar symbol stops instead of the red seven symbol.

Also, as mentioned above, if the left reel stops first and you press the white seven symbol on the left reel, the middle reel stops second, and the right reel stops third, any of the winning symbols from 25 to 40 can be stopped, but strictly speaking, as long as the stop is within the range that can pull in the bell B symbol, any of the winning symbols from 25 to 40 can be stopped even if the yellow seven symbol stops instead of the white seven symbol.

Also, since Figures 67 to 69 do not list all winning symbols, but only list the necessary winning symbols, some winning symbol combinations are the same even for different condition devices. For example, Winning-A1 and Winning-A2 in Figure 67 list the same winning symbol combination, but the stop control is different. Originally, in order to make the stop control of Winning-A1 and Winning-A2 different, it would be necessary to add a winning symbol with PB=1 for one coin payout to Winning-A2, or to create a different winning symbol combination, but this will be omitted to avoid complicating the explanation. In other words, if there is a description that states that different stop controls are performed with the same winning symbol combination, the addition of a winning symbol that is not listed will result in a different winning symbol combination.

In addition, the first stop symbols for the winning symbols C1 to C12 and winning symbols D1 to D8 shown in Figures 67 to 69 are either red seven or white seven, but this is not limited to this, and the first stop symbols may be replaced with yellow seven or a bar.

Also, the first stop may not have a pressing pattern, and the third stop's pattern must be pressed. In this case, for example, if the condition device has 12 options, such as Win-C1 to C12, the first stop will have three options for the order to press, the second stop will have two options for the order to press, and the third stop will have two options for the pattern to press, making the number of correct options 12. Also, the second and third stops may not have a pressing pattern, and the second stop's pattern must be pressed. In this case, for example, if the condition device has 12 options, such as Win-C1 to C12, the first stop will have three options for the order to press, the second stop will have four options for the order to press and the pattern to press, and the third stop will have one option, making the number of correct options 12.

In addition, "123" in the "Note 1" column of Figures 67 to 69 indicates that the left reel stops at the first position, the center reel stops at the second position, and the right reel stops at the third position, "132" indicates that the left reel stops at the first position, the right reel stops at the second position, and the center reel stops at the third position, "213" indicates that the center reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the right reel stops at the third position, "231" indicates that the center reel stops at the first position, the right reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position, "312" indicates that the right reel stops at the first position, the left reel stops at the second position, and the center reel stops at the third position, and "321" indicates that the right reel stops at the first position, the center reel stops at the second position, and the left reel stops at the third position.

Note 1 for Replay-A in Figure 69 shows the stop control in the eye-pressing when Replay-A is won. "Successful perfect press of red seven on the upper row of the middle reel" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time and a red seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than 1, "unsuccessful perfect press of red seven on the upper row of the middle reel" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time and a red seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is 1 or more, or the middle reel is not stopped for the first time, "successful perfect press of white seven within the middle reel frame" means that the middle reel is stopped for the first time and a white seven symbol is drawn to the upper row of the middle reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than 2, and "un ... "Failed to press white seven within frame" means that the center reel is stopped as the first stop and the white seven symbol is drawn to the top row of the center reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is two or more, or when the center reel is not the first stop, "successful five-frame press of red seven on the left reel" means that the left reel is stopped as the first stop and the red seven symbol is drawn to the top row of the left reel and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the number of symbols is less than five, and "failed five-frame press of red seven on the left reel" means that the left reel is stopped as the first stop and the stop operation is performed at a timing when the red seven symbol cannot be drawn to the top row of the left reel, or when the left reel is not the first stop.

The above explanation of the reel arrangement and the condition device combination related to the correct operation challenge performance is based on the premise that the effective line is one line in the middle row, but this is not limited to the above, and the effective line may be any one of the lines such as the line sloping downward to the right on the top row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the bottom row of the right reel, or the small hill line on the bottom row of the left reel, the middle row of the middle reel, and the bottom row of the right reel. Also, the effective line may be multiple lines instead of one line.

The winning-B1 to B4 condition devices in FIG. 67 are condition devices in which the first left reel stop does not have a correct answer. Similarly, the winning-D1 to D8 condition devices in FIG. 69 are also condition devices in which the first left reel stop does not have a correct answer. Such condition devices are sometimes called biased bells.

A biased bell is one in which there is no first stop correct answer for all reels, and there is no first stop correct answer for a specific reel, and there is a first stop correct answer only for the remaining reels. In other words, if there are three reels, the correct push order for the first stop operation is only for two reels, so there are four correct push orders. For example, if there is no first stop correct answer for the left reel, there are only four correct push orders: center left/right, center right/left, right left center, and right center/left. Similarly, if there is no first stop correct answer for the center reel, there are only four correct push orders: left center right, left/right center, right left center, and right center/left. Similarly, if there is no first stop correct answer for the right reel, there are only four correct push orders: left center right, left/right center, center left/right, and center right/left. Note that a biased bell is also called one in which there is no first stop correct answer for the center reel or no first stop correct answer for the right reel. Below, biased bells are explained using an example in which the first stop correct answer is not assigned to the left reel.

The correct push order for a biased bell means a push order that will get you a high-value bell, and an incorrect push order for a biased bell means a push order that will get you a low-value bell or a push order that will result in a small win drop. In particular, an incorrect push order is called an incorrect push order when the reel that normally performs the AT lottery stops for the first time and you get a low-value bell, or when a small win drop is displayed, because you have not gotten a high-value bell.

When equipped with a biased bell, the expected value of the payout of game medals is higher when using a stop operation order other than the first stop on the left, but when using a stop operation order other than the first stop on the left, the AT lottery is favored less than the first stop on the left, or the AT lottery is not executed, so that the overall expected value of the ball payout is made more favorable when using the first stop on the left. Note that while the explanation has been given regarding the AT lottery, it is not limited to this and any or all of the lotteries related to the ball payout, such as the AT addition lottery and the CZ transition lottery, may be favored with the first stop on the left.

At this time, when a biased bell is won, it is unclear in what order the player will press the buttons to stop the reels, so the AT lottery is executed after all the reels have stopped. For example, if the AT lottery is executed based on the symbol combination after all the reels have stopped, the symbol combination of the 1-coin role that appears when the left reel is stopped for the first time and the symbol combination of the 1-coin role that can stop when the center or right reel is stopped for the first time are configured to be different, so that the AT lottery can be executed based on the symbol combination of the 1-coin role that is displayed only when the left reel is stopped for the first time.

To explain based on the winning-A3 in Figure 67, when winning symbols 09-40 stop, which are winning symbols that can stop when the left reel stops first, the AT lottery is executed, but when winning symbols 105-120 stop, which are winning symbols that can stop when the right reel stops first, and winning symbols 41-72 stop, which are winning symbols that can stop when the center reel stops first, the right reel stops second, and the left reel stops third, the AT lottery is not executed. In this way, even if the pressing order is incorrect, by making the winning symbols that stop different when the left reel stops first and when the pressing order is incorrect in any other pressing order, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the AT lottery just by determining the winning symbols after all the reels have stopped, thereby reducing the program capacity.

Also, for example, when the AT lottery is performed after all reels have stopped, the AT lottery can be performed based on push order information that the left reel was stopped first. In this case, the symbol combination of a 1-coin role when the left reel is first stopped may be configured to be different from the symbol combination of a 1-coin role that can stop when the middle or right reel is first stopped, or they may be configured to be the same. Also, the AT lottery may be performed based on push order information that the reels stopped in the left, middle, and right push order, or based on push order information that the reels stopped in the left, middle, and right push order, or the AT lottery may be performed based on push order information that the left reel was stopped first.

When it is an advantageous zone and the biased bell is won, the indication information is not displayed on the indication monitor.

By configuring it in this way, the payout rate is normally highest when the left reel stops first, but since the probability of winning a biased bell is relatively higher than the probability of winning a replay, if an instruction monitor instructing the left reel to stop first is displayed on the instruction monitor every time a biased bell is won, it can prevent the player from frequently creating a sense of expectation that a special bonus will be granted, the player from realizing that they have not won a rare role with a higher AT win probability than a biased bell (rare roles have a lower win probability than a biased bell), and the number of payouts when a biased bell is won from being stored in the memory area for the number of payouts used to calculate the ratio of roles with instructions displayed on the instruction monitor.

In addition, if the push order is incorrect when the biased bell is won, it is possible that the 1 coin role that occurs when the push order is incorrect may be obtained, or the push order bell spill number (0 payout) may be displayed. The payout number for such an incorrect answer is "1" when the first stop operation on the left is performed when the biased bell is won, but if this 1 coin is included in the instruction included role ratio, the fluctuation of the balls paid out will be limited (the difference between when the ball payout rate is low and when it is high will be reduced). Therefore, the freedom of ball payout design is improved by not adding the payout number of 1, which occurs when the first stop operation on the left is performed when the biased bell is won, to the instruction included role ratio.

In addition, when a biased bell is won in a situation where the correct operation challenge effect is not executed, a mode is conceivable in which the effect group number is sent to the sub-control means but no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor. Note that the effect group number can be sent in advantageous zones but not in normal zones, or sent in both advantageous and normal zones, but either mode is acceptable.

In this case, for example, when the biased bell is won, the main control means transmits "50" as the presentation group number to the sub-control means. After that, when the sub-control means receives "50" as the presentation group number from the main control means, it executes the same presentation mode as when a miss is determined, without executing the correct operation challenge presentation, or a mode in which no presentation is executed. Also, since no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor at this time, it is difficult for the player to tell whether or not the biased bell has been won (strictly speaking, it is possible to recognize that the biased bell has been won from the stopping pattern combination).

In addition, if the performance group number is transmitted when the biased bell is won, it is known that a minor role can be obtained by the sub-control means stopping the center or right reel first, so there is a concern that the sub-control means may be tampered with to notify the center or right reel to be stopped first when the biased bell is won and "50" is received as the performance group number. In order to reduce the effects of such tampering, the expected value for the difference in the number of coins when the center or right reel is stopped first when the biased bell is won is set to less than three coins (when three coins are played). For example, when the biased bell is won in a three-coin game and 11 coins are paid out with a 1/4 probability of being center left/right, center right/left, right left center, or right center left (when the difference in the number of coins is eight coins), the expected value for the difference in the number of coins is two coins for all of the push orders of center left/right, center right/left, right left center, and right center left, which is less than three coins. With this configuration, even if the biased bell wins and the performance group number is received, and the correct operation challenge performance is not executed, and the first left stop is notified due to illegal modification of the sub-control means, the expected value for the difference in the number of coins will be less than three coins, so the difference in the number of coins will not increase. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in the payout rate due to illegal modification of the sub-control means.

In addition, in a game with three coins bet, if a biased bell is won and 11 coins are paid out with a 1/2 probability of middle left/right, middle right/left, right left middle, or right middle/left (when the difference in the number of coins is 8 coins), the expected value for the difference in the number of coins will be 4 coins for the push orders of middle left/right, middle right/left, right left middle, and right middle/left, so that the bet number is 3 coins or more, and in such a case, by displaying in advance on the instruction monitor that the correct answer is the first stop of the middle reel or the first stop of the right reel, it is possible to eliminate any room for tampering with the sub-control means. In other words, the main control means notifies the push order without the need for tampering with the sub-control means, making it a legitimate game specification (this information is included in the instruction role ratio).

In addition, when a biased bell is won in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed, the performance group number may not be sent to the sub-control means, and the instruction information may not be displayed on the instruction monitor.

In this case, for example, when a biased bell is won, the presentation group number is not transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means. After that, when the sub-control means receives a command to stop all reels from the main control means, it executes the same presentation mode as when a miss is determined, without executing the correct operation challenge presentation, or a mode in which no presentation is executed. Also, at this time, since no instruction information is displayed on the instruction monitor, it is difficult for the player to tell whether or not a biased bell has been won (strictly speaking, it is possible to recognize that a biased bell has been won from the stopped pattern combination).

<In the case of a specification that combines a 6-option push order bell and a 4-option push order bell (biased bell)> As a specification for a gaming machine equipped with a correct operation challenge performance, we will explain the specification that combines a 6-option push order bell and a 4-option push order bell (biased bell).

As shown in Figure 67, Winning-A1 to A6 and Winning-B1 to B4 are 6-choice push order bells with no bias, while Winning-B1 to B4 are 4-choice push order bells with a bias.

<<When the correct operation challenge effect is performed with the 6-choice push order bell, but not with the 4-choice push order bell>> It is possible to target the correct operation challenge effect with the 6-choice push order bell with no bias towards the winning - A1 to A6.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 6-choice push order bell with no bias towards winning - A1 to A6, the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of winning - A1 to A6 is selected, and the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of winning - A1 to A6 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the winning-A1 is won, the correct operation challenge performance is executed, and even if any of the winning 01 to 08 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area for calculating the instruction-included role ratio, thereby improving the freedom of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed during the AT when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed during a non-AT situation when the correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed during a non-AT situation when the correct operation challenge effect is not executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected, and the instruction monitor display may be displayed during the AT when the push order notification effect (push order navigation) is executed when any of the winning combinations A1 to A6 is selected.

By configuring in this way, for example, when the winning-A1 is won, the correct operation challenge performance is executed, and even if any of the winning 01 to 08 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area for calculating the instruction-included role ratio, so the degree of freedom in ball design is improved. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that he or she may perform a stop operation at his or her own discretion. Also, since the instruction monitor is displayed only when the push order is notified during the AT, the absence of the display of the instruction monitor allows the player to more intuitively recognize that he or she may perform a stop operation at his or her own discretion.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell with the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell, the system is configured so that the probability of winning the 4-option push order bell is higher.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell with the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell, the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell may be configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the correct operation challenge performance is increased, and the correct operation challenge performance can be executed more easily at any time.

In addition, the number of high bells paid out in a 6-option push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of high bells paid out in a 4-option push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-level bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and without the push order notification effect, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a six-option push order bell and the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell, the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. It is also possible to reduce the stress of users who fail the correct operation challenge performance, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance when the six-choice push order bell is won includes a six-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one push order from six different push orders, a four-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one push order from four different push orders by announcing one incorrect push order on the first stop (making the first stop correct push order two choices) and not announcing the second stop if correct, and a two-choice challenge that requires the player to guess one push order from two different push orders by announcing the correct push order on the first stop but not announcing the second stop, or an incorrect push order on the first stop (making the first stop correct push order two choices) and notifying the second stop if correct. In any of these correct operation challenge performance modes, no instruction monitor display is performed.

<<When the correct operation challenge effect is performed for the four-choice push order bell, but not for the six-choice push order bell>> It is possible to target the correct operation challenge effect for the four-choice push order bell with a bias towards winning - B1 to B4.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 4-choice push order bell with a bias towards winning-B1 to B4, the instruction monitor will be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will be executed when any of winning-B1 to B4 is selected, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will not be executed when any of winning-B1 to B4 is selected.

When the correct operation challenge effect is executed with a biased bell, the correct operation challenge effect always fails when the left reel makes its first stop, but when the left reel makes its first stop, the AT lottery is not executed in the same way as the AT lottery that is executed under normal circumstances (when the correct operation challenge effect is not executed). In other words, when the correct operation challenge effect is executed with a biased bell and the left reel makes its first stop, the AT lottery is executed with a lower probability than the AT lottery that is executed under normal circumstances, or the AT lottery is not executed at all.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the Winning-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and a notification is given that the high bell will not stop when the left reel stops first, increasing the possibility that the player will perform the correct operation.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor may be displayed when the AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected, when the non-AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected, and when the AT is in progress and a push order notification effect is executed when any of the winning combinations B1 to B4 is selected, the instruction monitor may be displayed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning win-B1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed to notify the player that the high bell will not stop when the left reel stops first, thereby increasing the possibility of the player performing the correct operation. In addition, because the instruction monitor display is executed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed or when the push order notification effect is executed, it is possible to clarify when it is and is not OK to stop the left reel first.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell with the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell, the system is configured so that the probability of winning the 4-option push order bell is higher.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the correct operation challenge performance is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any time.

In addition, the number of high bells paid out in a 6-option push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of high bells paid out in a 4-option push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-level bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and without the push order notification effect, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a six-option push order bell and the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell, the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance when the four-choice push order bell is won includes a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of four different push orders, and a two-choice challenge in which two incorrect push orders are announced for the first stop (with the first stop correct push order being one option) and the second stop is not announced, or the correct push order for the first stop is announced and the second stop is not announced, so that the player must guess one of two different push orders. In any of these correct operation challenge performance modes, the instruction monitor is displayed.

<<When executing a correct operation challenge performance with a four-choice push order bell and a six-choice push order bell>> It is possible to target the correct operation challenge performance with a balanced six-choice push order bell with a winning combination of A1 to A6 and a biased four-choice push order bell with a winning combination of B1 to B4.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 6-choice push order bell with no bias towards winning -A1 to A6, the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will be executed when any of winning -A1 to A6 is selected, and the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will not be executed when any of winning -A1 to A6 is selected. Also, if the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 4-choice push order bell with bias towards winning -B1 to B4, the instruction monitor display will be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will be executed when any of winning -B1 to B4 is selected, and the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will not be executed when any of winning -B1 to B4 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to know whether the correct operation challenge presentation is a six-choice or a four-choice correct operation challenge presentation, preventing erroneous operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell with the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell, the system is configured so that the probability of winning the 4-option push order bell is higher.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the four-choice correct operation challenge target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge at any time.

In addition, when comparing the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell with the probability of winning a 4-option push order bell, the probability of winning a 6-option push order bell may be configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the six-choice correct operation challenge target role increases, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge at any time.

In addition, the number of high bells paid out in a 6-option push order bell is configured to be the same as the number of high bells paid out in a 4-option push order bell.

By configuring it this way, even if the high-level bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect and without the push order notification effect, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 6-choice push order bell or the 4-choice push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a six-option push order bell and the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell, the number of payouts for high bells in a four-option push order bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance when the six-choice push order bell is won includes a six-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of six different push orders; a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of four different push orders by announcing one incorrect push order on the first stop (making the first stop correct push order two choices) and not announcing the second stop if the answer is correct; and a two-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of two push orders by announcing the correct push order on the first stop but not announcing the second stop, or an incorrect push order on the first stop (making the first stop correct push order two choices) and announcing the second stop if the answer is correct. In any of these correct operation challenge performance modes, no instruction monitor display is performed.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance when the four-choice push order bell is won includes a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of four different push orders, and a two-choice challenge in which two incorrect push orders are announced for the first stop (with the first stop correct push order being one option) and the second stop is not announced, or the correct push order for the first stop is announced and the second stop is not announced, so that the player must guess one of two different push orders. In any of these correct operation challenge performance modes, the instruction monitor is displayed.

<Processing related to the instruction function according to the number of times the correct operation challenge performance is failed> When the correct operation challenge performance is executed, processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery or AT addition lottery, etc.) is executed according to the number of times the operation is performed in the incorrect button press sequence (low bell stops)

For example, when a 6-choice correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of the winning options A1 to A6 is won during the AT, if the first correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a probability of 2.5%, if the second correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a probability of 5.0%, if the third correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 50-game additional lottery is executed with a probability of 7.5%, and if the fourth correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (operated in the incorrect button press order), a 10-game additional lottery is executed with a probability of 1.0%.
A 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 0% probability, if the fifth correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (the buttons are pressed in the incorrect order), a 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 50% probability, and if the sixth correct operation challenge performance is unsuccessful (the buttons are pressed in the incorrect order), a 50-game extra lottery is executed with a 100% probability.

With this configuration, even if the player presses the buttons in the wrong order when executing the correct operation challenge performance, the probability of winning the additional lottery increases according to the number of incorrect answers (failures), so the player's motivation to play is less likely to decrease even if the player presses the buttons in the wrong order.

Also, as shown in FIG. 67, when any of the winning symbols A1 to A6 is won, the winning symbols when the push order is incorrect are winning symbols 09 to 40 and winning symbols 105 to 120. Winning symbols 09 to 40 are winning symbols that can execute an AT lottery when not in an AT mode, and winning symbols 105 to 120 are winning symbols that do not execute an AT lottery when not in an AT mode (or execute an AT lottery with a lower probability than winning symbols 09 to 40).

If the correct button press sequence is incorrect during the correct operation challenge, there is a possibility that the winning numbers 09-40 and 105-120 will be stopped, but if the correct operation challenge fails, the same lottery will be held for the winning numbers 09-40 and 105-120 depending on the number of failures.

In addition, the specified memory area that stores the number of times the correct operation challenge performance has failed is initialized by the initialization process when the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, for example, if the advantageous zone ends when the number of times the correct operation challenge performance has failed is five, and the correct operation challenge performance fails again in a new advantageous zone, the number of times the correct operation challenge performance has failed in the new advantageous zone will be counted as the first time, and an additional lottery will be executed.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game, such as by playing across advantageous zones.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area, the specified memory area will be initialized when the player wins the bonus lottery according to the number of failures.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits being awarded based on the number of failures, and to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area that stores the number of failures, the specified memory area is initialized when the correct operation challenge performance is successful.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits being awarded based on the number of failures, and to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, if the number of failures in the correct operation challenge performance is stored in a specified memory area that stores the number of failures, the specified memory area may not be initialized even if the correct operation challenge performance is successful. In this case, the specified memory area is configured to be initialized when the player wins the additional lottery according to the number of failures.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits being awarded based on the number of failures, and to prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance has been described as being executed by guessing the order in which buttons are pressed, but it may also be executed by guessing the keystroke pattern, or by guessing both the order in which buttons are pressed and the keystroke pattern.

<Processing related to the instruction function according to the number of times the correct operation challenge performance is successful> When the correct operation challenge performance is executed, processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery, AT addition lottery, etc.) is executed according to the number of times the operation is performed in the correct button press sequence (the high bell stops).

For example, when five games are played as the trigger for ending a specified game state, and a six-choice correct operation challenge effect is executed upon winning any of the winning combinations A1 to A6, if the correct operation challenge effect in the specified game state that lasts for five games is successful once (operated in the correct button sequence), an additional 10 games are awarded, if the correct operation challenge effect in the specified game state that lasts for five games is successful twice (operated in the correct button sequence), an additional 20 games are awarded, and if the correct operation challenge effect in the specified game state that lasts for five games is successful twice (operated in the correct button sequence), an additional 20 games are awarded. If the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button press order) three times, an additional 30 games are awarded; if the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button press order) four times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 50 games are awarded; if the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button press order) five times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 100 games are awarded; and if the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button press order) zero times in a specified game state that lasts for five games, an additional 20 games are awarded.

With this configuration, when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player's sense of expectation can be gradually increased according to the number of correct button presses, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, if the number of times that the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) in a specified game state that lasts for five games is zero, no additional bonus may be added, or if the number of times that the correct operation challenge performance is successful (operated in the correct button sequence) in a specified game state that lasts for five games is zero, the specified game state may be extended until the correct operation challenge performance is correctly performed, or the specified game state may be ended when the correct operation challenge performance is performed five times.

In addition, the specified memory area that stores the number of times the correct operation challenge performance is successful is initialized by the initialization process when the advantageous zone ends. Therefore, for example, when the number of times the correct operation challenge performance is successful is four, the advantageous zone ends and in the new advantageous zone, the specified memory area that stores the number of times the correct operation challenge performance is successful is set to 0.

With this configuration, even if someone tries to extend the life of the correct operation challenge effect by using a gameplay method that is not performed in normal play, the game will be initialized when the advantageous zone ends, so the damage caused by fraudulent ball dispensing operations can be reduced.

In addition, the correct operation challenge performance has been described as being executed by guessing the order in which buttons are pressed, but it may also be executed by guessing the keystroke pattern, or by guessing both the order in which buttons are pressed and the keystroke pattern.

<Processing when the correct operation challenge performance when the 6-option push order bell is won is limited to 4 or 2 options> This section explains how to increase the probability of making the correct operation by notifying certain operation modes when the correct operation challenge performance is executed.

As described above, some operation modes may be notified when the correct operation challenge performance is executed. For example, there is a four-choice challenge in which, when a six-choice push order bell is drawn, one incorrect push order is announced at the first stop (the first stop correct push order is set to two options), and if the answer is correct, the second stop is not announced, allowing the player to guess one of four push orders; a two-choice challenge in which, when a six-choice push order bell is drawn, the first stop correct push order is announced but the second stop is not announced, or, when the answer is correct, one incorrect push order is announced at the first stop (the first stop correct push order is set to two options), and, if the answer is correct, the second stop is announced, allowing the player to guess one of two push orders; and a two-choice challenge in which, when a four-choice push order bell is drawn, two incorrect push orders at the first stop are announced (the first stop correct push order is set to one option), and the second stop is not announced, or, when the answer is correct, the first stop correct push order is announced but the second stop is not announced, allowing the player to guess one of two push orders.

Specifically, let us explain the case where Winning-A1 is won. When the correct operation challenge effect is executed when Winning-A1 is won, and the first stop is announced as correct and a two-choice challenge is executed, "1??" is displayed in the area of the LCD that displays the push order. The "1" on the left corresponds to the left reel, the "?" in the middle corresponds to the middle reel, and the "?" on the right corresponds to the right reel.

Here, if the player makes the left reel the first stop, "-??" is displayed in the area of the LCD that shows the push order. Also, a bell A symbol or a bell B symbol will stop on the active line in the middle of the left reel. The "-" on the left of the LCD indicates that the correct operation has been performed, and other suitable designs can be made, such as displaying nothing or displaying a "○". When "-??" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the correct operation for the second stop will be the middle reel or the right reel, providing the player with the fun of guessing between two options.

When the player stops the middle reel for the second time, "-??" is displayed in the area of the LCD that displays the push order. Also, a bell A symbol or a bell B symbol stops on the active line in the middle of the middle reel. The LCD display does not change when the reel stops for the second time, but it may change to "--?" or in other ways. When "-??" is displayed on the LCD, it is unclear whether the second stop was correct or incorrect, so a sense of expectation can be maintained until the end. In this embodiment, the correct answer is confirmed when two bells A or B stop on an active line, so a player who checks the main reel can understand whether the answer is correct or not based on the stopped symbols. In addition, it is also possible to make it impossible to tell whether the answer is correct or not on the main reel until the third stop.

Then, when the player stops the right reel for the third time, the LCD will display a congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or an additional number such as "+100". In addition, a Bell A symbol or a Bell B symbol will stop on the active line in the middle of the right reel, and one of the symbol combinations of "Bell A, or Bell B - Bell A, or Bell B - Bell A, or Bell B" will stop. Note that since the processing related to the instruction function for the additional lottery, etc. is executed according to the symbol combination when all the reels have stopped or the push order information, the timing for displaying the congratulatory message such as "Congratulations" or the additional number such as "+100" is after the processing related to the instruction function when all the reels have stopped has been executed.

Also, if the player makes the center or right reel stop for the first time when the Win-A1 is won, it is possible to make all of the "1??" displays on the LCD invisible, or to make them invisible after a failure effect is performed. In addition, the symbol combination that is displayed when all the reels stop at this time is one of the following symbol combinations: "Replay - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven." In this case, since one of the symbols "Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" stops on the center or right reel at the time of the first stop, the push order is determined to be incorrect when the center or right reel stops for the first time, and the processing related to the instruction function that is executed when all the reels stop is not executed, or a lower profit is awarded compared to when the push order is correct.

Also, when the player makes the left reel stop for the first time and the right reel stop for the second time when the winning-A1 is won, the symbol combination displayed when all the reels stop will be one of the following symbol combinations: "Bell A or Bell B - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven - Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven". In this case, since one of the symbols "Red Seven, Yellow Seven, Bar, or White Seven" stops on the right reel at the time of the second stop, the push order is determined to be incorrect when the right reel stops for the second time, and the processing related to the instruction function executed when all the reels stop is not executed, or a lower profit is awarded compared to when the push order is correct. For winning 09 to 40, if the correct operation challenge performance is not executed, the processing related to the instruction function is executed, but if the performance is stopped when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, a profit with an expected value lower than the expected value of the profit that can be obtained when the processing related to the instruction function is not executed or the correct operation challenge performance is not executed is awarded.

<The correct operation challenge effect is executed according to the eye-pressing skill at the time of winning the replay> In addition to the push order bell, the condition device for executing the correct operation challenge effect can also be a replay or a common bell, and the following will explain how to execute the correct operation challenge effect in a replay. Note that the instruction monitor display is hidden when executing the correct operation challenge effect in a replay.

We will explain an example of executing the correct operation challenge effect when Replay-A shown in Figure 69 is won.

When the correct operation challenge performance is executed when Replay-A is selected, the symbol combination that stops is configured to differ depending on the player's stopping operation position.

For example, if the red seven is pressed exactly on the top row of the middle reel when it first stops, the red seven symbol will stop on the top row of the middle reel (the cherry symbol will stop on the middle row of the middle reel, which is the active line). Then, if the left and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 01 will stop, and if replay 01 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will be executed. At this time, if the red seven cannot be pressed exactly on the top row of the middle reel when it first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will not be executed, or processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 01 has stopped will be executed.

Also, if the white seven is pressed within the frame when the center reel first stops, the white seven symbol will stop on the top row of the center reel (a blank symbol will stop in the middle row of the center reel, which is the active line). Then, if the left and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 02 will stop, and if replay 02 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will be executed. At this time, if the white seven cannot be pressed within the frame when the center reel first stops, replay 04 will stop, and if replay 04 is stopped when all the reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function will not be executed, or processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 02 has stopped will be executed. Note that the processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 02 stops will execute processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than the processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 01 has stopped. This is because it is easier to hit the white seven symbol within the frame of the middle reel (more symbols are drawn) than it is to hit the red seven symbol on the top row of the middle reel.

Also, if the red seven is pressed within 5 frames when the left reel first stops, the red seven symbol stops in the middle of the left reel (the red seven symbol stops in the middle of the left reel, which is the active line). Then, if the center and right reels are stopped in any order and at any timing, replay 03 stops, and if replay 03 is stopped when all reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function is executed. At this time, if the red seven cannot be pressed within 5 frames when the left reel first stops, replay 04 stops, and if replay 04 is stopped when all reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function is not executed, or processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than when replay 03 has stopped is executed. Note that the processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 03 stops executes processing related to the instruction function with a lower profit than the processing related to the instruction function executed when replay 02 has stopped. This is because it is easier to hit the red seven symbol within the five frames of the left reel than it is to hit the white seven symbol within the frame of the center reel (more symbols are drawn).

In this way, by varying the symbol combinations that can be stopped depending on the stopping position when Replay-A is won, the symbol combination that corresponds to the stopping position stops, and when all reels have stopped, processing related to the instruction function can be executed according to the symbol combination. One example of processing related to the instruction function according to the symbol combination is when Replay 01 stops, the number of AT games increases by 20 games, when Replay 02 stops, the number of AT games increases by 10 games, when Replay 03 stops, the number of AT games increases by 5 games, and when Replay 04 stops, the number of AT games does not increase.

In addition, as mentioned above, when a common bell is won, the payout amount does not change depending on the push order regardless of whether or not the replay is selected, a different processing mode may be used for the instruction function according to the push position, similar to when a replay-A is selected.

<In the case of a specification that combines 12-option push order + eye-tapping bell and 8-option push order + eye-tapping bell (biased bell)> As a specification for a gaming machine equipped with a correct operation challenge performance, we will explain the specification that combines 12-option push order + eye-tapping role and 8-option push order + eye-tapping role.

As shown in Figures 67 to 69, Winning-C1 to C12 and Winning-D1 to D8 are Winning-C1 to C12 with an unbiased 12-option push order + eye-pressing bell, while Winning-D1 to D8 are with an unbiased 8-option push order + eye-pressing bell.

<<When the correct operation challenge effect is performed with the 12-choice button sequence + eye-tapping bell, and not with the 8-choice button sequence + eye-tapping bell>> It is conceivable that the target of the correct operation challenge effect could be the 12-choice button sequence + eye-tapping bell with no bias towards winning - C1 to C12.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 12-choice push order + eye-pressing bell with no bias for the winning combination of C1 to C12, the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when the winning combination of C1 to C12 is selected, and the instruction monitor display will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when the winning combination of C1 to C12 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning combination -C1 is won, a correct operation challenge performance is executed, and even if any of winning combinations 01 to 04 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area for calculating the instruction-included combination ratio, thereby improving the freedom of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they may perform a stop operation at their own discretion.

In this embodiment, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the AT is in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of the winning symbols C1 to C12 is selected, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the non-AT is in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of the winning symbols C1 to C12 is selected, the instruction monitor display may not be displayed when the non-AT is in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of the winning symbols C1 to C12 is selected, and the instruction monitor display may be displayed when the AT is in a situation where the push order + press notification performance (push order + press navigation) is executed when any of the winning symbols C1 to C12 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning -C1 is won, a correct operation challenge performance is executed, and even if any of winning 01 to 04 stops, the payout number is not stored in the payout number memory area for calculating the instruction-included role ratio, thereby improving the freedom of ball design. Also, by not displaying the instruction monitor when the correct operation challenge performance is executed, the player can intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion. Also, since the instruction monitor is only displayed when the push order + eye push is notified during the AT, the absence of the instruction monitor display allows the player to more intuitively recognize that they may perform the stop operation at their own discretion.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push is configured to be higher.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of the 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of the 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of the 12-choice push order + bell push may be configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the correct operation challenge performance is increased, and the correct operation challenge performance can be executed more easily at any time.

In addition, the payout number of high bells in the 12-choice push order + push bell sequence is configured to be the same as the payout number of high bells in the 8-choice push order + push bell sequence.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect occurring and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a 12-choice push order + key press bell and the number of payouts for high bells in an 8-choice push order + key press bell, the number of payouts for high bells in an 8-choice push order + key press bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. It is also possible to reduce the stress of users who fail the correct operation challenge performance, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge performance when the 12-choice push sequence + eye-pressing bell is won, the 12-choice challenge is to guess one of the 12 types of push sequences + eye-pressing by not announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-pressing pattern, and not announcing the correct push sequence for the second stop either, or to announce one incorrect push sequence for the first stop but not announcing the eye-pressing pattern (making the correct push sequence for the first stop + eye-pressing four options) and not announcing the correct push sequence for the second stop, allowing for 8 types of push sequences + eye-pressing. There are eight-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of six different push sequences + push sequences; a six-choice challenge in which the correct push sequence for the first stop and push sequence pattern are not announced, but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced, or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced, but the push sequence pattern is announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; and a six-choice challenge in which the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced, but the push sequence is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced, and the incorrect push sequence for the first stop is announced. The four-choice challenge is to announce one of the four push sequences + the push pattern (the first stop correct push sequence + the push sequence is set to four options) and announce the second stop correct push sequence, or to announce one of the first stop incorrect push sequences and the push sequence pattern (the first stop correct push sequence is set to two options) and not announce the second stop correct push sequence, making it a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of the four push sequences + the push sequence. There are three-choice challenges that require the player to guess one of three different push sequences, and two-choice challenges that require the player to guess one of two push sequences + push sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the push sequence symbol and the correct push sequence for the second stop, announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the push sequence symbol but not the correct push sequence for the second stop, or an incorrect push sequence for the first stop and the push sequence symbol and an incorrect push sequence for the second stop are announced and the player is asked to guess one of two push sequences + push sequences. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, no indication monitor display is performed.

<<When the correct operation challenge effect is performed with the 8-choice button sequence + eye-pressing bell, and not with the 12-choice button sequence + eye-pressing bell>> It is possible to target the correct operation challenge effect with the 8-choice button sequence bell with a bias towards the winning button - D1 to D8.

If the target of the correct operation challenge performance is an 8-choice push order bell with a bias towards winning-D1 to D8, the instruction monitor will be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will be executed when any of winning-D1 to D8 is selected, and the instruction monitor will not be displayed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance will not be executed when any of winning-D1 to D8 is selected.

When the correct operation challenge effect is performed with a biased bell, when the left reel is stopped for the first time, the AT lottery that is usually performed will not be performed, and instead, the AT lottery will be performed with a lower probability than the AT lottery that is usually performed, or the AT lottery will not be performed.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when the winning win-D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed, and a notification is given that the high bell will not stop when the left reel stops first, increasing the possibility that the player will perform the correct operation.

In this embodiment, an instruction monitor display may be provided in a situation where the AT is in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is to be executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected, an instruction monitor display may be provided in a situation where the AT is not in progress and a correct operation challenge effect is to be executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected, and an instruction monitor display may be provided in a situation where the AT is in progress and a push order + eye-press notification effect is to be executed when any of the winning symbols D1 to D8 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, for example, when a winning win-D1 is won, an instruction monitor display corresponding to the correct operation challenge effect is executed to inform the player that the high bell will not stop when the left reel stops first, thereby increasing the possibility of the player performing the correct operation. In addition, because the instruction monitor display is executed when the correct operation challenge effect is executed or when the push order notification effect is executed, it is possible to clarify when it is OK to stop the left reel first and when it is not OK to stop the left reel first.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push is configured to be higher.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the correct operation challenge performance is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any time.

In addition, the payout number of high bells in the 12-choice push order + push bell sequence is configured to be the same as the payout number of high bells in the 8-choice push order + push bell sequence.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect occurring and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a 12-choice push order + key press bell and the number of payouts for high bells in an 8-choice push order + key press bell, the number of payouts for high bells in an 8-choice push order + key press bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge performance when the 8-choice push sequence + eye-touch bell is won, there are 8-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of the 8 types of push sequences + eye-touches by not announcing the correct push sequence and eye-touch pattern for the first stop, nor the correct push sequence for the second stop; 8-choice challenges in which the correct push sequence and eye-touch pattern for the first stop are not announced, but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced; the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced but the eye-touch pattern is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced but the eye-touch pattern is not announced but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced. There are four-choice challenges in which the player is prompted to guess one of four different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop, or two-choice challenges in which the player is prompted to guess one of two different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop, announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop but not the correct push sequence for the first stop, or announcing the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop but not the correct push sequence for the first stop, and allowing the player to guess one of two different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, the instruction monitor is displayed.

<<When executing a correct operation challenge effect with an 8-choice button sequence + eye-tapping bell, and executing a correct operation challenge effect with a 12-choice button sequence + eye-tapping bell>> It is conceivable to set the correct operation challenge effect to a 12-choice button sequence + eye-tapping bell with no bias towards winning - C1 to C12, and an 8-choice button sequence + eye-tapping bell with a bias towards winning - D1 to D8.

When the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 12-choice push order + button press bell with no bias from Winning-C1 to C12, the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of Winning-C1 to C12 is selected, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of Winning-C1 to C12 is selected. Also, when the target of the correct operation challenge performance is a 8-choice push order + button press bell with bias from Winning-D1 to D8, the instruction monitor display is performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is executed when any of Winning-D1 to D8 is selected, and the instruction monitor display is not performed in a situation where the correct operation challenge performance is not executed when any of Winning-D1 to D8 is selected.

By configuring it in this way, the display on the instruction monitor allows the player to know whether the correct operation challenge presentation is a 12-choice or 8-choice correct operation challenge presentation, preventing erroneous operation of the stop switch.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of 8-choice push order + bell push is configured to be higher.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT. In addition, the probability of winning the eight-choice correct operation challenge target role is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge at any time.

In addition, when comparing the winning probability of the 12-choice push order + bell push with the winning probability of the 8-choice push order + bell push, the winning probability of the 12-choice push order + bell push may be configured to be higher.

By configuring it in this way, the probability of winning the role that is the target of the 12-choice correct operation challenge performance is increased, making it easier to execute the correct operation challenge performance at any time.

In addition, the payout number of high bells in the 12-choice push order + push bell sequence is configured to be the same as the payout number of high bells in the 8-choice push order + push bell sequence.

By configuring it this way, even if the high bell stops without the correct operation challenge effect occurring and the push order notification effect occurring, the payout amount is the same, so it is difficult to tell whether the 12-choice push order + push order bell or the 8-choice push order + push order bell has been won.

In addition, when comparing the number of payouts for high bells in a 12-choice push order + key press bell and the number of payouts for high bells in an 8-choice push order + key press bell, the number of payouts for high bells in an 8-choice push order + key press bell may be configured to be greater.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent an increase in payouts due to the first stop operation of the left reel during non-AT.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge performance when the 12-choice push sequence + eye-pressing bell is won, the 12-choice challenge is to guess one of the 12 types of push sequences + eye-pressing by not announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-pressing pattern, and not announcing the correct push sequence for the second stop either, or to announce one incorrect push sequence for the first stop but not announcing the eye-pressing pattern (making the correct push sequence for the first stop + eye-pressing four options) and not announcing the correct push sequence for the second stop, allowing for 8 types of push sequences + eye-pressing. There are eight-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of six different push sequences + push sequences; a six-choice challenge in which the correct push sequence for the first stop and push sequence pattern are not announced, but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced, or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced, but the push sequence pattern is announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; and a six-choice challenge in which the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced, but the push sequence is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced, and the incorrect push sequence for the first stop is announced. The four-choice challenge is to announce one of the four push sequences + the push pattern (the first stop correct push sequence + the push sequence is set to four options) and announce the second stop correct push sequence, or to announce one of the first stop incorrect push sequences and the push sequence pattern (the first stop correct push sequence is set to two options) and not announce the second stop correct push sequence, making it a four-choice challenge in which the player must guess one of the four push sequences + the push sequence. There are three-choice challenges that require the player to guess one of three different push sequences, and two-choice challenges that require the player to guess one of two push sequences + push sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the push sequence symbol and the correct push sequence for the second stop, announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the push sequence symbol but not the correct push sequence for the second stop, or an incorrect push sequence for the first stop and the push sequence symbol and an incorrect push sequence for the second stop are announced and the player is asked to guess one of two push sequences + push sequences. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, no indication monitor display is performed.

In addition, as a correct operation challenge performance when the 8-choice push sequence + eye-touch bell is won, there are 8-choice challenges in which the player must guess one of the 8 types of push sequences + eye-touches by not announcing the correct push sequence and eye-touch pattern for the first stop, nor the correct push sequence for the second stop; 8-choice challenges in which the correct push sequence and eye-touch pattern for the first stop are not announced, but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced; the correct push sequence for the first stop is announced but the eye-touch pattern is not announced and the correct push sequence for the second stop is not announced; or the correct push sequence for the first stop is not announced but the eye-touch pattern is not announced but the correct push sequence for the second stop is announced. There are four-choice challenges in which the player is prompted to guess one of four different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop, or two-choice challenges in which the player is prompted to guess one of two different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences by announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop but not the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop, announcing the correct push sequence for the first stop and the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop but not the correct push sequence for the first stop, or announcing the eye-pressing pattern for the second stop but not the correct push sequence for the first stop, and allowing the player to guess one of two different push sequences + eye-pressing sequences. In any of these correct operation challenge presentation modes, the instruction monitor is displayed.

<Guaranteed lottery when eye-pressing challenge fails> When the 12-choice push sequence + eye-pressing bell, 8-choice push sequence + eye-pressing bell, or replay-A is selected, a correct operation challenge performance (eye-pressing challenge performance) is executed, and a certain amount of profit is awarded even if the player fails the eye-pressing challenge as a result of the player performing the stop operation.

If the player fails to stop the machine when the eye-pressing challenge is performed, a guarantee lottery will be held by referencing the symbol combination when all reels have stopped.

For example, if WIN-C1 is won, and the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, one of the winning symbol combinations 01 to 04 will stop when all the reels have stopped, and if the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, one of the winning symbol combinations 25 to 40 will stop when all the reels have stopped. If the winning symbol combination 01 to 04 has stopped during the processing when all the reels have stopped, an AT addition lottery is executed, and if the winning symbol combination 25 to 40 has stopped, a guarantee lottery is executed.

In this case, when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 50% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games; when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 50 games, and when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, there is a 100% probability that the number of AT games will be increased by 10 games; Possible modes include a 100% probability of adding 50 AT games when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, and a 10% probability of adding 10 AT games when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel, or a 100% probability of adding 50 AT games when the first stop is aimed at the red seven symbol on the left reel, and a 10% probability of adding 100 AT games when the first stop is aimed at the white seven symbol on the left reel.

In other words, the expected value of the profit given to the player is lower if the eye-pressing challenge fails than if it is successful.

By configuring it this way, even players who are not confident in their ability to press buttons can actively take on the challenge, increasing the fun of the game.

<Left Push Recommended Lamp> When the biased bell is won, the left reel is stopped first, and the AT lottery is executed with a higher probability than when a reel other than the left reel is stopped first, so that the player's frequency of getting a high-value bell is reduced by stopping the left reel first during normal play, but it is a relatively advantageous operation mode because the AT lottery can be accepted. Also, even if the biased bell is won during normal play (non-AT), the instruction monitor is hidden (no instruction information is displayed).

However, since there is a possibility that a player without prior knowledge may stop the middle or right reel first without realizing that the game is played with the left reel as the first stop, a left push recommendation lamp is provided and is configured to light up when the game is played with the left reel as the first stop.

The left push recommendation lamp consists of a single red LED and is located in a position visible to the player (for example, on the middle panel, the operation panel 11, the lower panel 5, etc.). However, the left push recommendation lamp may also be composed of a green LED or a full-color LED.

The left push recommendation lamp has a smaller lighting area than the instruction monitor, making the instruction monitor easier for players to see than the left push recommendation lamp.

The left-push recommendation lamp can be a lamp managed by the main control means or a lamp managed by the sub-control means, and as long as each control means is configured to be able to determine whether it is non-AT or AT, the lamp can be switched on and off.

The left push recommendation lamp remains lit when not in AT, and turns on if AT is not in effect after power is turned on and remains lit until AT begins.

The left push recommendation lamp will also remain lit even in non-AT situations where the payout remains the same whether the middle or right reel is the first stop or the left reel is the first stop (for example, when there is a miss win or when a push order-independent condition device wins and the AT lottery is not held or the AT lottery is held regardless of the push order).

This configuration can prevent players from noticing that they have won a prize just from the lighting status of the lamp. It also reduces the amount of eye movement the player has to make as the lamp repeatedly lights up and goes out, which can reduce fatigue caused by the player.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is configured to display a demo screen a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) after all reels have stopped (the demo time timing of the sub-control means), but even when the demo screen is being displayed, the left press recommendation lamp remains lit (it stays lit when the left press recommendation lamp is lit, and it stays off when it is off).

By configuring it in this way, players who start playing while the demo screen is being displayed can be made aware that the left reel will be the first stop.

The gaming machine of this embodiment is designed to display the menu screen when the sub-switch 20 is pressed at a certain timing after all reels have stopped (timing when the menu screen can be displayed), but even when the menu screen is displayed, the left push recommendation lamp remains lit (it stays lit when the left push recommendation lamp is lit, and it stays off when it is off).

By configuring it in this way, players who start playing while the menu screen is displayed can be made aware that the left reel will be the first stop.

Also, when starting an AT from a non-AT, the left push recommendation lamp goes out. The AT can start when all reels have stopped and the AT state has been set (after the end of the game immediately before the AT start), or when the start switch for the next game in which the AT state has been set when all reels have stopped (AT start game) is operated.

In addition, when the AT changes to non-AT (when the AT ends), the left press recommendation lamp lights up. The AT changes to non-AT may be triggered after all reels have stopped in the final AT game, or by operating the start switch for the game after the final AT game, or when the advantageous zone ends. In order to avoid cases where the lighting of the left press recommendation lamp confirms that the AT will not continue (for example, a revival suggestion is made during a defeat performance but the left press recommendation lamp is lit), the left press recommendation lamp is set to light up after it is confirmed that there will be no revival when a revival suggestion is made.

In addition, if the left press recommendation lamp is on when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the left press recommendation lamp may be turned off or may remain lit. If the left press recommendation lamp is turned off, it will be turned on again when the setting confirmation mode is ended.

By configuring it in this way, since the administrator sets the settings during setting confirmation mode, there is no need to notify the player. It is also possible to have the administrator confirm that the control of the left press recommended lamp is normal (the lamp can be switched on and off) by turning off the left press recommended lamp during setting confirmation mode. In this case, when the left press recommended lamp is off and the mode is switched to setting confirmation mode, the left press recommended lamp may remain off or may be switched on (if the left press recommended lamp is off and the mode is switched to setting confirmation mode and the left press recommended lamp is on, the left press recommended lamp will be turned off when the setting confirmation mode ends).

If the power is cut off while the left press recommended lamp is on, and the setting key is turned ON when the power is turned back on and the setting change mode is entered, the left press recommended lamp may be turned off or may remain lit. If the left press recommended lamp is turned off, it will be turned on again when the setting change mode is ended.

By configuring it in this way, since the administrator sets the settings during setting change mode, there is no need to notify the player. It is also possible to have the administrator confirm that the control of the left press recommended lamp is normal (the lamp can be switched on and off) by turning off the left press recommended lamp during setting change mode. In this case, when the left press recommended lamp is off and the mode is switched to setting change mode, the left press recommended lamp may remain off or may be switched on (if the left press recommended lamp is off and the mode is switched to setting change mode and the left press recommended lamp is on, the left press recommended lamp will be turned off when the setting change mode ends).

The left push recommendation lamp may also remain lit during the AT. In this case, the left push recommendation lamp remains lit whether the first left stop correct bell is won, the first middle stop correct bell is won, or the first right stop correct bell is won. This is because the lamp is lit to indicate that pushing left is recommended for the gaming machine as a whole, and is a possible configuration when not corresponding to an individual condition device. Note that, because an instruction monitor is displayed during the AT, the player is able to know the push order even if the left push recommendation lamp is lit.

In this case, the left-press recommendation lamp is not lit depending on the state, which reduces the program capacity and eliminates program complexity.

If the power is cut off when the left press recommended lamp is on, and the left press recommended lamp is turned on when the power is turned on again, but if the power is cut off when the left press recommended lamp is off and the power is turned on again, the left press recommended lamp will not be turned on.

By configuring it this way, it is possible to prevent the player from thinking that they need to press left even if the light is only lit for a moment.

<Modes related to BGM> In this embodiment, the BGM-related modes include a normal mode (sometimes referred to as a first mode) and a distribution mode (sometimes referred to as a second mode). In the normal mode, the BGM that is set in advance for each performance stage, consecutive performance, and chance performance can be output from the speaker S, regardless of whether the BGM is a BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred or a BGM that is copyright-free (not protected by copyright) for which a music usage fee is not incurred. In the distribution mode, the BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred is not output from the speaker S, and only copyright-free BGM is output from the speaker S. When BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred is set in advance as the performance stage BGM, the BGM for consecutive performances, the BGM for chance performances, etc., the copyright-free BGM is output from the speaker S instead of the BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred. Note that output from the speaker S may simply be referred to as BGM being played.

In this way, even if the same performance stage, the same consecutive performance, or the same chance performance is being performed, the background music output from the speaker S may be different when the normal mode is set to normal mode and when the distribution mode is set to distribution mode.

Previously, in order to avoid copyright infringement when uploading videos of gameplay to social media or video distribution sites, it was necessary to take measures such as editing out the parts where background music was being played, making them silent, or overlaying them with different background music.

In this embodiment, when the distribution mode is set, copyright-free background music is played instead of background music for which a music usage fee is incurred. Therefore, if the distribution mode is set and the gameplay is recorded, the recorded video can be uploaded to social media or a video distribution site without infringing the copyright of the music recorded on the gaming machine. By setting the game to distribution mode in this way, the effort required to avoid copyright infringement can be significantly reduced.

Even if the distribution mode is set, the BGM output from the speaker S may be configured not to be changed to copyright-free BGM in certain situations (for example, during so-called bonuses or endings, situations that are important in terms of presenting the worldview of the original anime or drama, or situations where the video and BGM are closely linked and changing the BGM would diminish the quality of the video, etc.). By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid drastically reducing the interest of the presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, copyright-free BGM is played when the distribution mode is set, but this is not limiting, and BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred may be played silently (volume level 0). When configured in this way, it is preferable to play BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred silently regardless of the set volume level, while sound effects such as winning sounds, payout sounds, and stopping sounds, as well as copyright-free BGM, are output from speaker S at a volume that corresponds to the set volume level. By configuring in this way, it is possible to avoid copyright infringement for music while not drastically reducing the entertainment value of the presentation.

<Explanation regarding the period during which the BGM mode can be changed> In this embodiment, the BGM mode can be changed during the period from a predetermined timing after the end of a game (for example, two seconds after the end of a game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has been completed, after the payout process has been completed, etc.)) until the start operation of the next game (betting operation or start switch operation) is performed. In other words, the BGM mode cannot be changed during a game from the start of the game to the end of the game.

By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from accidentally switching the BGM mode during play, which could stop the game progress or prevent the player from being able to concentrate on the presentation. Note that it may also be possible to configure it so that the BGM mode can be switched even during play.

In addition, while the BGM mode can be changed during the period when it is possible to change the BGM mode, regardless of whether the game screen or the demo screen is being displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the BGM mode may not be changed while the demo screen is being displayed. In addition, the BGM mode may not be changed after a specified game has ended (for example, after a game in which a continuous performance has ended or after a game in which a specified chance performance has been executed has ended) or while the menu screen is being displayed.

The system may also be configured so that the BGM mode can be switched regardless of whether the game is in a normal zone or an advantageous zone. By configuring the system in this way, the player can switch the BGM mode without waiting for the game to move to an advantageous zone.

The system may also be configured so that the BGM mode can be switched only in favorable zones. By configuring the system in this way, it is possible to tell whether the zone is normal or favorable depending on whether the BGM mode can be switched.

<Explanation regarding the method of switching BGM-related modes> When it is desired to set the distribution mode, the device is configured to switch from normal mode to distribution mode by touching the LCD (in this embodiment, a so-called touch panel that combines a display device and an input device) a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) in a situation in which the BGM-related mode can be switched. Also, when it is desired to end the distribution mode, the device is configured to switch from distribution mode to normal mode by continuing to press the LCD for a predetermined period of time (e.g., five seconds) in a situation in which the BGM-related mode can be switched.

In this way, by making the operation complicated when setting the distribution mode, it is possible to prevent the player from accidentally setting the distribution mode, and by making the operation simple when returning to normal mode, it is possible to reduce the effort required by the player.

In this embodiment, the BGM mode can be switched by touching the LCD screen, but the invention is not limited to this and a BGM mode item may be provided as a configurable item on the menu screen, allowing switching between normal mode and distribution mode. By configuring in this way, game-related setting items that can be set by the player can be consolidated on the menu screen, and even a player playing for the first time can easily recognize that the BGM mode can be switched by opening the menu screen.

Also, instead of touching the LCD, the BGM-related mode may be switched by operating a specific switch (e.g., a performance switch or a middle stop switch 13b, etc.). Specifically, when it is desired to set the distribution mode, the specific switch may be touched a specific number of times (e.g., five times) in a situation in which the BGM-related mode can be switched to switch from the normal mode to the distribution mode, and when it is desired to end the distribution mode, the LCD may be pressed and held for a specific period of time (e.g., five seconds) in a situation in which the BGM-related mode can be switched to switch from the distribution mode to the normal mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the BGM mode can be set at the player's discretion, but the present invention is not limited to this and may be configured so that only the staff of the gaming establishment can set it. Specifically, it may be configured so that it can only be set in an administrator menu (details will be omitted, but this is generally a mode that allows the setting of power saving mode and checking of error history, etc.) that can be set while checking or changing settings. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent a player from inadvertently setting it to distribution mode through mischief.

Next, using Figure 70, we will explain the LCD display when the device is set to normal mode and when it is set to distribution mode.

Figure 70(a) shows an example of a game screen when the normal mode is set. When the normal mode is set as shown in the figure, the LCD is configured not to display the currently set BGM mode.

Figure 70 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a game screen when the distribution mode is set. As shown in the figure, when the distribution mode is set, "Distribution mode" is displayed on the left edge of the liquid crystal as a display indicating the currently set BGM related mode, so that it is visibly configured to be set to distribution mode. In addition, when two seconds have passed since the end of one game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.) and it is possible to switch to normal mode, the explanation of the mode switching is displayed below the "Distribution mode" display, saying "Mode can be switched by pressing and holding the liquid crystal", and when the start operation of the next game (betting operation or start switch operation) is performed and it is not possible to switch to normal mode, the display of the explanation of the mode switching is terminated. In this way, when the game is ended while in distribution mode, the next player is configured to know that the distribution mode is set and how to return to normal mode.

Note that (1) the display of the currently set BGM mode and the display of the explanation for switching modes may be continued even while the demo screen is being displayed, (2) the display of the currently set BGM mode and the explanation for switching modes may not be displayed while the demo screen is being displayed, or (3) the display of the currently set BGM mode may be displayed while the demo screen is being displayed, but the explanation for switching modes may not be displayed.

Thus, the "Distribution mode" display is always displayed (it can be configured not to display during CZ, continuous performances, or on the demo screen), but the explanation of mode switching (the display of "Modes can be switched by pressing and holding the LCD screen" in Figure 70 (b)) is configured to only be displayed when the game is set to distribution mode and it is possible to switch from distribution mode to normal mode.

By notifying the player through a display on the LCD only when the machine is set to distribution mode in this way, it is possible to reduce displays that are not directly related to the effects that affect the progress of the game, allowing players who are not interested in video distribution to enjoy the effects to the fullest. Also, since "Distribution Mode" is displayed on the LCD when the machine is set to distribution mode, players can see at a glance that they can simply return to normal mode if they want to listen to background music for which a usage fee is charged, and it is also possible to prevent players from mistakenly thinking that a particular song is not included on the gaming machine.

Note that even when normal mode is set, the display may be configured to display "normal mode" on the left edge of the LCD screen to indicate the currently set BGM-related mode. In this case, it is preferable to configure the display to display an explanation of the mode change when it is possible to change the BGM-related mode even when normal mode is set. This configuration allows the player to properly understand the BGM-related mode.

<Regarding the distribution mode and the music selection function during AT> In this embodiment, a music selection function is provided that allows the player to arbitrarily select the BGM to be output from the speaker S during the AT. For example, in a situation where BGM1 is output from the speaker S as the default BGM predetermined for each production stage or game state, when BGM2 is selected by the music selection function, the BGM output from the speaker S is changed from BGM1 to BGM2.

Music selection is possible at a predetermined timing after the end of play during the AT (for example, 2 seconds after the end of play (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has been completed, after the payout process has been completed, etc.)), and at that predetermined timing the name of the BGM currently being played is displayed on the LCD; each time the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, the selected BGM is switched in sequence and the name of the selected BGM is displayed on the LCD; and when the sub-switch 20 is operated, the BGM corresponding to the currently displayed (selected) song name is played. For example, if the music list is configured in the following order: "BGM1 (copyright-free)" → "BGM2 (music usage fee applies)" → "BGM3 (copyright-free)" and the BGM currently being played is BGM1, then "BGM1" will be displayed in a specific display area of the LCD (for example, the edge of the LCD, such as the top right or bottom right) at a specific timing after the game ends, and each time the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, the display will switch in the following order: "BGM2" → "BGM3" → "BGM1" → "BGM2" ...

The music selection function may be configured to be unavailable after a game ends in a specific situation, such as when a game is playing during a continuous performance or when a specific chance performance has been executed. In this case, the name of the currently playing BGM is not displayed even at a specific timing after the game ends (for example, 2 seconds after the game ends (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.)), and the BGM is not changed even if the sub cross key switch 21 is operated. By configuring it in this way, the player can properly understand that a situation exists in which music selection is not possible.

The music selection function is available when the machine is set to normal mode, and is configured to be unavailable when the machine is set to distribution mode. Specifically, when the machine is in distribution mode during an AT, copyright-free BGM is played as the default BGM, and the name of the currently played BGM is not displayed even at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, two seconds after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has ended, after the payout process has ended, etc.)), and the BGM cannot be changed even if the sub cross key switch 21 is operated. This configuration allows the player to properly understand that a situation exists in which music cannot be selected.

Note that even when the AT is in the distribution mode, the music selection function may be configured to be available for copyright-free BGM. In this case, it is preferable to configure the system so that only the names of copyright-free BGM music are displayed even when the sub cross key switch 21 is operated, and the names of BGM music for which a music usage fee is incurred are not displayed (cannot be selected). For example, if the music list is configured in the following order: "BGM1 (copyright-free)" -> "BGM2 (music usage fee required)" -> "BGM3 (copyright-free)" and the BGM currently being played is BGM1, then "BGM1" is displayed on the LCD at a predetermined timing after the end of the game (for example, two seconds after the end of the game (after all reels have stopped, after the winning determination process has been completed, after the payout process has been completed, etc.)), and when the sub-cross key switch 21 is operated, "BGM3" is selected and "BGM3" is displayed on the LCD. In other words, the BGM for which a music usage fee is required is skipped and copyright-free BGM is selected and displayed on the LCD. This configuration prevents the player from mistakingly believing that the gaming machine is broken because BGM for which a music usage fee is required can be selected but not played.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a game other than the final game of a consecutive performance or CZ, the currently playing background music is changed to a dedicated background music (sometimes called confirmation background music) as a performance that notifies in advance that a bonus will be awarded in the final game (a performance in which the success of a consecutive performance or CS is confirmed in an intermediate game), and a performance in which a specific lamp among the LED lamps used for the performance is illuminated in rainbow colors (sometimes called confirmation performance A) can be executed.

In this embodiment, since BGM for which a music usage fee is incurred is used as the confirmed BGM, when confirmed performance A is executed in distribution mode, the BGM being played is not switched to the confirmed BGM but is instead configured to continue to be played. Even when distribution mode is set, as in normal mode, a specific lamp among the LED lamps used for performance is configured to light up in rainbow colors as part of confirmed performance A. On the other hand, when confirmed performance A is executed in normal mode, the BGM being played is configured to be switched to the confirmed BGM.

By configuring in this manner, it is possible to properly notify the player that a special benefit will be awarded in the final play of a consecutive performance or CZ, while avoiding copyright infringement of the music.

It should be noted that if you use copyright-free BGM as the confirmed BGM, there is no problem in switching to the confirmed BGM as confirmed performance A, just as in normal mode, even when the distribution mode is set.

In this embodiment, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) is used as an example of the gaming machine, but the invention can be applied to various gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines, jankyu gaming machines, Parrot, or casino machines.

The technical contents of this embodiment described above to explain the present invention can be combined as appropriate.

PS1: Slot machine PS2: Front panel PS3: Cabinet S: Speaker 100: Main control board 1000: Sub control board 4: Display window 5: Lower panel 6: Reel unit 7: Reel base 8a: Left reel 8b: Center reel 8c: Right reel 11: Operation panel 12: Start switch 13: Stop switch 13a: Left stop switch 13b: Center stop switch 13c: Right stop switch 17: Medal insertion slot 18: MAX bet switch 19: 1 bet switch 20: Sub switch 21: Sub cross key switch 22: Eject switch 24: Operation indicator lamp 24a: Left operation indicator lamp 24b: Center operation indicator lamp 24c: Right operation indicator lamp 25: Number of bets display lamp 25a: 1 bet lamp 25b: 2 bet lamp 25c: 3 bet lamp 26: Number of credits display 26a : Segment display 26b : Segment display 27 : Acquired coin count display 27a : Segment display 27b : Segment display 28 : Tray 29 : Cigarette ashtray 30 : Sticker storage section 32 : Display device 34 : Medal selector 37 : Setting key switch 38 : Setting switch 39 : Power supply 40 : Power switch 44 : Hopper 45 : Medal payout outlet 46 : Auxiliary tank 47 : External output terminal board

Claims (1)

A predetermined counter is provided,
The main process can be executed.
The timer interrupt process is executable when a predetermined counter times out.
The ROM area has a first control area in which a program related to the progress of a game is stored, and a second control area in which a program related to a gaming machine test is stored,
A vector address of the timer interrupt process is stored in the first control area,
A process for determining an RWM abnormality is executed after the power is turned on and updating of a value of a predetermined counter is started, and an instruction for permitting an interrupt is executable after the process for determining an RWM abnormality is executed;
The main process has a predetermined interrupt disabled section which is a section from an instruction that disables interrupts to an instruction that enables interrupts,
When a specified counter times out at timing A during a specified interrupt prohibited section, timer interrupt processing is not executed at timing A, but the value of the specified counter is updated even after timing A , and timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing B after the interrupt prohibited section ends, and thereafter, timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing C;
This gaming machine is characterized in that, when a period in which a predetermined counter times out is T and timing B is a specific timing before T has elapsed since timing A, timing C is the timing when T has elapsed since timing A.